Category: General

Foundation, Model, Principles of Curriculum Development – ​​Education is an important field for advancing a nation including the Indonesian nation where education is guaranteed by laws and other regulations. Moreover, in the preamble of the 1945 Constitution there is the state’s goal, namely to educate the life of the nation, which means that education is the key to making it happen.

The progress of society in a country can be seen from the quality of education that has been prepared by the government or related parties. Quality education can be identified through curriculum development which aims to form a comfortable learning environment so that learning objectives can be achieved. When students can learn comfortably, they can absorb what the teacher or educator conveys well.

Curriculum development is a process of planning and developing a curriculum by the government, schools or parties concerned to be able to achieve national education goals. The curriculum plays a strategic role in education, so that in its preparation and development, no one can do it haphazardly.

Its implementation must be based on values ​​that aim to build the character of students such as religious, moral, political, social, and cultural values. Besides that, other aspects must also be considered starting from the needs of students, the development of the times, and the readiness of teachers or education. There needs to be a correct and mature process so that the output or result will be as expected by all parties.

Curriculum Development Foundation

To carry out curriculum development, the developer must be based on a clear guideline so that the curriculum can be well directed. If it does not have a foundation, the consequences will be on the results of the curriculum itself, namely human resources cannot be formed optimally. There are four foundations used in its implementation.

1. Philosophical Foundation

The foundation of the first curriculum development is the philosophical foundation, which is related to the nature of philosophy as well as education. Philosophy or outlook on life in the world of education aims to provide direction for students in learning.

When having a clear learning direction, students can exploit the abilities that exist within them so they can achieve their best results. With regard to philosophy, every nation or group of people has different goals. Therefore, the direction of education is often not the same, but the result will be the same, namely to form the character of students well.

Indonesia has a clear curriculum development foundation, namely Pancasila. Therefore, the aim of Indonesian education is to form human beings who can live in the state, nation and society guided by Pancasila values.

The education system in this country has also been listed in Law Number 20 of 2003 concerning the National Education System (National Education System). The existence of these laws, the implementation in Indonesia must be based on these regulations so as not to deviate from the direction that should be achieved.

2. Psychological Foundation

Behavior is an inseparable part of learning. Interaction between individuals will occur in the learning environment, namely the physical environment and the social environment. Changes will be created in individuals to reach maturity in life starting from physical, emotional, mental, intellectual, social, and moral maturity. Education is indeed a process to change individual behavior for the better, but not all of these changes occur because of learning.

There are other factors outside that have the potential to change it, namely the maturity of each and the surrounding environment. There needs to be a curriculum development system that is used to be able to achieve the goals of education in changing student behavior.

The psychological foundation must be the basis for curriculum development to determine how a teaching system can work properly. So a developer can be based on two branches of psychology, namely educational psychology and learning psychology.

Educational psychology is the science of psychology that studies how individuals are able to receive stimuli or stimuli from outside to change themselves towards maturity in life. The approach in providing the right stimulus or stimulus can shape the character of students according to what is desired. There are three kinds of approaches used in educational psychology, namely cognitive, behavioristic, and humanistic approaches.

Developmental psychology is also the basis because it can understand the process of individuals reaching behavioral maturity through a coherent process. Maturity in a person can be achieved because he can complete developmental tasks in the phase of his life.

The stages of psychological development of students are divided into three, namely pre-school age, elementary school age, and middle school age. After all, understanding students is important because the evaluation of the curriculum that has been prepared can be done well. The evaluation material referred to is the ability that can be achieved, the method of delivering the appropriate material, and the preparation of learning evaluations.

3. Sociological Basis

What are the reasons why curriculum development must be based on sociological factors? This is because students are social individuals who are closely related to interactions in the surrounding social environment in the form of society. The values ​​obtained during the teaching and learning process must be in accordance with the values ​​that develop in society in building life.

Because, when the individual has finished completing his education he will plunge into the life of the community to apply what he has learned while studying. The cultures that develop in the surrounding environment and the social life system are the basis or foundation of the curriculum that runs in the world of education.

Curriculum development is not only based on skills, but is more global and technological because the times are constantly evolving. Changes in culture and social values ​​that continue to occur are a consideration, where now people’s needs are experiencing many changes.

The needs of people in urban areas will be different from rural communities and traditional communities will be different from more modern societies. A curriculum that is developed without regard to culture or community values ​​will create human resources that cannot build a better life.

Especially in solving various kinds of complex problems, graduates who are qualified and understand community problems can provide solutions that are solutions.

4. Scientific and Technological Foundation

Today, the development of science and technology has undergone many changes compared to when it was first developed several centuries ago. Today’s science and technology is largely based on inventions in the Middle Ages by well-known figures in certain fields.

These changes have a considerable influence on education, especially in the industrial world. Education is expected to be able to form people who are skilled and reliable in applying their knowledge in the industrial world. Curriculum development in accordance with the needs of science and technology must be arranged as well as possible.

The use of various equipment that supports teaching and learning activities is also necessary considering that recent technological developments have become increasingly sophisticated. What are the demands of teachers or educators and education implementers to be skilled and proficient in using it so that they are able to transfer it to students.

Considering that education is a place to prepare humans for the future, curriculum development must be based on science and technology. The development of science and technology has an indirect impact including the development of content or learning materials and media.

Education is indirectly required to equip individuals to be able to solve various problems in life with the knowledge and technology they have. That way, students are able to change life towards a clearer direction and describe existing problems.

Curriculum Development Model

In practice, curriculum development can be done through 7 models. The models in question are the Administrative Model, the Grass Roots Approach, the Beauchamp Model, the Demonstration Model, the Problem Solving Model, the Rogers Model and the Reverse Taba Model.

1. Administrative Model (Top Down Approach)

The first model is administrative where this model is carried out by parties who have the authority or related policies. The flow is from top to bottom, meaning that the government is in charge of preparing learning plans. The design will later be carried out by the education unit in the government area and the operation will be carried out by the teachers in learning.

All kinds of processes starting from the general concept, the foundation used, needs analysis, curriculum formulation are all carried out by the government. Related parties only act as executors at the lower level to be applied to students later.

2. The Grass Roots Approach Model

This model is the opposite of the administrative model, where curriculum development in the administrative model is fully carried out by the government. In the grass roots approach model, educational units or schools develop learning models to be applied in the learning process.

Usually this arises because schools or teachers feel that the curriculum set by the government is not in accordance with the needs and conditions that occur in the field. As a consequence, schools must be able to develop innovative ideas and have responsibility for the implementation of teaching and learning activities. Openness to input and suggestions from outside must also be owned by the school so that in future preparation it can run better

In practice, curriculum development can be carried out as a whole or for certain subjects only. This depends on the needs of the educational unit involved in it. Development can also be done for other aspects such as learning strategies and methods, learning objectives, vision and mission, and others.

3. Beauchamp models

As the name implies, this model was developed by Beauchamp who is an expert in the field of curriculum. He stated that there are 5 stages of curriculum development, the first is to determine the scope of development. At first it can be done in the classroom, then it can be expanded to schools, then it can be expanded again to the regional or even national level.

The second is the determination of the parties involved in which there are curriculum experts. The third is the formation of a council as a coordinator with the task of being an assessment team of the implementation of the previous curriculum, selecting materials, and writing the new curriculum.

The fourth stage is the implementation of the curriculum with the task of establishing a new curriculum that has been determined. The last is an evaluation of the ongoing implementation, whether it is in accordance with the objectives or not. This model can be a suitable alternative because it involves curriculum experts.

4. Model Demonstration

The demonstration model is actually similar to the grass roots model, that is, they both come from the education unit or from below. In it there are teachers who will work closely with experts in conducting curriculum development. However, its scope is limited to only a few schools in the vicinity. This model is considered the simplest because of its small scale.

5. Problem Solving Model

Social change is the basis of the problem solving model. In the process, this model involves all parties to be equally involved, namely students, parents, and the school itself. Involving student guardians can indirectly help solve problems that exist in the community because student guardians are part of the community.

There are two steps taken in compiling this model curriculum. the first is to conduct an in-depth study of the data obtained as a basis for compilation. The data in question must be valid and reliable so that there is a strong basis for decision making.

Weak data results in making wrong decisions so that they cannot solve problems. The second is the implementation of the decisions that have been taken and if there are problems it can be used as evaluation material.

6.Rogers models

The Rogers model is the brainchild of Carl Rogers, a psychologist. He is of the view that humans actually have a lot of potential that can be developed, but they have obstacles in developing it.

Humans individually need other people in order to overcome the obstacles in them. He applied his thoughts in the teaching and learning process so that individuals were able to achieve self-actualization.

Rogers suggested that there are four stages of curriculum development. The first is the formation of a team or group to jointly discuss problems with problematic systems. The second is to describe the problems faced by each person in the team so that they can share experiences.

Furthermore, meetings with a wider scope involving the community (students and parents) to discuss the problems faced. The last is to hold a meeting once again so that a solution to the problems described earlier emerges.

7. The Taba Reverse Model

This model has another name, namely Taba’s Inverted which was created by Hilda Taba. Curriculum development is generally deductive in nature, namely compiling a system and conducting an evaluation at the end of implementation. Taba believes that this method is not suitable and cannot provide innovation.

Taba introduces a development method that begins with searching data and experimenting with existing theories and then implementing them. It aims to match the theory that has been used so far with practice in the field.

The stages of this model are divided into five. The first determines the needs related to materials, teaching materials, and assessments to be arranged in a curriculum unit. Furthermore, trials were carried out to find out what the strengths and weaknesses were.

Third, revising the weaknesses encountered during the curriculum trials. The fourth is developing a theoretical framework and finally establishing a new curriculum.

Principles of Curriculum Development

In curriculum development, there are seven principles that must be fulfilled in its implementation. The seven principles in question are as follows.

1. The curriculum is structured based on the principle of finding potential in students so they can achieve their best abilities. In addition, it must also pay attention to the interests and needs and demands of the environment.
2. Paying attention to the diverse characteristics of students ranging from religion, socio-culture, customs, gender, and so on. There is no distinction for this diversity.
3. Adjusting to the development of science and technology in order to adapt to the changes that exist.
4. Able to meet the needs of the community as a solver of various problems faced in life.
5. Comprehensive and continuous, meaning that every lesson given to students is in accordance with their level of education and continues to a higher level.
6. The curriculum is structured so that humans can learn throughout life. This is intended so that humans do not stop to learn new things that are useful for life and the development of the times.
7. National interests must be balanced with regional interests. This means that there should be no conflicting objectives between parties in accordance with the ideals of the state.

Curriculum development must be prepared based on a solid and clear foundation so that the objectives of implementing education can be achieved. In order for the curriculum to function properly, the developer can choose a model that is appropriate to the conditions of society in general. The hope is of course one, to create human beings who are able to solve various kinds of problems faced by society.

Forms of Social Change – Social change is a form of transition that changes people’s lifestyles and can continue to occur and change due to the dynamics of social life. Sinaumed’s, Maybe you can easily adapt to the environment without difficulty. However, some people struggle to adapt to changes in society, making them feel different and uncomfortable in a rapidly changing environment. So why is there this form of social change in society?

In social life, the form of change is a very interesting study. Starting from the emergence of forms of social change, it is possible to change the symptoms and structure of society. Whether we realize it or not, a form of social change must occur within human groups and has always occurred for centuries. We can see that the process of change is natural and natural with human nature.

Below is an explanation of the forms of social change that Grammeds needs to know in order to understand the processes that occur in human development from time to time.

Understanding Forms of Social Change

What is a form of social change? As already mentioned a little bit in the first paragraph, social change is a form of transition that signifies a change in the social conditions of society, whether big or small and internal or external. The following is a definition of a form of social change from experts in this field:

1. Hirschmann

Hirschman defines socio-cultural change as a phenomenon that is influenced by communication, methods, and people’s way of thinking. This includes the influence of internal and external factors. Internal factors can be affected by conflicts, population changes, revolutions, new discoveries, and more. According to Hirschmann, socio-cultural changes that are influenced by external factors can be caused by natural disasters, foreign cultural influences, wars and even climate change.

2. Max Iver

Max Iver is one of the sociologists who also talks about social and cultural change. Social culture is defined as social change with social relations.

3. Max Weber

Contrary to Max Weber’s opinion, socio-cultural change is a condition that occurs in society caused by dissimilarity with existing elements.

4. Gillins

This is different from Gillin’s view of social change as a way of life that is influenced by changes in material and cultural conditions, changes in geographical conditions, demography, idealism, and new discoveries.

5. Kornblum

Kornblum, socio-cultural changes are caused by changes in cultural composition. Be it gradual change or long term change.

6. Kingsley Davis

In human society, Kingsley Davis defines social change as changes that occur in the structure and functioning of society.

7. Selo Sumardjan

More simply, Selo Soemardjan stated that sociocultural change is a change in social institutions. From some of the opinions above, we can conclude that forms of social change are caused by structural changes and changes in social functions. When social change changes, it automatically affects the culture of the community itself.

8. William F. Ogburn

William F. Ogburn, social change focuses on technological conditions that bring changes in certain aspects of human social life. An example of this social change is the advancement of science and technology which has a major impact on people’s mindsets.

Factors Occurrence of Social Change

Forms of social change do not only occur without symptoms and encouragement. In fact, there are several factors that are the strongest for this social change to occur. The following are some of the driving forces of social change that need to be known in order to recognize signs of emerging forms of social change:

1. New Discoveries

The existence of new discoveries in a particular society will bring changes in social conditions. A new culture that can replace or blend into one.

2. Population Impact

The number of population can have an impact on social change because it can affect the structure and society. Population is also an advantage of how social change can occur, and the more people adopt a new culture, the easier it is for the old culture to be lost or replaced.

3. The emergence of conflict

Conflict, competition, or conflict occurs naturally within certain social groups. Conflicts in society can occur because of pluralism or the emergence of a majority and a minority in a particular community. From these conflicts, social groups must find answers to these problems, which creates new cultures and new social phenomena.

4. There was a Revolution

Revolutions and rebellions can also influence the emergence of social change. This is because this phenomenon is a sign that something new needs to be done. For example, there are wars and natural disasters.

5. Openness of social class

The openness of social class can be a factor in social change, because the existence of social type has a big influence on reactions to new things. Influential people are those who are open and receptive to new things and can easily accept these changes. In an ever-changing society, social change is constantly developing and renewing itself. This is also discussed in John Scott’s book entitled Sociology of Social Change .

6. Achievement Motivation

People with achievement motivation means having the desire to progress and develop. This allows people to be more open to new things, because they are aware of changes for the better. This factor can have a positive impact on social change that occurs in society.

7. A More Advanced Education System

Talking about social change cannot be separated from the element of education which plays an important role in bringing about social change. The benchmark is the further development of education. That is, only education learns how to deal with change. The higher the quality of education, the more likely a person is to gain his own perspective and insight to embrace change.

Forms of Social Change

After experiencing the process of social change, new forms of social change are created that change according to the conditions that occur. The following are forms of social change that Sinaumed’s needs to know about:

1. Evolution and Revolution

a. Evolution

Evolution is social change that lasts a long time and occurs without the will of society itself. Subsequent evolutionary social changes are influenced by the urge of society to adapt to the times.

b. Revolution

Revolution is social change that occurs over a period of rapid and unplanned. Therefore, revolution is not evolution but social change.

2. Planned and unplanned

a. Planned Changes

This social change is said to have been planned because the change occurred in accordance with what was predicted or planned by the party making the change. The party making the change is called the change agent.

b. Unplanned Change

Social change is said to be unplanned because it occurs suddenly or without any prior planning. Unplanned forms of social change are usually championed or debated by affected communities.

3. Big and Small Changes

a. Small Changes

Small social changes usually occur in elements of change that do not have a big impact, such as fashion and lifestyle.

b. Major changes

Major forms of social change usually generate controversy among people because of their existence. In addition, major social changes require the participation of many people, which causes reactions and resistance from many groups. That is, social change is important and significant. No matter how big or small the change, social change is inevitable. Every minute there is social change discussed in the following social change theories and strategies.

Examples of Forms of Social Change

After understanding the meaning, factors, and concepts of forms of social change. Sinaumed’s also needs to understand the examples in practice in the field. The following are examples of forms of socio-cultural change from several case studies:

1. Examples of Forms of Major Socio-Cultural Change

Twenty years ago, Indonesian agriculture was still simple and manual. Starting from the nursery to planting, tending, caring for and harvesting rice, it’s very easy. But now it’s not anymore, it used to be grown in paddy fields, but now it can be grown indoors or with advanced technology.

In the past, planting rice by hand manually, now you can use a car engine. The same goes for harvest time. No longer harvested manually, but can be harvested automatically with a tractor. The world of agriculture is now increasingly sophisticated.

Of course, some people accepted this cultural change well, while others resisted it. This method was rejected by village farmers who were constrained by costs. This is because the machines used are expensive. However, some people who have money prefer this method because the process is fast.

2. Examples of Small Socio-Cultural Changes

Lifestyle changes are changes that don’t have a big impact. An example that we often see is a change in dress style. People dress without hijab. On the other hand, only a handful of people wear the hijab. Now it has changed, most of them use hijab in their daily life.

It is this headscarf that encourages people around us to wear the headscarf, not out of obligation, because of high environmental factors. But because of the influence of the environment and fashion. However, these socio-cultural changes did not cause major conflicts or contradictions in society.

3. Examples of Forms of Socio-Cultural Change Influenced by Other Countries

As a colonial country that was once colonized by Western countries, it turns out that Indonesia has also experienced socio-cultural changes. One of the positive impacts is the transformation of science and technology. Currently, Indonesia is starting to introduce the newest and latest technology from Western countries.

Unfortunately, some people are attracted to the bad. For example, influencing the lifestyle of Westerners such as drinking alcohol, being influenced by social culture that is not aware of courtesy to parents, and influencing lifestyle.

4. Examples of Forms of Socio-Cultural Change in Religion

An example of social change related to religion is Islamic culture. Indonesia is known as an Islamic country which also experiences acculturation. Of course for Muslims, the tower is not something foreign to us, is it?

Some mosques have minarets. The word tower turns out to be a form of acculturation. Gus Muwafiq once told this about the origins of the use of minarets in every mosque. In the past, when Islam had not been introduced, our nation’s ancestors had their own beliefs in being social and cultured.

This means that before Sayidina Ali went to Persia, our nation’s ancestors had already believed in their god, namely worshiping fire. When Islam came, belief in fire began to disappear. However, in practice there are still some who believe in and worship fire in the area near or in front of the mosque, so a tall pillar is built for the fire which is finally named manoro.

The sage managed to put out the fire and minarets were built in all the mosques. After that, the world copied the minaret in every mosque. Well, this story shows that Indonesia has experienced a form of socio-cultural change before the colonial era.

5. Building

The Demak Mosque is one of the oldest mosques in Java. Yogyakarta also has Demak City as the first Islamic Mataram Mosque. In terms of buildings, these two mosques have a blend of the culture of our ancestors. For example, in the city of Demak, the roof is arranged like a Hindu temple in South Asia. On the other hand, the architectural pattern of the Islamic world also includes the Ottoman style with Byzantine, Indian and Shiro-Egyptian patterns. In fact, many mosque buildings were found which were influenced by Hindu-Buddhist architecture.

6. Examples of Socio-Cultural Changes in Old Javanese Culture During the Islamic Mataram Period

Socio-cultural changes have been found to have occurred since Islam, such as during the Mataram era. Sultan Agung has launched a policy of acculturation of ancient Javanese culture (Hindu-Buddhist era) with Islamic teachings. Sultan Agung’s policies have given birth to acculturation as follows:

Grebeg adapted for Islamic holidays. In other words, Eid al-Fitr and Maulid Nabi are called Grebeg Poso, and Grebeg Murid Gamelan Sekaten is played in Grebek Murid in the courtyard of the Grand Mosque. The year of Kaka (pronounced Saka), a relic of the Hindu-Buddhist era based on the course of the sun, the year of Kaka in 1633 AD shows that Saka in 15550 no longer counts the number of suns. Calculations are based on the moon’s journey with the Buddhist model year. The newly established year is called the Javanese Year and is still in use today.

7. Communication

So far, communication between humans is very easy because there is no good means of communication. If you want to invite someone to a meeting, they usually write to you in person or show up in person. When society changes, the process of technological change also affects the social and cultural conditions of human communication. Either way, now you can make direct calls, or even someone who already has WhatsApp can make an appointment through the messaging app.

8. Language

Most of the languages ​​used to speak in indigenous peoples use their respective regional languages. The difference is that the use of technology and social media has increased, and the language has changed. For example, if you initially attend primary and secondary schools in the area, then the language you use will be the local language, but if you study at a university, then you will start using Indonesian and adapt to the new environment.

However, this change also endangers the continuity of our national language in the future. Indonesia is rich in many languages, but when they decline and Indonesians stop using them to speak, those too will be forgotten and lost.

9. Agriculture and Plantation

More and more children are trying to become employees, and in the end there is a lot of uncultivated agricultural land. Indeed, to the extent that agricultural land is widely used and legalized. Ultimately, the land is sold for residential purposes, such as building or trading a house. Social changes and current views are changing the attitude of those who work from villages to cities abroad and become civil servants. The fact is, we cannot work and be healthy without food.

Well, that’s an explanation of the form of social change. Learning and appreciating social phenomena are endless. Because in essence humans are dynamic creatures, including socially. To better understand social phenomena, Sinaumed’s can look for reference sources in the sinaumedia book collection at www.sinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations on social change: Happy learning. #Friends Without Limits.

Forms of International Cooperation & Benefits for Countries – Every country certainly needs other countries. This is so that the country can make its people live in prosperity. And there has never been a country that has been able to work and develop its country independently without needing the slightest assistance from other countries.

Therefore, every country has a relationship or even cooperates with other countries. International cooperation is cooperation between two or more countries.

International cooperation has the main goal of mutual benefit and mutual benefit between the two countries, but also adheres to the political-economic guidelines of the countries that are cooperating.

In order for a country to increase its economic potential, it also includes the objectives of international cooperation. To be clearer, you can see the explanation below.

Definition of International Cooperation

International cooperation is defined in general, namely as cooperation involving most of the countries in the world or also countries throughout the world.

This international economic cooperation is intended to provide benefits to their respective countries. International cooperation can also be interpreted as a cooperative relationship between two or more countries in order to achieve certain goals.

International cooperation is generally carried out between countries in order to meet the needs of the people and other interests as well.

At a glance, that is the meaning of international cooperation. Some experts express opinions regarding the understanding of international cooperation. The definition of international cooperation according to experts is as follows.

1. Perwita and Yani

According to Perwita and Yani, international cooperation is a system of relations that is based on international life and is divided into various fields. Examples include the economic, ideological, political, socio-cultural, health, environmental, security and defense sectors.

2. Dougherty and Pfaltzgraff

International cooperation according to Dougherty and Pfaltzgraff is a relationship between countries that is being forged and does not have an element of coercion or violence. And also ratified by international law in an effort to give freedom to build the country itself.

3. Holsty

According to Holsti, international cooperation is collaboration that every country does when it sees a national problem that is happening in that country. This problem must be handled properly. Because it can also threaten the unity and integrity of a country, therefore the country will immediately try to solve the problem by establishing cooperation with other countries.

4. Charles Armor McCleland

The definition of international cooperation according to Charles was put forward through his book entitled Theory and the International System in 1966. In his writings Charles, he had the opinion that international cooperation is all forms of interaction that occur between people and countries and are carried out by the government or citizens. the.

5. Koesnadi Kartasasmita

According to Koesnadi, international cooperation is the result of international relations and also the result of increasing complexity in human life in today’s international society.

6. William D. Coplin

William D Colpin also expressed his opinion regarding international cooperation through an article entitled Introduction to International Politics: A Theoretical Overview in 1971. According to William international cooperation is cooperation that originates from a form for one reason, namely the state has a desire to carry out routine interactions and new. And also good in order to achieve common goals.

7. Theodore A Couloumbis and also James H Wolfe

Wolfe and Couloumbis also expressed the opinion that international cooperation is international relations in the form of interactions that occur between citizens of one country and another. Couloumbis and Wolfe expressed their opinion through their writing entitled Introduction to International Relations in 1986.

That was the meaning of international cooperation in general and also according to some experts. And from the understanding of some experts reveal that international cooperation is carried out in order to achieve a goal. Then what is the intended purpose of the notion of cooperation? Here’s an explanation.

International Cooperation Objectives

As has been explained by several experts regarding the notion of international cooperation. This international cooperation can be carried out by several countries that want to achieve common goals and want to prosper their countries. The main goal is, of course, for mutual benefit. But there are several other objectives of this international cooperation. Some of the objectives of the existence of international cooperation are as follows:

1. Strengthen Friendship Relations

The most basic purpose of this international cooperation is to strengthen friendship between one country and another country that is cooperating. By strengthening friendship between countries, it will prevent these countries from feeling hostile and prevent war.

2. Creating World Peace

While strengthening friendly relations, this cooperation can also create a sense of peace. Good friendship between countries that cooperate can create world peace.

World peace is something that everyone wants. Because when peace is created, a much better situation will also be created.

3. Can Increase Economic Growth

The next goal is the goal that every country generally wants to achieve. One of the goals of countries in establishing international cooperation is to support the economy and increase the economic growth of a country.

An example is the State of Indonesia which is a developing country. Because Indonesia is still a developing country, Indonesia wants to achieve its goal of becoming a developed country. Therefore, a country carries out various international cooperation, such as export and import activities.

4. Expanding the Workforce

With this international cooperation, a country can exchange students from one country to another, so that students will have experience and will form new experts.

The birth of these new experts will have a good impact on the country. In addition, citizens who have become experts can create new jobs and expand existing jobs in the country.

5. Improving Progress in Various Fields

Countries that are establishing international cooperation with other countries, it is
hoped that this cooperation can increase the progress of a country in various fields.

With international cooperation, it is hoped that the country will bring prosperity and progress in various fields.

6. To Complement State Needs

Generally, conditions in a country are different, and these climatic conditions make it difficult for several countries to fulfill the country’s needs, such as harvesting food from agricultural and marine products.

Therefore, with this international cooperation, the aim is to complement the needs of the country.

For example, like Indonesia which is an agricultural country, Indonesia certainly has more reserves of the staple rice compared to countries that do not have land for farming, such as most countries in Europe. Therefore, several countries that have established international cooperative relations with Indonesia aim to meet the economic needs of their countries.

7. Prevent Conflict

International cooperation also has the goal of preventing conflict between countries. By establishing cooperation, a very close friendship is formed with the cooperating countries, so as to prevent conflict with countries that agree to work together.

That was the goal to be achieved by a country when establishing an international cooperation with other countries. Then, does this international cooperation have benefits that will be obtained by a country? the existence of international cooperation can enable countries to experience various benefits from this cooperation, what are the benefits of international cooperation? Give me an explanation.

Benefits of International Cooperation

International cooperation is a relationship that is established with other countries, having the same goals and hopes for prosperity and benefits for the country itself and its citizens.

From these advantages, of course citizens can feel the various benefits in it. The following are the benefits that citizens feel from international cooperation:

1. Promote and improve the country’s economy. this can be seen in terms of transactions and also the results of export and import by the country.

2. Get the opportunity to study and seek knowledge and technology from developed countries

3. From international cooperation, of course foreign capital will easily enter

4. Making demand for a product increase with import and export from one country to another. This will certainly improve the economic condition of a country

5. Opportunity to increase the price of imported goods

6. Participate in educating the workforce because workers are always required to be disciplined, good work results because they will be exported to other countries

7. Countries that have cooperative ties with other countries will easily obtain inadequate production materials from their country of origin. which then from these raw materials will be produced into profitable finished materials

8. With this cooperation between countries, it will increasingly create wider employment opportunities, and decrease the unemployment rate in the country

9. Can speed up a plan/a business that requires sizable funds by borrowing from international banks

10. Preventing the fading of the culture of the country itself

The points above are various benefits that will be felt by citizens and the country itself when cooperating with other countries. How? very profitable right? after knowing the meaning and benefits, now we discuss the types and forms of international cooperation.

Forms of International Cooperation

Types of international cooperation is divided into. The following are various types of international cooperation that you need to know about. So that you can distinguish some of the cooperation carried out by several countries:

1. Bilateral International Cooperation

Bilateral international cooperation is cooperation that is established by two countries and is mutualism (mutual benefit). This cooperation can be achieved in terms of trade, food products and others.

Examples include, among other things, Indonesia cooperating with Asia Pacific which forms economic and trade agreements carried out by Asia Pacific in which other countries are involved.

Cooperation with Saudi Arabia related to the pilgrimage for Muslims is another example of bilateral international cooperation.

2. Multilateral Cooperation

This collaboration is a collaboration that is forged by many countries and there are no boundaries regarding regions or even regions.

This Multilateral Cooperation has 2 types of members, namely main members and active members. What is meant by prime member? Main members are members who have the power to act as intermediaries. While the active members are small countries whose movements are said to be quite limited, the strength they have is still below that of the main members.

Examples of multilateral international cooperation include:

• North American Free Trade Agreement or (NAFTA)
• Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries or (OPEC)
• United Nations (UN) or the United Nations (UN)
• World Trade Center Organization (WTO)
• International Monetary Fund (IMF)
• World Bank Economic and Social Council (ECOSOC)
• Organization of Islamic Cooperation (OKl) Non-Aligned Movement (NAM)

3. Regional Cooperation

Regional cooperation is a form of cooperation carried out by a country in one region. The purpose of this cooperation is to create free trade in a certain area.

One example of regional cooperation is the commission relationship carried out by the United Nations in East Asia.

Some other examples of regional cooperation are as follows:

• Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN)
• Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC)
• European Union (EU) or European Union

Examples of International Cooperation

International cooperation is a cooperation carried out by countries around the world. In this case there are no regional or regional boundaries. So, all countries in the world can and have the right to cooperate with other countries. Examples of international cooperation are as follows.

1. World Trade Organization (WTO)

This collaboration has the goal of being able to discuss and also find solutions to problems regarding trade that exists between countries. The WTO has several principles, starting from the principles of trade liberation, stability of trade relations between countries, and non-discrimination.

2. International Monetary Fund (IMF)

This one collaboration is a collaboration in the form of an organization. The IMF is also included in the cooperation that can provide loans to countries that are in need of funds. Usually, countries that need loan funds are countries that have unstable currency values ​​and cannot pay off their debts. This cooperation has the goal of increasing international economic stability.

3. South East Asia Treaty Organization (SEATO)

This collaboration is a collaboration in the form of an organization. Where SEATO was founded with the aim of preventing the growth of communism in Southeast Asia. This cooperation is formed directly by the military pact.

Those are some explanations about international cooperation, examples, and some of the benefits for countries. This information will certainly be very useful, especially for those of you who are struggling in the field of marketing or marketing. Because, international cooperation has many benefits that can be profitable. Both for the country and for the people themselves. International cooperation can also increase employment opportunities that can reduce unemployment in a country. In addition, with cooperation, between countries can help other countries that are in need of assistance.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Forms of Indonesian Economic Globalization – In at least the last century, the world has been increasingly hit by globalization. The rapid development of technology is suspected as one of the causes of this borderless world phenomenon .

The flow of globalization is increasingly unstoppable flooding all fields, including the economy. Economic globalization has various forms and various influences. We as citizens of the world are also “required” to understand and be aware of it. What’s that like? Read more in the article below!

A. Definition of Economic Globalization

Literally, globalization can be interpreted as the process of something becoming global. “Things” here can be technology, thinking, information, and people’s lifestyles.

According to Professor Selo Soemardjan—a professor in the field of sociology—, globalization is a process of establishing organizational and communication systems among world people to follow the same systems and various rules.

Globalization has distinctive characteristics, namely, changes in the form of technological development and progress, the emergence of interdependence between countries regarding economic production and markets, common problems of the countries of the world are increasing, and the occurrence of cultural exchanges and interactions between citizens of the world.

The term globalization has actually been used by the world community since the 19th century. It’s just that at that time the word used was globalize, which refers to the emergence of a network of economic and social systems on an international scale.

The term ‘globalization’ itself was first used in 1983 by Theodore Levitt, an economist. Levitt coined the term ‘globalization’ through his writings in the form of an article entitled Globalization of Markets which was published in the Harvard Business Review. Since then Levitt has been recognized by the world as the creator of the term ‘globalization’.

Globalization has now occurred in all areas of life, the economy is one of them, so that the concept of economic globalization emerged. The economic sector is indeed a field that is easily and quickly hit by globalization. This is because the needs of the economy around the world tend to be the same and uniform.

However, the economy is not the only sector affected by globalization. According to the Head of Research at the Global Cities Institute from RMIT University who is also a Lecturer in Global Studies, Manfred Steger, there are four main empirical dimensions of globalization, namely, economics, ecology, culture, and politics.

Later there was one additional dimension and became the fifth dimension of globalization, namely ideology. This fifth dimension crosses over the other four dimensions. Why is that? Because according to Steger, this ideological dimension is full of a set of norms, beliefs, claims, and explanations regarding the phenomenon of globalization itself.

Back to globalization in the economic field. What does economic globalization really mean? The phenomenon of economic assimilation and the emergence of economic dependence between nations—both at the local, regional and even national levels—through the intensive movement of technological products, goods, services and capital, is a definition of economic globalization.

Globalization in the current economic sector arises because of the rapid development of information on all activities that are production, marketing , as well as science and technology.

In simpler language, economic globalization puts the world into one unit, the goal is to build a large trading area that transcends national boundaries.

Economic globalization is also closely related to the phenomenon of free trade which seeks to remove various barriers to the trade process in the international arena. These series of obstacles are usually caused by export and/or import tariffs that are too high, causing prices of goods to no longer compete in a healthy manner.

Other barriers can also take the form of politics in trade adopted by a country. The political goal is none other than to protect the production process in that country. In theory, free trade overcomes these barriers.

Many people may be confused and wondering, has economic globalization occurred in the world, especially in Indonesia? To answer this question, there are several characteristics of economic globalization, namely:

• Technology is developing so rapidly, even across space and time. The existence of technology products such as satellites, television, mobile phones, and especially the internet, has succeeded in making the communication process in a global scope able to take place very quickly.
• Global problems that have attracted the attention of the whole world have increased in intensity, for example, multinational crises, regional regulations, and what is currently being paid the most attention to is the environment.
• The emergence of dependence on economic production and markets in world countries caused by global trade
• The occurrence of interactions that are cultural and cross-cultural among citizens of the world who ask various new things.

In Indonesia itself, the constitution that existed from the beginning put more emphasis on the planned economy which was clearly recorded in the Preamble of the 1945 Constitution. Study the national economic system, globalization, constitutional economics and economics in the book Globalization, Constitutional Economics, and the Economics Nobel .

B. Real Forms of Economic Globalization

Although it cannot be sensed directly, economic globalization has tangible forms that can be felt. This is because the phenomenon has a characteristic that makes it easy to identify. For example, there is a cultural relationship due to the emergence of dependence on global markets.

Is a well-known entrepreneur in Indonesia, Dr. Tanri Abeng, SE, MBA, who sparked the idea of ​​five forms of economic globalization. Apart from being an economic actor in his status as a businessman, Tanri Abeng has also served as a policy maker in the VII Development Cabinet and the Development Reform Cabinet, serving as Minister of State for the Empowerment of SOEs. He has also served as President Commissioner of Pertamina.

In this capacity, the following are Tanri Abeng’s ideas about some concrete forms of economic globalization:

1. Globalization of Production

The form of globalization of production is the existence of one or more companies that set up factories in many countries. This is done with the aim of minimizing production costs . The countries chosen are usually countries that have low wage rates. In addition, the import duty rates imposed by the country are also cheap.

Furthermore, the infrastructure in the country is sufficient to carry out production. Finally, the business climate in the destination country is also conducive to the production activities of these companies.

Companies that often globalization of production are usually those engaged in the manufacturing industry. Indonesia has also become one of the destination countries for this globalization of production. In the last few decades, many world-class manufacturing companies have flocked to set up their factories in Indonesia.

2. Globalization of Financing

Globalization of production can be done because of the globalization of financing, namely, loan facilities that can be obtained by international class companies in all countries in the world.

Apart from loans, global companies can also get facilities to carry out investments. This globalization of financing then allows international companies to produce and invest in many countries.

3. Labor Globalization

This phenomenon of globalization has recently become the subject of discussion in this country, both in cyberspace and in ground copy. The entry of foreign workers into a country is a sign of the globalization of this workforce.

In this case, global companies are very likely to use human resources from many countries in the world. The workforce used is also in accordance with the level. But unfortunately, this also opens up opportunities for these companies to use HR services that have international experience. Meanwhile, the majority of workers from developing countries or countries where they are produced will only be used to become laborers with menial jobs.

4. Globalization of Information Networks

The borderless world phenomenon is evident in the globalization of this information network. People everywhere can now quickly, easily and inexpensively access information from all over the world.

Advances in technology are allegedly the main cause of the emergence of this phenomenon, especially communication and information technology. In the end, it is this technological advance that is used by global companies to market their products throughout the world.

The entry of well-known international brands in the fashion and culinary fields eventually became global tastes. This is what is currently being felt in Indonesia. Not only in urban areas, people in rural areas feel more proud to use or consume international brands than locally produced ones.

5 Globalization of Trade

This phenomenon is the ultimate form of economic globalization. The globalization of trade is manifested by the presence of uniform tariffs.

In fact, it is not uncommon for countries in the world to reduce export and import tariffs and remove various non-tariff barriers. This is done so that global trade becomes faster, fairer, but at the same time has tighter competition.

With the rapid pace of global trade, issues regarding IPR, law violations in e-commerce , electronic contracts, consumer protection in cyberspace, and various other issues are increasing. Learn all about it in the book The Influence of the Era of Globalization on Business Law in Indonesia .

C. Influence and Impact of Economic Globalization in a Country

After examining the understanding of the forms of economic globalization above, of course this phenomenon creates significant influence and impact on a country. Like two sides of a coin, economic globalization has positive, beneficial impacts, but at the same time, negative and detrimental impacts are inevitable.

1. The Positive Impact of Economic Globalization

The existence of a global company that spreads its wings throughout the world is of course a breath of fresh air for the economy, especially for developing countries. Indonesia is no exception. This is a blessing in itself that must be grateful for, but at the same time it must be watched out for.

Here are some of the positive impacts of economic globalization in more detail:

1. Economic globalization is able to stimulate economic growth in destination countries—the majority of which are developing countries, our country also feels it
2. Economic globalization makes mechanisms and investment opportunities more open in the international arena
3.  Economic globalization encourages the world economy to continue to grow. Not only partial and sectoral, the world economy is growing as a whole. This is due to the fact that there are industries whose locations have changed so as to encourage efficiency
4. Increased income in developing countries as a result of free trade on an international scale is also a positive impact of economic globalization. The increase in income was ultimately able to reduce poverty in the world
5. Still related to the point above, the increased income of developing countries due to global trade can in turn increase per capita income on a global scale.
6. Economic globalization makes goods and services commodities in one country increase in variety. This is due to the many offers of various goods and services by many countries, so that the variations become more numerous in the global market. This increased variation also results in the fulfillment of the needs of the population in one country
7. Finally, economic globalization makes a country able to compete in global markets more efficiently.

2. Negative Impacts of Economic Globalization

As mentioned above, besides having a positive impact on economic globalization, at the same time it also has a negative impact. This is because every country must increase vigilance in order to face the negative impacts of this economic globalization.

The following are some of the negative impacts of economic globalization:

1. Economic globalization causes the process of economic adjustment in a country to be ineffective. This is due to the flexibility that the country must have as a demand when it wants to engage in global trade
2. Economic globalization also results in an increase in economic conditions that are unstable and sensitive to various events, for example the occurrence of war and the presence of terrorism in a country
3. Economic globalization triggers environmental damage. This is due to the increase in parties carrying out industrial activities, from production to consumption
4. Economic globalization causes an imbalance in per capita income between developing and developed countries
5. Still related to the point above, income inequality does not only occur between countries. This gap can also occur within the scope of a country. This is due to the uneven distribution of regions that are directly affected by globalization. Urban areas usually earn more than rural areas because they have greater access to global trade. This inequality is an unavoidable risk, although on the other hand globalization has a real impact on the economy as a whole
6.   Globalization of the economy results in a decrease in the level of security at work. This is the impact of the wider scope of the market, so that security when transacting or carrying out work becomes difficult to ensure.

D. The Effect of Economic Globalization on the Indonesian Economy

As a world citizen, Indonesia cannot escape the influence of economic globalization. In Indonesia, there are at least four sectors that are directly affected by economic globalization. The four sectors are labour, investment, exports and imports. As mentioned above, the perceived impact can be both positive and negative.

In addition to the four sectors above, the phenomenon of globalization is also capable of making changes to the behavior of economic actors towards the production process. The use of factors of production more efficiently and intensively is the impact of these changes.

The positive effects of economic globalization that can be felt in this country are the increasing frequency of investment and trade, as well as the increasingly competitive industry at the national level. Once again, like two sides of a coin, negative influences must also be borne. The national industry, which is increasingly full of competition, has resulted in the destruction of comfort among the people.

In addition, economic globalization has caused many traditional economic sectors to be abandoned by society. They flocked to migrate to a more modern economic sector. As a result, many traditional markets are now quieter. Therefore, in protecting these traditional markets, the book Managing Cultural Heritage, Caring for Civilization by the Editorial Team is here to answer this.

Thus, economic globalization is indeed a necessity, a phenomenon that cannot be avoided. This is a consequence as a citizen of the world. However, we need to remember that Indonesia also has noble cultural roots that should not be abandoned.

Being global is indeed important and even a requirement, but local wisdom should also be upheld. Think global, act local. Once again, being global is important to show our existence as citizens of the world, but don’t let your identity as a nation of Indonesia erode because of it.

E. Book Recommendations on Economic Globalization

1. The Influence of the Era of Globalization on Business Law in Indonesia

2. Indonesian Economic Politics

3. Monetary Economy: Case Study of Indonesia

Definition of forest – Have you ever asked, what the earth looked like long ago? The plains that are spread all over the earth may still be lush with forests and so many wild animals, even the open seas are still blue and clean.

The vast wilderness along with the wild animals beneath it, is a gift to be a breath for the earth. Brings many benefits to all life around it. However, the development of a civilization cannot be denied, that humans continue to develop and utilize all natural resources.

Forests are included as an ecosystem that is widely used and cannot be avoided from extinction. Can we imagine how many trees in the forest must be willing to cut down to open up transportation routes, settlements, industrial factories and magnificent buildings in the metropolitan area?

When humans have flocked to build civilization, it feels like being at the top of the highest food chain is not enough, because in the industrial era 4.0, human needs are also getting higher. Again, nature must be given up to realize the endless modernization project. However, one thing we must not forget is that none of this will last long without natural resources.

If forests lose their power to continue to provide breath for the earth and all creatures in it, then our hard work in building technology will be in vain. Therefore, it is important for us to start being aware of and maintaining the ecosystem chain so that natural resources exist forever.

So how big is the impact of the presence of forests on the sustainability of life throughout the earth?

Definition of Forest

Forests as terrestrial ecosystems are mostly grown by trees, dominating almost the entire land surface on earth. Forest can also be defined as an area of ​​trees that are closely spaced, on a number of lands that have ecological functions and are protected by law.

About 75% of the gross primary production of the earth’s biosphere is produced from forests, which has a huge impact on the continuity of life on the entire surface of the earth. Forests also contain 80% of the plant biomass on earth. In addition, there are at least 21.9 gigatonnes of carbon as a result of primary production that tropical forests can provide annually.

There are at least five countries that contribute half of the world’s forests, such as Brazil, Canada, China, the United States and Russia. Not only that, most of the world’s forests are found mostly in tropical regions, depending on the temperate and subtropical boreal climate domains.

 

Differences in ecosystem areas in all forest areas also affect the condition of forest ecosystems. Thus, almost half of the forest area has intact areas, the rest have several areas with low fragments or no connectivity.

At different latitudes, altitudes, rainfall and evapontration, the forest has different conditions. So do not be surprised if each forest has different biome conditions depending on the type of forest.

Boreal forests in the Arctic region, tropical moist forests and tropical dry forests located around the Equator, and temperate forests around the mid-latitudes.

If the forest is at a higher elevation, it will usually tend to have similarities with forests at high latitudes. Rainfall in the forest will later affect the composition of the forest as well.

For humans, the forest is one of the important ecosystems and a place where they depend on all their necessities of life. As with other living things, both animals and plants themselves, the forest is also their natural habitat where everyone depends on their life there.

Forest Types in Indonesia

Indonesia itself is a country that has many types of forests. Indonesia’s diverse natural ecosystems also influence the formation of several types of forests. The following are the types of forests located throughout Indonesia.

Based on Climate

Indonesia is one of the countries that is right on the equator which is an area with a tropical climate. The location of the Indonesian archipelago which is between two continents and two oceans also has an influence on the climate, giving rise to areas with very wet, wet and rather dry climates.

This also ultimately affects the condition of forests in Indonesia and creates the following types of forests:

1. Peat Forest

Peat forest is one of the tropical forests that mostly has broad-leaved plants. Peat forests are usually located around waters which are also surrounded by rain forests and mangrove forests in brackish water. This peat forest is considered effective for absorbing carbon in the air, so it can clean it. In addition, we will also find a lot of peat forests in the Kalimantan area.

2. Tropical Rain Forest

Most tropical rainforests have a climate that is wet to very wet. Tropical rain forest areas are found in Kalimantan, Sulawesi, Sumatra, North Maluku, and also Papua.

The highest canopy layer found in this tropical rain forest is Dipterocarpaceae , followed by the lower layer consisting of the families Lauraceae, Myrtaceae, and Myristicaceae.

3. Monsoon Forest

Unlike most forests in Indonesia, monsoon forests are forests with a rather dry climate. We can find this type of monsoon forest in Central Java, Yogyakarta, Bali, East Java, the southeastern region of Maluku, NTB, parts of NTT, and also Irian Jaya.

Most of the trees found in this monsoon forest are teak (Tectona grandis), eucalyptus (Eucalyptus alba), sandalwood (Santalum album), walikukun (Actinophora fragrans), and eucalyptus (Melaleuca leucadendron).

Based on Soil Properties

According to the type of soil, Indonesia also has a forest ecosystem that is different from the wilderness in general. This type of forest has its own functions and benefits that appear naturally around Indonesian waters.

1. Mangrove Forest

There are at least around 776,000 ha of mangrove forests scattered throughout the north coast of Java Island, the east coast of Sumatra, Kalimantan, and the south coast of Papua. Most mangrove forests have tree species from Sonneratia, Avicennia, and Rhizophora.

2. Beach Forest

Coastal forest is a tree ecosystem that usually appears around non-sandy, non-sloping beach areas. For example, in several types of beaches on the south coast of Java, some of them have beaches that are not sloping and tend to be overgrown with coastal forest. Usually, in this coastal forest we find sea pine, ketapang, hibiscus, and pandanus.

3. Swamp Forest

In the area around Kalimantan, the islands of Sumatra, and also Papua, the most abundant swamp forest is found. In many waters around swamp forests, it is easiest to find several types of swamp trees, such as kempas (Koompassia spp), nyatoh (Palawuium leiocarpum), and ramin (Gonystylus spp).

By Type Arrangement

Basically, forests are also divided into two types, in which forest type groups are formed based on the types of plants and trees that are there.

1. Homogeneous Forest

Homogeneous forest is also referred to as a similar forest where most of the trees in it are of the same type. The type referred to here is not the same tree or from the same genus, but the way it develops.

Either by developing itself without human assistance or with human assistance. For example, homogeneous forests such as pine or tusam forests are forests that can develop well in certain areas without human assistance. Therefore, it is likely that other types of trees tend not to be found there.

There are also forests that can develop with human assistance, such as an artificial type of forest that is deliberately planted for special needs. An example is Industrial Plantation Forest (HTI).

2. Heterogeneous Forest

In contrast to homogeneous forests, mixed or heterogeneous forests are forest ecosystems that have far more diverse types of trees and plants. This heterogeneous forest has various genera of trees that form a group of trees.

The types of trees in this forest are also influenced by climate and ecosystem conditions, so that sometimes even in heterogeneous forests there are species and physical similarities of one tree to another. For example, heterogeneous forests that mostly have broadleaf trees, or needles (coniferous forests).

If we classify forest types based on many aspects, of course we will find various other types of forests that may exist in other countries. Like boreal forests in the Arctic region, or other types of forests that you don’t know about. For this reason, studying forest science can also be something that is always interesting to keep learning about.

Sinaumed’s, you can learn about other forest types or the beauty of flora and fauna in the forest through the book below, you know.

Forest Benefits

Forest as a natural ecosystem that provides many natural resources, certainly brings many good benefits to every life on earth. Not only humans, even animals and plants themselves also mutually produce a symbiotic system of mutualism that benefits one another.

1. Produces Oxygen for Breathing

The trees in the forest undergo a process of photosynthesis which will produce clean oxygen for all living things to breathe. With the forest as an ecosystem group, it will provide more oxygen into the air, so that humans, animals and other living things can breathe clean oxygen.

One mature tree can produce enough oxygen for 2 to 10 days. Therefore, this is why forests are the very important lungs of the world and should not be destroyed.

2. Clean the Air

Have you ever wondered why areas with more trees feel cooler? This is because during the process of photosynthesis trees also need carbon dioxide, to produce new, clean oxygen. So that around the green area will tend to be colder and cooler because there is not much carbon dioxide emission.

The leaves on the trees in the forest are also able to absorb carbon dioxide and various other pollutants. A big tree alone can help clean the air around it, moreover forests are able to clean the air on an even larger scale, cooling the earth and reducing global warming.

3. Against Floods and Landslides

Forest ecosystems are also the best water catchment areas. So that areas that have forests will be much less likely to be flooded than other areas that do not have water absorption.

The strong tree roots in the forest help keep out the rain even in high water discharges. So forests not only help against flooding, but also reduce the possibility of landslides.

4. Storing groundwater

The soil that is under the forest has a very large absorption capacity, so all the water that falls to the ground, be it rainwater or dew and other water will absorb into the ground. All the water that flows to the roots of the trees will be stored in the soil, so that it can be reused by trees and other living things on it.

5. Produce Food for All Living Things

As a fairly complex ecosystem, forests are not only naturally beneficial as the largest oxygen supplier. However, the many varieties of plants and trees in the forest are also capable of producing food for its inhabitants.

Starting from fruits from various types of trees, seeds, mushrooms and leaves which are the staple food for animals, even humans. Not only food, in the forest it is also possible for you to find various medicinal plants that can cure diseases.

6. Meet Human Needs

For humans themselves, the presence of forests actually has a very significant impact. If in the past the forest was a place for humans to take shelter from the wind, rain, so that they could create homes and build civilizations.

So, at this time forests are also still producing building materials such as wood, which are then used for various things, recycling them also enables humans to produce paper, textiles and so on.

Forests are naturally also a place for many plants that are suitable for human consumption, and make it easier for us to find animals for hunting materials. Currently, perhaps the presence of forests also makes it easier for humans to find food for their livestock.

Conclusion

Sinaumed’s, you certainly want to have a healthy life until tomorrow when our children and grandchildren are adults. In fact, it is not enough to achieve health with a healthy lifestyle and exercise alone, there are environmental factors that must be equally maintained for our own survival.

If reducing the use of technology that can have a negative impact on nature is felt to have not produced significant results. So the only way is to increase the number of oxygen suppliers to clean the air again so we can breathe properly.

For example by planting trees and plants, increasing green areas, and reducing the use of materials that are not environmentally friendly. As the saying goes, little by little will become a hill. Make small changes together, love nature, for a healthy and prosperous life in the future.

Thus the discussion about the benefits of forests and their types. Hopefully all the discussion above adds to your insight.

If you want to find books about forests, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Inca

 

Exchange rates and foreign currencies are indicators or parameters used by individuals, agencies and countries in conducting economic transactions. Maybe many people already know and understand what exchange rates and foreign exchange are. However, did you know that there is a term foreign exchange rate?

Foreign exchange rates consist of two different terms, namely exchange rates and foreign exchange. Therefore, before discussing foreign exchange rates, the first thing that needs to be discussed is the meaning of exchange rates, foreign exchange, and foreign exchange rates. Let’s look at an explanation of exchange rates, foreign exchange, and foreign exchange rates.

A. Definition of Exchange Rate

The exchange rate is one of the terms often used in the financial sector and is known as the exchange rate . According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) exchange rate is the value of a country’s currency expressed in the value of another country’s currency.

In general, the exchange rate can be interpreted as the price of currency values ​​that can be measured by the value of foreign currencies and can be purchased or exchanged for other currencies.

B. Definition of Foreign Currency

Foreign currency in the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) means foreign currency used in international trade. Forex is also included in one part of foreign exchange.

In simple terms, foreign currency or commonly referred to as foreign currency is a foreign currency that is recognized and accepted by other countries. Foreign currency can be used as legal tender when conducting international economic transactions or international trade.

In order to better understand foreign exchange and foreign exchange, Sinaumed’s can read Adler Haymans Manurung’s book entitled Foreign Exchange Reserves & Foreign Exchange Exchange which is below.

C. Currencies Active in Foreign Exchange

The value of foreign currencies will always change from time to time. In general, the currency that has the highest selling value will be traded on forex . What is forex? Forex is an acronym for foreign exchange which means a currency exchange transaction.

Maybe some people don’t know the level of currency that has the highest exchange rate in currency exchange or forex transactions . In order to find out the level of currency values, you can refer to the information from the following table.

Rating	Currency Name	Code
1	United States Dollar (American Dollar)	USD
2	Eurozone Euro (Euro)	EUR
3	Japanese Yen (Japanese Yen)	JPY
4	British Pound Sterling (British Pound Sterling)	GBP
5	Swiss Franc	CHF
6	Australian Dollar (Australian Dollar)	AUD
7	Canadian Dollar (Canadian Dollar)	CAD
8	Deutsche Mark (German Mark)	DM/DEM

If based on the table above, the US Dollar currency, namely the United States Dollar, ranks first in currency exchange transactions. However, in general, all currencies in the table are often traded in pairs or known as pairs . For example, EUR/GBP, GBP/USD, EUR/USD, AUD/USD, and GBP/JPY.

The US Dollar currency is the currency most traded in currency exchange transactions. This is because more than half of all currency exchange transactions are controlled or dominated by the US Dollar.

There are several reasons that can cause the US Dollar to control the forex market . Here are some of these reasons.

1. The United States’ economy is the largest in the world.
2. The US dollar is the world’s reserve currency.
3. The political system owned by the United States is quite stable and strong.
4. The US Dollar is a medium of exchange or payment used in international trade transactions.
5. The United States has the largest and most liquid financial market in the world.

In order to gain a better understanding of foreign exchange, the Foreign Exchange Market book can be used as a reference for Sinaumed’s who is a foreign exchange market player who discusses theory and practice, from micro to macro foundations, as well as cases surrounding the world foreign exchange market.

D. Foreign Exchange Function

As the world develops, especially in the economic field, the trade sector also develops so that many countries carry out international trade. In international trade, a tool for exchanging world currencies is needed and that tool is foreign exchange.

Foreign exchange has three functions, namely a means of exchange and international payments, a tool for controlling exchange rates, and a tool for facilitating international trade. In order to understand more about these three functions. Check out the explanation as follows.

1. Means of exchange and international payments

In general, all transactions require a medium of exchange such as money. In international trade, whether in the form of goods or services, the medium of exchange used is foreign exchange. Thus, it can be said that foreign exchange functions as money used as a medium of exchange in international trade in the form of goods or services.

An example of a case where foreign exchange functions as a medium of exchange and international payments is when Indonesia imports vehicles from Japan, then the resident currency that must be paid to the Japanese is Yen.

2. Exchange rate controller

Currency exchange rates owned by a country will continue to change so that it requires a tool to control changes in other countries’ currency exchange rates and that tool is the foreign exchange rate. The use of certain foreign exchange rates in a country, so that country can overcome or control currency exchange rates more easily.

For example, with the Rupiah exchange rate against the United States Dollar, the Rupiah exchange rate can be seen whether it is increasing or decreasing. In other words, the exchange rate becomes a benchmark for maintaining the stability of the value of a country’s currency.

3. A tool to facilitate international trade

In international trade, it requires smoothness in transactions so that it does not require a lot of time. Foreign exchange is a tool that can expedite international trade transactions so that the buying and selling process runs smoothly without being constrained by the currency of each country. Therefore, every country that wants to transact in international trade requires foreign exchange rates.

For example, the foreign currency that is often used in international trade is the United States Dollar because this currency is easily exchanged into the currency of other countries (which make transactions) so that international trade transactions run easily.

E. Types of Foreign Exchange Markets

The foreign exchange market is a market used for currency exchange transactions. For someone who just wants to enter into currency exchange transactions, it is necessary to know the types of currency markets. By knowing the types of foreign exchange markets, beginners will not take the wrong steps in making currency exchange transactions. Check out the types of foreign exchange market as follows:

1. Spot Market

The spot market is a market that facilitates immediate currency exchange transactions at banks and money changers. Transactions on the spot market are usually carried out when you want to go on vacation abroad.

Traders usually play transactions that exist in the spot market . For example, when the school holidays begin, the demand for Singapore Dollars will increase because many families will go to Singapore.

2. Forward Market

The forward market is a market that serves the purchase of foreign currency with a contract. Usually, the value of currency purchase contracts in this market can reach millions of US dollars.

Forward transactions are usually carried out by individuals or institutions, either from banks or non-banks, who already have a special contract with a bank, so that these transactions can be said to be transactions that occur between banks.

3. Currency Futures Market

The Currency Futures Market is a market that provides Currency Futures contract trading . One type of Currency Futures contract can ensure a standard volume of a certain currency that can be exchanged at a certain settlement date in the future.

In the Currency Futures market, there are two types of transaction objects, namely foreign exchange ( financial futures market ) and commodities ( commodity futures market ). The benefits of this market are limiting risk ( hedging ) and speculative purposes.

4. Currency Options Market

The Currency Option market is a market that provides trading or buying and selling of Currency Option contracts . Currency Option contracts are divided into two groups, namely Currency Call and Currency Put .

F. Types of Foreign Exchange Transactions

There are four types of foreign exchange transactions, namely spot transactions , forward transactions , swap transactions and option transactions . See an explanation of the types of foreign exchange as follows.

1. Spot transactions

Spot transactions are transactions in the form of buying and selling foreign currencies (forex) or currencies by way of handover and payment between banks which are immediately completed within two working days.

There are several ways to use when handing over funds in a spot transaction , viz

2. Value today (Value tod or Cash)

Value today is the transfer of funds made on the same date or day as the date or day a transaction is made. This method is also known as same day settlement .

3. Value tomorrow (Value tom)

Value tomorrow is the delivery of funds made on the next working day or the working day after the contract is made. This method is commonly known as one day settlement .

4. Spot values

Spot value is the transfer of funds made within two working days after the transaction date. Usually this way is done in international transactions.

4. Forward transactions

A forward transaction is a transaction in the form of a contract that is agreed on the same day, but the settlement will be carried out in the future (the agreed date). Because of that, this transaction is also called a futures transaction.

In simple terms, when carrying out a forward transaction, the rate will be fixed at the time the contract is made, but payment and delivery will be made when the contract is due.

5. Swap transactions

A swap transaction is a transaction involving a contract to buy and sell foreign currency using a spot price that has been combined with a buy and sell transaction of foreign currency that is the same as the forward price. Thus, this transaction is a combination of spot transactions and forward transactions.

Briefly, this transaction is executed by a market maker ( dealer ) by buying a currency with a spot transaction and paying the same amount, but with a forward transaction .

6. Option transactions

An option transaction is a contract that is used to obtain the right to buy or sell a certain amount of foreign currency at a certain price, timeframe and end date.

Sinaumed’s can also read learning related to the basics of buying and selling foreign exchange online, through analysis of movements, and much more in the Foreign Exchange Investment book below.

G. Definition of Foreign Exchange Rates

After knowing the meaning of exchange rates and foreign currencies, foreign exchange rates can be interpreted as a ratio/comparison of the value of domestic currency and foreign currency.

Foreign exchange rates are often used in international trade so that a country before carrying out transactions in international trade will see and observe developments in foreign exchange rates.

H. Foreign Exchange Exchange System

Foreign exchange has several systems in its use. These systems are divided into three, namely a fixed exchange rate system, a free or floating exchange rate system, and a controlled floating exchange rate system. Check out the explanation of the three courses.

1. Fixed exchange rate system ( fixed exchange rate )

Fixed exchange rate system is a currency exchange rate system that is fixed or must follow the rules that have been made by the central bank (government).

In this exchange rate system, the central bank or government has a role in the foreign exchange market by buying or selling foreign currency if the exchange rate does not comply with predetermined standards or rules.

2. Floating exchange rate system

A free or floating exchange rate system is a system in which the currency exchange rate is influenced or determined by market forces. The supply and demand for foreign currency will determine the currency’s value.

This system is free or will always change so that foreign exchange market participants must continue to observe developments that occur in foreign currency exchange rates.

3. Controlled floating exchange rate system ( floating exchange rate )

A controlled floating exchange rate system is a foreign exchange rate system in which both the government and the market have the right to determine foreign exchange rates.

I. Types of Foreign Exchange Rates

After knowing the meaning and system of foreign exchange rates, it’s not complete if you don’t discuss the types of foreign exchange rates. Foreign exchange rates are divided into three groups, namely selling rates, buying rates and middle rates. The following describes the three types of exchange rates.

1. Selling rate

The selling rate is the price of a foreign currency given or determined by a bank or money changer to someone who wants to sell foreign currency or exchange Rupiah for foreign currency.

2. Buying rate

The buying rate is the price of a foreign currency given or determined by a bank or money changer to someone who wants to buy foreign currency or exchange foreign currency for Rupiah.

3. Middle rate

The middle rate is the rate given by a bank or money changer between the selling rate and the buying rate (the selling and buying rates are added up and then divided by two).

J. Example of Foreign Exchange Rate Calculation

One day Putri was being given a job abroad and she got paid for the trip of IDR 45,000,000.00.

At the time of carrying out his work, the applicable exchange rate is as follows.

The selling rate is IDR 15,000.00 per US$ 1

Buying rate IDR 14,500.00 per US$ 1

How much will Putri get paid in United States Dollars?

Putri will exchange Rupiah for United States Dollars, here’s how to calculate the selling rate.

Rp. 45,000,000.00 : IDR 15,000 = US $ 3,000

So, the money that Putri has in the form of US Dollars is US$3,000

K. Conclusion

For a country that wants to carry out transactions in international trade, be it imports or exports, it is necessary to pay attention to foreign exchange rates. Meanwhile, for individuals if they want to carry out currency exchange transactions on forex , they need to know the types of foreign exchange markets.

The United States Dollar is the currency that has the highest value in foreign currency. One of the causes of the United States currency being the highest value in currency exchange transactions is that the United States has the largest and most liquid money market in the world.

Such is the brief explanation of the foreign exchange rate for Sinaumed’s which is useful for a country in making transactions.

Sinaumed’s can also learn about transactions in this international trade through the books available at sinaumedia as #Friends Without Borders who accompany your free walk and your learning process. Buy the book right now!

Also read other articles related to  “Foreign Exchange Rates”  :

• Definition of Goods Market
• Definition of Request and Offer
• Definition of Money
• Definition of Inflation
• Definition of Banks
• Definition of Balance of Payments
• Economic Principles
• Definition of Scarcity
• Definition of Macroeconomics
• Microeconomics
• Economic Recession
• Economic growth
• Economic Globalization
• People’s Economy
• Economic agents
• Economic Problems in Indonesia
• Economics
• Types of Economic Systems
• People’s Economy

Definition of Foreign Exchange – The financial sector in a country can be said to be the most important sector in the country’s economic growth. The financial sector is likened to the heart of the country. In other words, if the heart (financial sector) is healthy and stable, economic growth will run smoothly.

The foreign exchange reserves owned by a country are one of the parameters indicating that the country’s financial sector is not experiencing problems and the wheels of the economy are turning well.

Thus, foreign exchange is something that must be given special attention by a country so that the wheels of the economy rotate properly so that developments also run well. Not only that, a country’s good image will emerge when foreign exchange reserves continue to grow.

A. Definition of Foreign Exchange

International trade requires an agreement on means of payment that apply internationally, one of which is foreign exchange. Therefore, every country that wants to or has carried out international trade should have foreign exchange.

According to Law Number 24 of 1999 concerning Foreign Exchange Flows and the Exchange Rate System it is said that foreign exchange is a tool and a source of financing for the nation and state. Meanwhile, according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) foreign exchange is a foreign payment instrument that can be exchanged for foreign money.

Foreign exchange reserves or in English are called foreign exchange reserves, which are deposits from central banks and monetary authorities. Indonesia’s central bank is Bank Indonesia. Meanwhile, Indonesia’s monetary authorities are Bank Indonesia, the Ministry of Finance, and the National Development Planning Agency (Bappenas).

A country that is able to finance imports with foreign exchange reserves is a sign that the country’s financial sector is running stably so that the country can conduct international trade and expand production markets.

If a country has smaller foreign exchange reserves, it is a sign that the country is unable to generate foreign exchange. Therefore, a country must maintain good foreign exchange reserves in order to give a good impression to a country.

Basically, foreign exchange reserves and the domestic economy are interconnected so that they influence one another. If the domestic economy weakens, foreign exchange reserves will decrease. Vice versa, if the economy improves, foreign exchange reserves will increase. Thus, the domestic economy must be managed properly and thoroughly so that the country’s foreign exchange reserves can continue to increase.

B. Foreign Exchange Function

Foreign exchange can be said to be one of the country’s economic strengths, especially in the financial sector. Therefore, a country must be wise when using foreign exchange. Wise use of foreign exchange will benefit the country. The foreign exchange functions that are beneficial to a country are as follows.

1. Foreign debt financing tools

For some countries, especially developing countries, they will pay debts to other countries to meet domestic needs. This is because the country’s income has not been able to meet domestic needs.

The wealth owned by each country is different so that the income of each country will also be different. Good utilization of wealth can be used as a source of state income and can even be used as a state foreign exchange reserve.

These foreign exchange reserves can be used as financing to pay off foreign debt. If the state debt has been paid, the foreign exchange reserves are used for economic growth, development, and others.

2. Means of payment for international trade

Lots of countries want to introduce their superior products and market them to the global market so that international trade emerges. With international trade, the country’s income can increase.

One of the important things in international trade is export and import activities. When carrying out export and import transactions, a means of payment is required, namely foreign exchange. This foreign exchange is often used as a means of payment for international trade because of its convenience when used and transactions can be accomplished.

Thus, the foreign exchange used when carrying out international trade transactions can be used as a second currency for a country.

3. International relations financing tool

Every country must have good relations with other countries. Good relations between two or more countries will make it easier for a country to establish cooperation.

To establish relations with other countries requires operational costs, such as activities carried out abroad, official travel abroad, and diplomatic activities between countries. This operational cost can be financed through foreign exchange.

The use of foreign exchange when carrying out international relations must be carried out wisely and maximally so that no foreign exchange is wasted.

4. As a Source of State Revenue

Most of the function of foreign exchange is used as a means of payment and financing. Starting from international trade payments to financing to establish international relations.

Unlike the other foreign exchange functions, the last foreign exchange function is used as a source of state revenue. With foreign exchange, domestic development can be carried out, the financial sector will be stable, and economic growth will be maintained.

The function of foreign exchange as a source of state revenue must be maintained properly so that state revenue does not decrease and is even expected to increase.

Sources of foreign exchange can be obtained domestically. Therefore, the sources of foreign exchange that exist in the country must be maximally obtained so that foreign exchange functions can be carried out.

C. Sources of Foreign Exchange

Every foreign exchange in a country must come from the largest source of income. That is, if a country excels in the tourism sector, that country will maximize the growth of the tourism sector so that many foreign tourists or local tourists come so that the country gets a high source of foreign exchange. High sources of foreign exchange will maintain the stability of foreign exchange reserves owned by a country.

The source of foreign exchange is not only in the tourism sector, but there are other sources of foreign exchange. Check out the foreign exchange sources as follows.

1. Export of goods and services

Export activities of both goods and services are a source of foreign exchange that can be relied upon because from this activity there will be many benefits for a country, such as introducing superior products that are sold at competitive prices.

Thus, the more goods or services that are exported, the income of a country will continue to increase so that foreign exchange reserves will be stable and tend to increase. Therefore, the government in a country needs to maximize this export activity.

2. Foreign aid

Loans or assistance originating from abroad are usually in the form of money because money is considered more significant as a source of foreign exchange for the country. However, sometimes there are several countries that send aid in kind.

Assistance in the form of goods is also very meaningful for a country, but can only be used to save foreign exchange. This is because a country that is given assistance in the form of goods does not need to issue foreign exchange reserves (money) to buy these goods.

3. Private funding

Sometimes there are several countries that use funds from the private sector as a source of foreign exchange. The source of foreign exchange provided can be in the form of money or in the form of development investment so that when building something, the state does not need to spend funds. One example of development carried out by the private sector is the Integrated Average Mode (MRT).

4. Foreign debt

For some developing countries that have not been able to generate maximum foreign exchange reserves, they will need loans from abroad. Thus, borrowed funds from abroad will be recorded as state debt as well as a source of state foreign exchange reserves.

Therefore, these loan funds must be used optimally so that foreign exchange reserves remain stable and can increase so that these debts can be paid.

5. Tourism

There are several countries that rely on the tourism sector as a source of foreign exchange income, one of which is Indonesia. Tourism in Indonesia is well known to foreign countries so many tourists want to travel to Indonesia. Bali is the most visited area in Indonesia because it has stunning natural beauty.

When traveling, foreign tourists will exchange their money so that it can be used in the country of visit. The money earned when tourists travel will be used as a source of foreign exchange for a country. In other words, foreign exchange earnings from the tourism sector will increase if tourists coming from abroad continue to grow.

6. Import duties

Goods coming from abroad when entering the country will be subject to an entry fee. This entry fee is often known as import duty. This import duty is a potential source of foreign exchange.

The more goods that enter the country, the more income the country will get through the import duty sector. Thus, a country needs to optimize this import duty sector because it is a source of foreign exchange and can increase foreign exchange reserves.

D. Types of Foreign Exchange

After explaining the meaning of foreign exchange and the sources of foreign exchange, it is incomplete if you don’t discuss various types of foreign exchange. By knowing the various types of foreign exchange, it will be easy for us to distinguish the categories of foreign exchange. See an explanation of the following types of foreign exchange.

1. General foreign exchange

General foreign exchange is foreign exchange obtained through credit or international trading activities such as exports and imports, receipt of capital, procurement of services, and others. Thus, this foreign exchange is like borrowing a debt so that when you owe it, you have to repay the debt.

2. Foreign exchange credit

The similarities between credit foreign exchange and general foreign exchange are that they both have to repay debts and what distinguishes these two foreign exchanges is the flow of funds. Funds from general foreign exchange are usually used to advance a company or improve the quality of production.

Meanwhile, credit foreign exchange is foreign exchange obtained from credit or foreign loans. However, funds obtained from foreign exchange credit are usually used for the benefit of the community, such as money loans for MSMEs that have low interest rates.

3. State foreign exchange

State foreign exchange is foreign exchange owned by the government of a country. The country’s foreign exchange is obtained from exports, taxes, import duties, and others. It is important for a country to pay attention to the country’s foreign exchange so that foreign exchange reserves will continue to exist and even increase. Well-maintained foreign exchange reserves will maintain the stability of the country’s economy.

4. Complementary foreign exchange

Complementary foreign exchange is foreign exchange owned by the private sector, but the use of this foreign exchange is supervised and regulated by the government. Usually, complementary foreign exchange is generated through the sale of services (forex).

5. Export foreign exchange

Export foreign exchange is the same as complementary foreign exchange, but what distinguishes the two types of foreign exchange is the source. The source of export foreign exchange is foreign exchange resulting from the export of visible goods. The export foreign exchange used must comply with the applicable foreign exchange regulations.

The use of foreign exchange by the government or the private sector can be said to be good if it has been supervised. Monitoring the use of foreign exchange can prevent foreign exchange reserves from being wasted. If there is a waste of foreign exchange reserves, foreign exchange reserves can be depleted and can give a bad image to the country.

E. Forms of Foreign Exchange

Foreign exchange takes three forms, namely securities, foreign money orders, and foreign currency. Check out the explanation of the following forms of foreign exchange:

1. Securities

Securities are documents that have value and are protected by law and the state. Securities must be properly guarded so that nothing is lost. For example, bonds, stocks, and commercial papers.

2. Foreign bills of exchange

A money order is something that is sent from abroad by Indonesian Migrant Workers (TKI) to their beloved families who live in Indonesia. Families in Indonesia will definitely be happy because they can receive something from abroad.

These TKI are usually called foreign exchange heroes because the large amount of foreign exchange sent to Indonesia will go into the state treasury.

3. Foreign exchange

As we already know that not all domestic currencies can be used as a means of international payment transactions. Therefore, when conducting international trade, a country must use foreign currency. Foreign exchange is the second currency that can be used in international trade transactions.

This form of foreign exchange (foreign exchange) can be obtained from foreign credit, credit foreign exchange, credit general foreign exchange. How to use foreign exchange?

In simple terms, foreign currency will be used if foreign parties want compensation or payment in the form of US currency, namely dollars or other foreign currencies that have more stable exchange rates, such as pounds or yen. Therefore, for Indonesian companies wishing to cooperate with foreign companies, they need to purchase foreign currency at a foreign exchange bank and can be paid using rupiah.

F. Benefits of Using Foreign Exchange

Foreign exchange reserves could run out if they are used without regulation and supervision, which can make it difficult for the wheels of the economy to turn so that national development is hampered. Therefore, the use of foreign exchange must be used wisely so that foreign exchange reserves will not run out and the benefits can be achieved. The following are the benefits of using foreign exchange.

• Can be used to finance trade transactions for imported goods and services;
• Can overcome foreign obligations for the purchase of securities by domestic investors;
• Can be used to make payments on overdue foreign loans (debt);
• Can be used to finance existing or residing government representatives abroad;
• Can be used to carry out cultural, artistic and sports missions abroad.

G. Conclusion

Foreign exchange reserves are the financial sector owned by a country and function as a means of payment for international trade, payment of foreign debts, financing of international relations, and a source of state revenue. The stability of foreign exchange reserves must be properly maintained so that economic growth and development on a national scale can run well.

Foreign exchange earnings can be obtained through six sources, namely export of goods and services, assistance from abroad, private funding, foreign debt, tourism and import duties. Foreign exchange takes three forms, namely foreign currency, securities, and bills of exchange from abroad.

Also read the   following articles related to “Definition of Unemployment” :

• Meaning of Summons
• Example of a column balance
• Example of Bank Reconciliation
• Economic Principles
• Definition of Scarcity
• Definition of Macroeconomics
• Microeconomics
• Economic Recession
• Economic Globalization
• People’s Economy
• Economic agents
• Economic Problems in Indonesia
• Economics
• Types of Economic Systems
• People’s Economy
• Definition of Unemployment

Also get the following ” Economics ” related books :

1. Globalization, Constitutional Economics, and the Economics Nobel

2. Monetary Economy: Case Study of Indonesia

3. Indonesian Economic Politics

Author : Restu Nasik Kamluddin

Force measuring device – In the daily life that we live, of course, it will issue various types of forces with different intensities. Force is a parameter that shows the work of a machine or energy-producing device, for example in a motorcycle engine or car engine. This force can be measured with a special tool called a dynamometer.

With a force measuring device, a dynamometer, we will know the magnitude of the force that occurs, so that we can maximize the force in everyday life. On this occasion, we will discuss more about the force measuring device or better known as the dynamometer. So, read this article until it’s finished, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Force Measurement Tool

Force measuring devices are also called dynamometers or spring balance. A dynamometer is a device for measuring the size of a force by applying the principle of spring force. Another name for a dynamometer in a physics laboratory is a spring balance.

This spring balance is also commonly used to measure weight instead of mass. Therefore, one of the main parts of this tool is the spring which is located on the dynamometer.

Dynamometers are also used to measure engine speed/RPM and torque, where the force or power generated from a rotating machine or tool can be calculated. Therefore, this dynamometer can also be found on cars or motorcycles, because it has a driving engine.

The Purpose of Using a Force Measurement Tool

The function of a force measuring device or dynamometer is as a tool to measure the size of the force, where when we give a push or pull to an object, we will not know how much pull or push we are giving.

In other words, to know the magnitude of the force we apply, we need a measuring instrument. This tool is called a dynamometer or spring balance.

For example, a force that can be measured with a dynamometer is a force that can be measured with a dynamometer is weight or the weight of an object that is a mass by gravity.

 

 

Dynamometer Parts

The parts of the dynamometer are hangers, scale pointers, springs, scales, rods and hooks. Each part of the dynamometer has its own function. The following functions of each of these parts are as follows

a. Hanger

Hanger as a place to hold the dynamometer (spring balance) so as not to interfere with the measurement process. So, the function of the hanger is to make it easier for someone to hold the dynamometer.

b. Hook

Hook as a place where objects are placed. Then, the function of this hook is as a place to put the object whose force you want to measure.

c. Stem

The stem is the outer part that wraps the spring so that it becomes a system.

d. Scale

The price scale is printed on the dynamometer (spring balance) which shows the measurement results. With this scale, we will know the results of measuring the force on an object.

e. Spring

Spring part of the dynamometer (spring balance) which is very vital. This is because with this spring, the dynamometer system functions properly.

f. Scale Pointer

The section scale pointer serves to indicate the scale (result) of measurement.

Dynamometer Scale

The lines on the scale on the dynamometer or spring balance follow the official unit of force in International Units (SI), namely Newton (N). The spring balance has two scale lines, namely the N (newton) and g (gram) scales. To weigh the load (object), first set the scale to 0 (zero) by rotating the scale adjustment screw.

Then, hang the object on the balance hook, then read the measurement results. The advantage of weighing a load using a spring balance is that once you weigh an object, you can know the mass and weight of the object at once.

Dynamometer Working Principle

In general, the dynamometer (spring balance) uses a principle that follows Hooke’s law, namely: “Elastic force as a cause of harmonic vibration is directly proportional and opposite to the deviation” .

Hooke’s law states that the length of a spring is proportional to the force it pulls. That is, when we apply a force to a spring, this force causes the spring to lengthen or shorten.

It can be concluded, the working principle of the dynamometer, namely the object to be measured is mounted on the end of a helical spring whose extension shows the value of the object’s weight on a calibrated scale. Therefore, it can be said that the working principle of this balance is quite simple where a spring balance can measure the mass of an object by balancing the existing balance arm.

Types of Force Measuring Instruments

Dynamometer force measuring devices (spring balance) are distinguished by the method of measurement as well as by shape and use. There is a dynamometer that is used to measure pulling force, there is also a dynamometer that is used to measure thrust and grip strength. Here’s an explanation.

Based on Measurement Method

Based on the measurement method, dynamometers are divided into two types, namely Engine Dynamometer (ED) and Chassis Dynamometer (CD).

1. Engine Dynamometer (ED)

Engine Dynamometer (ED) is a measurement method that is carried out with the engine output shaft connected directly to the dynamometer. In this measurement, the engine dynamometer provides data that is read in units of horsepower or horsepower. This unit is denoted by the letter dk.

2. Chassis Dynamometer (CD)

Chassis Dynamometer (CD) is a measurement method that is carried out through the vehicle’s drive wheels. By turning on the engine in a very short time until it reaches the maximum rotational speed, then the measurement results can be seen on the monitor or analog panel on the dynamometer unit.

Based on Form and Use

1. Tensile Force Measuring Dynamometer

A dynamometer for measuring the size of the tensile force is called a spring balance. This spring balance consists of a coil spring contained in a protected vessel with a scale pointer connected to the other end.

When a tensile force is applied to the end of the spring, the spring will stretch. The magnitude of the strain depends on the force. This type of dynamometer is often used to measure the amount of force needed to pull an object or to measure the weight of an object due to the influence of gravitational pull.

2. Thrust Measuring Dynamometer

In addition to pulling, force can also be a push. There are several types of dynamometers that can be used to measure the amount of thrust.

If the dynamometer pull uses spring tension, then the thrust gauge uses spring density. When a thrust is applied to the end of the spring, the spring will compress. Then, the density depends on the force.

3. Dynamometer for measuring grip strength

There is one type of dynamometer specifically used to measure hand grip strength or commonly called handgrip dynamometry.

How the Force Gauge Works

The working principle of the dynamometer utilizes the elastic properties of the spring. The physical law governing the nature of springs is called Hooke’s law. This law states that the length of a spring is proportional to the force it pulls. That is, when we apply a force to the spring, this force causes the spring to lengthen or shorten.

An example of the weight of an object due to the gravitational pull of the earth, how to measure it as follows.

Activity:

• Measure the weight of an object with a dynamometer due to the gravitational pull of the earth.

Tools and materials:

• Dynamometer or Spring Balance.
• The object to be measured, such as blocks or iron.

Measurement Step:

• Give a hook on a block or iron so that it can be attached to the dynamometer.
• Then hang the spring balance in a fixed plane.
• Hook the object to be measured on the spring.
• Let the object hang freely and record the scale measurement results.

Procedure for Using the Dynamometer

The procedure for using a dynamometer or spring balance is as follows:

1. Calibration

Calibration is a process of comparing a local reference to an applicable standard to ensure the accuracy of a measuring instrument or to standardize measuring conditions before use so that measurement results are accurate and close to the true value.

The way to calibrate the dynamometer (spring balance) is by rotating the screw at the top of the dynamometer without load until the scale pointer line shows on the zero scale.

2. Measurement

Here’s how to measure the dynamometer as follows:

• Hang the object to be measured on the hook at the bottom of the spring.
• After the system has calmed down, look at the scale indicated by the scale pointer.

3. How to Read

How to read the use of a dynamometer is the same as using a ruler, that is by looking at the number pointed to by the scale pointer. Usually, the accuracy limit or the smallest scale value on the dynamometer varies and usually what is often used in the laboratory is 0.1 N.

 

 

Force Measurement Tool Function

1. Dynamometer as a Force Measuring Tool

When we give a pulling or pushing force, we don’t necessarily know how much force we put out. To measure the amount of force that we put out, we need a tool called a dynamometer or spring balance. In the laboratory, a dynamometer is also used to measure weight, namely gravity, not mass.

The working principle of the dynamometer follows Hooke’s law, while the spring balance as a measuring device for gravity is made of a spring in a container that is given a scale. The number on the scale will indicate the amount of force that the object emits.

The load will be hung on the lower end of the spring vertically, then the spring will extend and the magnitude of the force is known through the scale on the tool. When weighing the load, the scale must be adjusted to the zero position via the scale adjuster. Then the load is hung on the hook.

2. Dynamometer as an Effort Measuring Tool

In physics, when we apply a force to an object and then the object moves from its original place, it is called work. However, if there is no object displacement, it can be concluded that the force exerted does not produce work. For example, the force released when pushing the wall.

3. Dynamometer as a Power Measuring Tool

Power in physics can be interpreted as a measure of the speed of doing work, namely the amount of energy expended per unit time. Measuring power requires a change in the value of the object’s position and the specific time when the change occurs.

Kinds of Style

Friction

Friction is the force generated by the surfaces of objects rubbing against each other. This is due to the contact of one object with another, so this force is a type of touch force. For example, people sharpen knives on a whetstone.

Gravity (Gravity)

Gravity or gravity is an attractive force between two objects that have mass. The magnitude of the force of attraction of an object depends on the mass of the object. The existence of the earth’s gravity makes objects on the surface of the earth always attracted towards the center of the earth.

Spring Style

Spring force is the force possessed by a hanging spring or a stretched or compressed spring. An example of this style is when we ride a trampoline.

Electric Force

Electric force is the force caused by electrically charged objects. For example in electronic devices.

Muscle Style

Muscle force is a pulling or pushing force against an object produced by muscles. In everyday life, an example is a horse pulling a carriage or a person pushing a car when it breaks down.

Machine Style

Machine force is the pulling or pushing force exerted by the engine. For example, when a car or motorcycle moves because of the engine.

Magnetic Force

Magnetic force is a pull or push force exerted by a magnet. For example, the magnet attached to the refrigerator.

Examples of Objects That Have a Spring Style

In everyday life, consciously or not there are some objects that use a spring force in them. The following are among the objects that we often encounter in everyday life:

Per

Per is a suspension technology used in vehicles to stabilize the shake and shock of the vehicle. Apart from that, there is another benefit from having Per on the vehicle on the bicycle so that the user’s waist does not hurt when passing through an unstable road.

On bicycles, Per is placed under the seat. This is to make it easier for the user when sitting on a bicycle so that it is not hard and more flexible. Not only in vehicles, Per is also found in modern pens to make it easier to insert the tip of the pen into by pressing a button-like part.

Dynamometer

The dynamometer is a force measuring device in which there is a spring. The spring in the dynamometer will stretch when it is subjected to an external force.

A dynamometer is a machine that is used to measure the torque (torque) and rotational speed (rpm) of the power produced by an engine. Like a motor or other rotating drive. In general, a dynamometer is used to determine the power and torque required to operate an engine.

Shockbreaker

Shockbreaker or shock absorber is a mechanical device designed to dampen shocks caused by kinetic energy. Shockbreaker as the most important part of a vehicle, especially in the suspension of motorized vehicles, aircraft wheels and some industrial machines used.

Shockbreaker in motorized vehicles utilizes springs. When a vehicle crosses an unstable road such as a pothole, the spring on the shock breaker will work so that it can dampen the shock of the motorized vehicle. In addition, springs on motorized vehicles have other benefits to maintain the stability of motorized vehicles such as when turning or when driving at high speed.

Slingshot

A slingshot is a tool used by people to traditionally hunt animals such as birds. The catapult adopts the spring force that exists in the rubber used as a catapult.

The workings of a catapult are objects that have mass. For example, we store a stone in front of the rubber and then pull and release it, the stone will bounce very quickly because it uses a spring force as a catapult.

Trampoline

A trampoline is a tool that is usually used for jumping sports. This causes us to jump up repeatedly and the jump is getting faster. Not only as a medium to improve physical fitness, but this trampoline is widely used for fun.

Rubber

Rubber is the main material of some spring tools. Because the spring force is already attached to the rubber. In general, if the rubber is stretched there is elasticity which will return to its original shape like a “spring”. The main ingredient of rubber is a hydrocarbon polymer which contains the latex of several plant species, such as the sap of the rubber tree.

Mattress

Mattress is a manufactured product that is used as a mat for sleeping or just for lying down. The mattress consists of cloth, filled with cotton, rubber, foam and covered with cloth on the outside. In addition, the mattress also contains springs in it, although not all of them.

Having a spring on the mattress will make the mattress not feel soft. This of course will be more comfortable when used.

That’s an explanation of the force measuring tool . So which books aren’t on the bookshelf right now, Sinaumed’s? If Sinaumed’s is still confused, still needs references regarding force measuring devices, then you can visit the sinaumedia book collection at sinaumedia.com . As #FriendsWithoutLimits, we will always provide the best and most complete information for Sinaumed’s and make your life #MoreWithReading with sinaumedia. I hope this article inspires you!

Author: Rosyda Nur Fauziyah

Also read:

Footnotes are – When writing a scientific work, we as students or students are often confused by the use of footnotes , endnotes , and bibliography. If you start from the simplest, what exactly is a footnote ?

What are Footnotes?

Footnote alias footnote is a note that is placed at the bottom of the page. This footnote quotes references or comments on certain parts of the text above. For example, Sinaumed’s wants to add interesting comments to the sentences we write, but these comments are not directly related to the paragraph arguments.

In this case, Sinaumed’s can add a symbol for the footnote. Then, at the bottom of the page, we can reprint the symbol and enter a comment. Here’s an example:

This is an illustrative footnote: (¹). The “1” at the end of the previous sentence corresponds to the note below. Look how it fits in the body of the text!

1 At the bottom of the page, Sinaumed’s can include a comment about the sentence before the footnote.

When our readers find footnotes in the main text of the paper, then they can immediately see our comments or continue reading paragraphs and read our comments at the end. Therefore, this makes it easier for our readers. Also, most citation styles require that you use footnotes or endnotes in your paper.

However, some of these allow Sinaumed’s to reference brackets (author, date) in the body of our work. In this article, we’ll also talk about footnote styles.

Footnotes aren’t just for interesting comments, either. Sometimes, they only refer to relevant sources. They tell readers where certain material can come from, or where they can find other resources on the subject.

To decide whether we should cite sources in the footnotes or in the body of the paper, we should ask our teacher or lecturer.

Elements of Footnotes

In the way of writing footnotes, the creator of a scientific work needs to know the elements of footnotes first. By knowing the elements of footnotes, writing footnotes becomes easier. Here are the elements of the footnotes.

1. Author or Name of Author

In writing footnotes, there must be an element of the author’s name or author of the quotation in the scientific work. Although the author has a title, but the title does not need to be written. In other words, the creator of the footnote only writes the name of the author.

2. Quotation Title

The second element is the title of the quoted text used. The title of this article must be clear and pay attention to PUEBI rules. Therefore, in this element the makers of footnotes must be careful.

3. Year of Publication

After the title of the article, the next footnote element is the year of publication. In this case, the year of publication in question is the year of publication of the quotation or reference source used in the scientific work. The year of publication can also be interpreted as the year the reference source was published (generally in a journal or scientific article).

4. Quotations Page Numbers

The last element in making footnotes is the page number of the quote used. In addition, the writing of this page can also be abbreviated as “thing” which is then followed by the page number. This page number makes it easier for the reader to find the reference source used.

At first glance, the elements in the footnotes are almost the same as the elements in the bibliography. In addition, all elements of the footnotes that have been mentioned must be present at the time of writing the footnotes.

Types of Footnotes

There are several types of footnotes or footnotes. Here are some types of footnotes you need to know, Sinaumed’s.

1. Complete Footnotes

Complete footnotes are, of course, footnotes written in full. Complete footnotes consist of several elements, such as the author’s name, book title, serial number (if any), print number, publisher name, year of publication, and page number.

2. Short Footnotes

Short footnotes are footnotes that only consist of a few elements, short footnotes are still divided into 3 forms, namely Ibid, Op.cit, and Loc.cit. Ibid stands for Ibdium or means the same as above. Op.cit is an abbreviation of opere citato which means works that have been cited. Loc.cit is an abbreviation of loco citato which means a place that has been quoted.

3. Footnotes in Chicago Style

Chicago style uses footnotes for citations (unless Sinaumed’s follows the Chicago author-date). Footnotes can also be used to add additional information such as comments on sources cited, or elaborations on points Sinaumed’s touched on in the main text.

In Chicago-style footnotes, Sinaumed’s will place the footnote at the end of a clause or sentence that requires a quote. Footnotes contain detailed information about each source the first time we cite it and brief information for subsequent citations from the same source.

Chicago footnote example

• Tegan George and Jack Caulfield, “Academic Integrity vs. Academic Dishonesty,” March 10, 2022, https://www.scribbr.com/plagiarism/academic-dishonesty/.

• George and Caulfield, “Academic Integrity.”

Detailed information on all of our sources is usually included in the bibliography at the end, except in very short papers, where footnote citations may be used alone if the institution allows it.

Chicago recommends using our word processor’s built-in footnote function (as in Word) to add footnotes, but some formatting details may need to be changed manually:

• Add an indent at the start of each footnote (before the number).
• Write the number at the start of the note in plain text (not superscript), followed by a period, then a space.
• Leave one blank line between footnotes, and ensure that footnotes are single-spaced.

4. Footnotes in APA Style

APA style footnotes are used only to provide additional information, because APA in-text citations appear in parentheses.

Sinaumed’s may use it to provide additional information such as additional examples or clarifications; keep this short, as the APA warns against including unimportant information. Footnotes are also used to provide copyright attribution when needed.

Example of an APA footnote

• ¹ From What Parents Can Expect in Behavior Therapy, by Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 2017 (https://www.cdc.gov/ncbddd/adhd/infographics/what-parents-expect.html). In the public domain.

• ² A second round of testing was initially planned, but this idea was abandoned due to …

APA recommends using word processing software such as Word to automatically insert footnotes. However, add an indent at the start of each footnote if this is not done automatically. Footnotes begin with a superscript footnote number followed by a space.

5. Footnotes in MLA style

MLA style footnotes are used to provide additional information such as additional examples, clarification of citation practices, or elaboration of ideas.

MLA in-text citations appear in parentheses, not in notes, but if multiple citations are needed at once, they can be placed in footnotes to avoid cluttering the text.

MLA footnote example

• ¹ Citations of marginalia refer to George’s edition and include page numbers. Citations of the poem refer to Davis’s edition and include line numbers.

• ² This remains a controversial point. Researchers in the field have debated this issue since …

• ³ See Crittenden 5–11; Kent 17–34; Smith 44–50; and Jones 36.

MLA recommends using a word processor to automatically insert footnotes, setting the number at the start of the quote in superscript, followed by a space. An indent should also be added at the beginning of the footnote (before the number).

Difference between Footnotes and Endnotes

The superscript number refers to the footnote or endnote that contains all the publishing information and the page number for the information to which it is referenced.

Footnotes themselves appear at the bottom of the page containing the referenced sentence. The list of endnotes is listed at the end of the paper on a separate page. The endnote page is placed before the bibliography.

Many professors prefer footnotes to endnotes. So, ask Sinaumed’s instructors to see which style they prefer.

How do I make a Footnote or Endnote?

In using footnotes or endnotes, it involves placing a number in superscript format at the end of a sentence with the information that Sinaumed’s is quoting, either in the form of a quote, word, or paraphrase. Superscript numbers should generally be placed at the end of the sentence they refer to. They must be placed after any punctuation marks except hyphens.

Footnotes or endnotes begin with ¹ and are numbered sequentially throughout the essay. Sinaumed’s can use Ms Word or other software to create footnotes and endnotes.

The difference between Footnotes and Endnotes with Bibliography

Mistakes with footnotes are common. Some people choose to use footnotes without having a firm understanding of how they should be used, or what they should be used for. As a general rule, if Sinaumed’s isn’t 100 percent sure how footnotes should be used, it’s best not to use them at all.

Footnotes should be included to provide the reader with additional information about the content. Footnotes are found at the bottom of the page, and are referenced via a superscript number within the main body of your copy.

Meanwhile, the bibliography page is the last part of our essay or dissertation and includes complete citation information for any source cited or referred to during the work.

The information contained in the bibliography will provide the reader with full details about the work, including when and where the source was published. Footnotes may include only the title of the source.

Occasionally, Sinaumed’s may be asked to include it, especially if you have used parenthetical citation styles. The “References” page is a list of all works whose material we borrow. The reader may find these more convenient than footnotes or endnotes because he or she does not need to read through all the comments and other information to see the source from which we took the material.

How to Make Footnotes

Basically, how to write footnotes is divided based on the source of the quotation, including:

How to Write Footnotes from a Journal

The footnotes of the journal are written beginning with the author’s citation number. There is also the author’s name, article title (italics), volume, journal name, year of publication, and page number.

Example:

¹⁰ Muhammad, Bank Syariah Analysis of Strengths Opportunities, Weaknesses, and Threats, Pustak Pelajar

³ Adnan Buyung Nasution, Some Legal Aspects in Defense and Settlement Issues in Big Cities , in “Eko Budiharjo, A Number of Urban Settlement Problems,” (Bandung: Alumni, 1992).

How to Write Footnotes in a Book

The way to write book footnotes begins with the author’s first name, last name, book title (italics), book edition (publishing city, publisher name, year), and pages cited.

Example:

¹Sri Utami et al, English Level 5 (Yogyakarta: PT. sinaumedia: 2003), p. 5.

How to Write Footnotes from the Internet

How to write footnotes from the internet starting from the author’s name, “Title of work cited” (italics, url, access date, year, and page.

Example:

UNESCO, Indonesia Batik , http://www.unesco.org/culture/ich/en.RL/00170/ accessed on 27 January 2021.

How to Write a Thesis Footnote

The thesis footnotes begin with the author’s citation number. Then, Author’s Name, “Title of Thesis Work (italics)” (City of Publication: Publisher, Year of Publication), and page of citation source.

Example:

Muryid Rahman, Thesis: The Development of Middle and Lower Economic Structures After Learning Information Technology Skills , (Yogyakarta: UGM, 2005), p. 85.

QnA

What is the difference between footnotes and endnotes?

Footnotes appear at the bottom of the page we refer to. This is convenient for the reader but can cause the work text to look cluttered if there are lots of footnotes.

Endnotes appear together at the end of the entire text. This may be less comfortable for the reader but reduces clutter.

Both footnotes and endnotes are used in the same way: to cite sources or add additional information. We usually have to choose one or the other to use in the text, not both.

What are footnotes used for?

Footnotes are notes that are indicated in the text by numbers and are placed at the bottom of the page. They are used to provide:

• Citations (eg, in Chicago-style notes and bibliography).
• Additional information that will interrupt the main text flow.

Be careful about using footnotes (other than citation footnotes), and consider whether the information you add is relevant to the reader.

How to insert footnotes in Word?

To automatically insert footnotes in a Word document:

• Click on the point in the text where the footnote will appear
• Select the “ References ” tab at the top and then click “ Insert Footnote ”
• Type the text we want into the footnote that appears at the bottom of the page

How to change footnotes to endnotes (or vice versa) in Ms Word?

If Sinaumed’s needs to change the note type used in a Word document from footnotes to endnotes, or vice versa, follow these steps:

• Go to the “ References ” tab, and click the arrow in the lower right corner of the “ Footnote ” section.
• In the pop-up window , click ” Convert “
• Select the options that Sinaumed’s requires, and click ” OK .”

Well, Sinaumed’s, that’s an explanation regarding footnotes, even a little bit about endnotes and bibliography. We also advise you to read a lot of reference books or guides for making scientific work so that you understand better!

You can visit the sinaumedia.com website for more interesting and useful articles, plus attractive promos for shopping for books at the largest online bookstore in Indonesia.

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Understanding the Food Chain – Humans are not the only creatures that live on this earth. There are many living creatures that grow and develop side by side with humans. As fellow living creatures that occupy the earth, there must be interaction between living things.

The relationship between living things that influence each other will produce an ecosystem. In an ecosystem environment, there are relationships between interrelated food webs.

An ecosystem can also be interpreted as an ecological system in which there is a reciprocal relationship between the diversity of species and the cycle of matter and the flow of energy through the components contained therein.

Let’s get to know more about the meaning of food webs and ecology below, Sinaumed’s!

A. Definition of Food Chain

Food chains are part of a food web. Although food chains and food webs look the same, they are slightly different.

The food chain is a series of processes of eating and being eaten between living things based on a certain sequence in which there are producers, consumers and decomposers (decomposers) for survival.

In simple terms, the food chain can be seen sequentially from producers, consumers and decomposers. It’s a different case with food webs. A food web is a combination of interconnected and overlapping food chains in an ecosystem.

Learn about food webs, stages in classification, types of classification of living things that exist, levels of classification and much more in the book Classification of Living Things: Did You Know Series Biology.

B. Functions of Food Chains / Webs

The fundamental purpose of a food web is to describe the food chain between species in a community.

Food webs can be constructed to describe species interactions. All species in a food web can be distinguished into basal species (autotrophs, such as plants), intermediate species (mid-order herbivores and carnivores, such as grasshoppers and scorpions), and apex or predatory species (higher carnivores).

Some scientists call the level of each organism in the food web the term trophic level. These trophic levels determine how energy flows through ecosystems.

The grouping of species at the trophic level helps us understand the relationships between species. Here are some of the functions of food webs that you need to know about in Sinaumed’s:

• Describe the direct interactions between species that exist in the ecosystem itself, so that relationships between species can be distinguished which are included in the basal species, transitional species and which are the top predator species.
• As a simplification in understanding a relationship between species and functions in studying both bottom-up control and top-down control in a community structure.
• Studying top-down control or bottom-up control within a community structure or form.

With their own food chain process, living things can grow and survive. Learn everything about other living things that you need to know in the book Everything About Living Things by Azzurrino Riski.

C. Food Chain Process

The process of eating and being eaten in this food chain takes place continuously with their respective roles, such as producers, consumers, and decomposers or decomposers. Here’s Sinaumed’s’ explanation:

1. Manufacturer

Producers are organisms that are able to make their own food, for example, green plants. Its existence does not depend on the availability of food, but the balance of nature.

Therefore producers do not eat other creatures. But instead it is eaten by other creatures. Producers are also living things that can make organic substances from inorganic substances. Usually producers make their food through the process of photosynthesis. Examples of producers include green plants, algae, and mosses.

2. Consumers

Consumers are living things that depend on other creatures because they cannot produce their own food like producers. Therefore, to maintain their survival, consumers depend on other organisms. The role of consumers in an ecosystem is usually animals. Consumers have several levels, including:

• The first consumer (primary) , the first consumer is a producer or plant eater and is usually called a herbivore consumer. Examples include cows, rabbits, buffaloes and others.
• Secondary consumers , organisms whose food sources are from the previous trophic level (trophic 2). This level is filled by carnivorous animals that can still be preyed upon by other animals, for example, rats.
• Tertiary consumers , these consumers are the second consumer eaters and so on until the last consumer is called the top consumer. Usually the top consumers are animals that cannot be eaten by other animals. For example lions, crocodiles, eagles.

3. Decomposers or Decomposers

Decomposers are the last organisms in the food chain. Because decomposers are organisms capable of converting organic matter into anogarnic substances.

Decomposers break down carcasses or dead plants and then return the nutrients to the soil to be used by plants for photosynthesis, this is where the cycle of the food chain begins again.

Examples of decomposers are fungi and bacteria decomposers. The food chain is part of a food web, the following is an explanation of food webs.

A food web is a combination of food chains that are related, combined or combined, that overlap in an ecosystem. Although in general there are 5 levels of the food chain, not all food chains consist of these 5 trophic levels.

There are food chains that only consist of 4 levels, there are also those that reach 6 trophic levels. The shorter a food chain, the greater the energy available, conversely if the food chain is long, the less energy is available.

D. Types of Ecological Pyramids

An ecological pyramid is a pyramid diagram that can describe the relationship between one trophic level and another, quantitatively in an ecosystem. In this pyramid, there are relatively many organisms that occupy the lower trophic levels. The higher the trophic level, the fewer the individuals. The trophic level consists of producers, primary consumers, secondary consumers, and tertiary consumers.

Producers always occupy the first or lowest trophic level. While herbivores or primary consumers occupy the second trophic level, secondary consumers occupy the third trophic level, tertiary consumers occupy the fourth trophic level or the top of the pyramid. Here are the types of Sinaumed’s ecological pyramids!

1. The Energy Pyramid

This pyramid describes the loss of energy when transferring food energy at each trophic level in an ecosystem.

The energy pyramid is not only the total amount of energy used by organisms at each trophic level of the food chain but also the role of various organisms in energy transfer. In the use of energy, the higher the trophic level, the more efficient its use. However, the heat released in the energy transfer process becomes larger.

The loss of heat in the respiration process also increases from organisms with lower trophic levels to organisms with higher trophic levels. As for productivity, the less you reach the top of the trophic level, the less energy you store. Energy in the energy pyramid is expressed in calories per unit area per unit time.

2. Pyramid of Biomass

The Biomass Pyramid is a pyramid that describes the reduced transfer of energy at each trophic level in an ecosystem. In the pyramid of biomass, each trophic level shows the dry weight of all organisms at that trophic level expressed in grams/m2.

Generally, the shape of a biomass pyramid will shrink towards the top, because the energy transfer between trophic levels is not efficient.

But the pyramid of biomass can be inverted. For example, in the open ocean the producers are microscopic phytoplankton, while the consumers are microscopic creatures up to large creatures such as blue whales where the blue whale’s biomass exceeds its producers. The top of the biomass pyramid has the lowest biomass, which means the number of individuals is small, and generally carnivorous individuals at the top of the pyramid are large.

3. Pyramid of Numbers

The pyramid of numbers is a pyramid that describes the number of individuals at each trophic level in an ecosystem. The pyramid of numbers generally narrows upwards. The number of pyramidal organisms from the lowest trophic level to the top is the same as the other pyramids, namely producers, primary consumers and secondary consumers, and tertiary consumers meaning that the number of plants in the first trophic level is more than animals (primary consumers) in the second trophic level, the number of organisms secondary consumers are fewer than primary consumers, and the number of tertiary consumer organisms is less than secondary consumer organisms.

Learn information about other ecological studies in the Complete Biology Reference book: Ecology that Sinaumed’s must know about existing living things.

E. Example of a Food Chain Based on the Ecosystem

There are a number of examples of food webs grouped according to the habitat in which they live. An example is a food web for a particular habitat. There are about 13 living things in a food web cycle. Some of these living creatures include phytoplankton, zooplankton, fish, shrimp, seagulls, crabs, seaweed, octopuses, penguins, elephant seals, seals, blue whales, and killer whales. Well, looking at the 13 living things that can be classified into a number of food chain cycles, including:

1. An example of a food chain on land

Rice – Rat – Snake – Eagle – Decomposer

• Rice, namely as a food-producing producer for other organisms. Paddy produces rice seeds.
• Mice, namely as primary consumers because rats are animals that eat plants or are called herbivores. Mice eat rice for their survival.
• Snakes are secondary consumers because snakes eat other animals or are carnivores and snakes eat rats as a source of energy.
• Eagles, namely peak consumers. Eagles eat snakes for their survival.
• Decomposers, their role is to decompose the Eagle so that its substances and nutrients can be re-absorbed by the soil and can be absorbed by plants for the process of photosynthesis.

Not only in seas and lakes, food webs also occur in paddy field ecosystems, namely, as follows:

• Tree > Sparrow > Tree Eagle > Cricket > Sparrow > Eagle.
• Grass > Cricket > Rat > Eagle.
• Grass > Cricket > Rat > Snake > Eagle.
• Grass > Rat > Eagle.
• Tree > Cricket > Rat > Eagle.
• Tree > Cricket > Rat > Snake > Eagle.
• Grass > Crickets > Sparrows > Eagles.
• Grass > Rat > Snake > Eagle.

2. Example of a Food Chain in the Desert

The desert is one of the few naturally occurring and biotic terrestrial ecosystems that can survive in this place due to its extremely hot and dry temperature. Some examples of desert ecosystems are the Gobi desert and the Kalahari desert in Africa. The characteristics of a desert ecosystem are:

• Has very low rainfall,
• It is part of the terrestrial ecosystem
• Has very extreme temperatures.

An example of a food chain in a desert ecosystem is:

• Solar energy – grass – deer – hyenas – decomposers
• Solar energy – grass – rabbit – snake – eagle – decomposer

3. An example of a food chain in the sea

Marine ecosystems or marine ecosystems are natural aquatic ecosystems, dominated by very wide and high salt waters. The characteristics of the marine ecosystem are as follows:

• Has a high salinity, the closer to the equator the higher
• NaCl dominates marine ecosystem minerals up to 75%
• Climate and weather do not really affect the marine ecosystem
• It has variations in temperature difference at the surface with at depth.

Examples of food chains in marine ecosystems are:

Phytoplankton – Small Fish – Seals – Sharks – Decomposers

• Phytoplankton, namely as a producer because it can form food reserves called starch through the process of photosynthesis.
• Small fish, namely as primary consumers because small fish eat phytoplankton in order to survive.
• Seals, namely as secondary consumers because seals eat small fish, and convert it into energy for their survival.
• Sharks, namely as top consumers because sharks eat seals in order to survive
• Decomposers, their role is to decompose sharks when they die. So that the nutrients can be absorbed by the soil where sea plants live.

4. Example of a Food Chain in a Lake

Lakes are natural aquatic ecosystems, just like seas and rivers, but lakes are included in the category of unique ecosystems or ecosystems with calm water. The characteristics of the lake ecosystem are as follows:

• Has an inconspicuous temperature variation
• Has very little light penetration
• Inhabited by a distinctive flora
• Inhabited by most animal phyla

An example of a food chain in a lake ecosystem is: Solar energy – phytoplankton – zooplankton – dragonfly or mosquito larvae – fish – crocodile – decomposers

• Phytoplankton -> zooplankton -> Small fish -> Fish-eating birds -> Decomposers
• Phytoplankton decomposers -> Zooplankton -> Small fish -> Big fish -> Decomposers
• Phytoplankton -> Zooplankton -> Small fish -> Big fish -> Fish-eating birds -> Decomposers
• Hydrylla Plants -> Snails -> Fish-eating birds -> Decomposers
• Water hyacinth plant -> Snails -> Fish-eating birds -> Decomposers
• Water hyacinth plant -> Caterpillars -> Birds -> Decomposers

5. Example of a Food Chain in a River

Rivers are Iotic ecosystems or ecosystems with flowing water. The characteristics of the river ecosystem are as follows:

• Water in river ecosystems flows from upstream to downstream
• There is a change in the physical and chemical state of the ecosystem that takes place continuously
• The physical and chemical conditions at the river ecosystem water flow level are very high
• Plants and animals that live have adapted to the conditions of river water flow

An example of a food chain in a river ecosystem is:

• Solar energy – algae or moss – shrimp – fish – river snakes – decomposers
• Solar energy – algae or moss – fish – bears – decomposers

6. Example of a Food Chain in the Savanna

Just like desert ecosystems, savannas also include terrestrial ecosystems that are formed naturally. There are two kinds of savannas, pure savannas and mixed savannas. Pure savanna has only one type of tree while mixed savanna has several types of trees. The characteristics of the savanna ecosystem are:

• Meadows interspersed with trees
• Located in the tropics
• Types of flora that generally grow there are grass, Eucalyptus, Acacia, and Coryphautan
• In general, the types of animals in the savanna biome are lions, tigers, deer, elephants, zebras, horses, termites, insects

An example of a food chain in a savanna ecosystem is:

• Solar energy – grass – zebra – tiger – decomposers
• Solar energy – grass – deer – cheetah – decomposers

Thus the meaning and a few examples of the food chain and examples. Another thing that is more important in studying food chains and webs is that we must understand that all creatures on this earth need each other to survive and for that we must continue to preserve nature.

The extinction of one particular type of animal will destroy the balance of the food chain and in the end it will all have an impact on human survival, the spirit of learning Sinaumed’s!

One of the causes of the destruction of this balance can also be climate change which in the end can have an impact on the extinction of living things as discussed in the book Oh, It Turns Out… Living Things Can Become Extinct Due to Climate Change!

On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as CPNS synonyms, antonyms, and others.

The example of the Prophet David AS- As a Muslim in general, you will certainly know about the stories of the prophet who are always told when listening to religious lectures, be it in mosques, schools, or other places that are holding religious events. As is well known, the stories of the prophets are true stories that have occurred centuries ago as part of the history of the development of the Islamic religion to this day. Faith in the prophets and apostles is the fourth pillar of faith. For Muslims, the pillars of faith are things that must be practiced. Before cultivating faith in the prophets and apostles, one must first understand and study the stories, miracles, history, and journeys of all 25 prophets and apostles.

The lesson to be learned from believing in the Prophets and Apostles is that we can motivate ourselves to be more active in worshiping Allah Ta’ala, stay away from all the prohibitions of Allah Ta’ala, follow and emulate the attitudes of the prophets and apostles. and have good behavior according to God’s commands. Prophets and apostles who have good morals with honest and true faith. The Prophet Daud AS was no exception, who was also the messenger of Allah SWT to spread goodness and convey Allah’s commands that there is no god but Him. Even though he was hit by various obstacles while carrying out the task of conveying God’s commands, he remained patient and determined to be able to get through it. Therefore, it is very good for us Muslims to emulate the qualities of the prophet David A.

For this reason, as a guide in living this life, we also have to know what role models the Prophet Daud AS used and in this discussion we have summarized the example of Prophet Daud AS for Sinaumed’s friends to learn and practice in everyday life.

Furthermore, we have presented the discussion below!

History of the Prophet David AS

David or Dawud (Arabic: دَاؤُوْد) Dāʾūd‎ Hebrew: דָּוִד, Modern Davīd Tiberias Dāwīḏ, Greek: Δαβίδ, translit. Davíd) is a character in the Koran, the Bible, and the Tanakh. He is seen as a prophet. Dawud is known as a figure who has defeated Jalut (Goliath) and as a pious king. Abrahamic religions generally view David as an ideal role model king.

Dawud is seen as a prophet in Islam. In the Qur’an, the mention of Dawud is more emphasized on his strengths or miracles, not on the chronological flow of his life as in the story of Yusuf or Musa.

The Qur’an mentions Dawud as a figure endowed with kingdom, wisdom, wisdom, guided, knowledge, a servant of Allah who is obedient and has strength, and a caliph who has a close position with Allah and a good place to return. His name is also coupled with other prophets, especially Sulaiman who is his own son. Muslims also know Dawud from his fast which is called the Fast of David.

A history of hadith states that Dawud died at the age of one hundred years. It is stated that Allah revealed to Adam his future descendants. When he saw Dawud, it was stated that his age allowance was sixty years, and Adam asked that David’s age be increased by forty years from his own age. But when the angel of death came to Adam, Adam dodged it on the grounds that he still had forty years left and he had forgotten to give it to David.

A history says that David died on Wednesday suddenly. Apart from Harun and Musa, there was no other prophet’s death that made the Children of Israel more anxious and sad than Dawud’s death. His funeral procession was attended by many people and Sulaiman ordered the birds to gather to make shade and blow the wind so they wouldn’t get too hot.

Biblical sources state that Dawud died at the age of seventy after having ruled for forty years. He was buried in Jerusalem. In the Midrash, it is stated that Adam gave seventy years of his life to Dawud.

Follow the story of the Prophet David AS

The example of the Prophet David is one of the inspirational stories that every Muslim should emulate. In Islam, there are 25 prophets and messengers that must be known.

The prophets we have to believe in they seem to have exemplary stories for Muslim life. However, one of the stories that we should know, remember and emulate is the story of the Prophet David.

The story of the Prophet makes us as Muslims learn a lot. Because there is wisdom in a story or story. From pious people we learn to gain the pleasure of Allah SWT.

For that, let’s look at the example of the Prophet David AS below.

• Prophet Daud AS had great courage because he always believed in the help and strength of Allah SWT

During the reign of King Thalut, Prophet David AS was just an ordinary soldier who fought when he reigned. At that time, King Thalut announced a contest to kill his enemy Jalut.

Prophet Daud AS accepted the challenge and dared to advance against Jalut. Everyone was shocked, his two sisters who were also soldiers were fiercely rejected. Jalut who is much bigger and stronger will definitely beat Prophet Daud AS easily.

Prophet Daud AS believed that everything is possible with Allah’s permission. With this belief, the Prophet Daud US took out stones and slingshots to target Jalut. A rock hit Jalut’s forehead, causing him to collapse.

For that we need courage to go through the hardships of life. If we are sure that we are on the right track, we have nothing to fear! Rest assured that Allah SWT will always help us.

If he truly believed in the power of God, Prophet David AS would not have to be afraid of what he had to go through. This was seen when he had to deal with Jalut.

Jalut was a very tall man. The body is big and strong. Previously, no one dared to go against him.

The belief that God will help him if he does it right makes him brave against Jalut.

In the end the Prophet David AS succeeded in defeating Jalut on the battlefield. Something that no one else had thought of at the time. But if God wills, everything is easy.

We must emulate the attitude of taking risks when it is right. Prophet David was able to bravely defeat Jalut because he believed in Allah. Even though he was an ordinary soldier before.

• Have a Humble Nature

Shortly after the Prophet Daud AS succeeded in defeating Jalut, he was raised by many people. But that just made him uncomfortable. He felt that he was not great, but an all-powerful God.

Prophet David did something sincerely in the name of Allah SWT. Not because he wanted praise from people. Nor is it for the pursuit of wealth. He even went to the mountains to avoid people. He prayed and silently prayed to God.

When King Thalut expected nothing in return, he actually married his daughter. Then he became king of the Israelites.

The success of Prophet David AS in defeating Jalut for a time made him praised by many people. King Thalut not only wanted to give him an important position in the kingdom, but people also wanted to give him gifts. Seeing the praise spread, Prophet David AS even stepped aside to a mountain and prayed to Allah SWT.

His courage against Jalut is only because he wants to fight evil. The goal is the pleasure of Allah SWT. And when he dhikr in silence Allah SWT sent down the Zabur Book.

If we look at life today, there are still many people who crave praise and get angry when their kindness is not appreciated. On the other hand, if you’re really sincere, you shouldn’t need people’s compliments.

• Abundant wealth actually makes worship more obedient to worship, one of which is by fasting the Prophet David

Prophet David is a prophet who has so much wealth. He married the daughter of Thalut and became the greatest king at that time. This does not necessarily weaken his enthusiasm for worshiping Allah SWT.

Everything he had brought him closer to Allah. He spent his time taking care of his people and worshiping Allah SWT.

Even the Prophet David was so famous for his fasting. To this day, many Muslims imitate the Prophet David. This made the prophet David closer to Allah SWT. One day fasting and one day not. This is done from time to time.

Prophet David AS, who replaced King Thalut, succeeded in becoming a leader who was loved by the people. No wonder his empire was thriving. The wealth and throne obtained brought Prophet David AS closer to Allah SWT in the form of gratitude. The afternoon is filled with da’wah and government affairs, then the evening is spent in worship.

Prophet David AS really understood that wealth is just a deposit. This is an example of the example of the Prophet David AS who taught us how to behave. Do not let the toil of accumulating wealth make us forget the Creator and neglect worshiping Him.

• Even though he was very rich, Prophet David AS still worked hard

Even though he has become king, he still works to support himself. The Prophet David sold the weapons he made. God gave a miracle in the form of the ability to soften iron.

Then he prepared armor for battle. He made it his business.

Many bought armor. Even at the time of the Prophet David, such armor existed for the first time. This made his army very strong. Stronger than any army.

The Prophet once said: Prophet David never ate food that was not the result of his own labor. We should emulate this high work ethic.

Many people can relax with wealth that they did not earn through hard work. Finally he is lazy. Spending time on useful things is good. Do not rush to claim wealth.

Allah SWT gave the Prophet David AS the ability to soften iron. This is a miracle that the prophet David did not want to miss. Despite his wealth, the prophet David continued to make armor and make a living from it.

Despite the fact that Prophet Dawud’s army earned a lot of money from the armor trade, they were also hard to beat because of their strong armor protection. Wealth should not make us careless, because time must still be filled with useful work.

• Wise and Fair

The Prophet David was a prophet who was gifted by God with wisdom. His ability to be fair and wise is exemplary. He can solve the problems of his people.

One of them is when a greedy person comes to ask for someone else’s only goat. Even though he has 99 goats.

Prophet David said why was he so greedy when he already had so much. It solves the problem fairly.

But he just realized that making him wise is God’s test. He understood that God was guiding him.

He bowed and kowtowed to ask for forgiveness. Then Allah will forgive him. His ability to understand issues and relate them to his own experience is a smart move.

When he has to be a judge, he understands that he cannot be impartial.

We can learn this from the attitude of the Prophet David. He knows how to be fair. Can also think about other people’s problems.

Becoming a king who is loved by his people and remaining committed to worshiping Allah SWT certainly requires wise time management. Prophet David AS advised that humans should not ignore the four seasons.

First of all, it is time to pray to God. Second, it’s time to think. Third, time to connect with other people. Fourth, time to enjoy life as long as it is within the limits of the law.

• Has Polite Speech and Soft Voice

His words can soften a heart as hard as a rock. The Prophet David AS softened a hard heart with a poem he said about his words. This is one of the examples that can be emulated from the Prophet David AS, namely when you want to convey something, you must speak politely and not hurt someone’s heart.

This made the sermon of the Prophet David AS acceptable to his people. He could convince everyone to follow the orders of Allah SWT. It is not surprising that Allah SWT sent the Prophet David AS after the death of Prophet Musa AS and Harun AS to straighten his path.

When the Psalms were revealed to him. Prophet David used a different voice when reading the book. Some even say he can read the book in 70 different tones.

He has such a beautiful and gentle voice. Many people enjoyed hearing his reading. In fact, every time they heard this statement, someone moved as if they were dancing in joy.

Not only humans, birds and plants also sing the tasbih. Until now, no one has been able to match the voice of the Prophet David.

Never before has God given someone such a beautiful voice. He hums the recitation well and eloquently.

The benefits are like the benefits of the good looks of the Prophet Yusuf. There are also many stories that say sick people get better when they hear his voice. The water is calm and the wind is blowing calmly.

The mountains bowed to praise. The flying birds then stopped to worship David who glorified Allah SWT.

All elements are related to praising God. Every morning and evening they pray to Allah SWT. Besides being melodious, he can also read quickly and fluently.

It is said that while he was preparing for the journey, he read the Psalms.

Before he could perfectly finish the saddle on the beast’s back, he finished his entire reading.

Conclusion

That’s all for a brief discussion of the example from the story of the Prophet David AS. From the story of the Prophet David AS mentioned above, there are many examples that we can learn and lessons that we can learn to live our daily lives. Reading and emulating the story and character of the Prophet David AS teaches us to always be grateful and not arrogant with everything we have because it is all entrusted and will return to the Almighty.

This is a review of the exemplary story of the Prophet David AS. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the story of the example of the Prophet David AS and knowledge related to other religions, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you.

a

Parts of a Flower & Their Functions – As many people already know, flowers are very beautiful ornamental plants that are liked by many people, especially women. The beauty of flowers varies greatly depending on the type of flower itself. Everyone will choose the type of flower according to their wishes.

Flowers can also be used as a sweetener or room decoration. In addition to beautifying the room, flowers give a fragrant aroma to the room. A beautiful and fragrant room can make you more comfortable and more comfortable living in that room. So, is your room already decorated with flowers?

Flowers are indeed very beautiful, but do you already know the parts of a flower and their functions? Each part of the flower will work or perform their respective functions. By knowing the parts and functions of flowers, you can take care of and plant flowers to the fullest.

For those of you who want to know or get to know the parts of a flower and their functions, then you can read this article to the end. Enjoy reading and see the explanation below.

 

Definition of Flowers

Flowers in Latin are called flos . The flower itself can be said to be a means of sexual reproduction in flowering plants. In general, these flowers are in the magnoliophyta or angiospermae divisions . The two divisions mean closed seed plants.

However, the majority of botanists say that a flower is a short piece of stem or branch that has several clusters of specialized leaves. In other words, flowers are a mixture of leaves and stems that function to help a closed fertilization system.

Basically, plants really need flowers for reproduction. In the process of breeding, flowers need animals to pollinate. To attract animals to want to help pollinate flowers, the flower colors are very bright.

As we know that the plant itself has roots, stems and leaves. Thus, the flower is not part of the plant but a combination of one of the combinations. This is because the reproduction that occurs in plants using seeds is called generative reproduction.

The Function of Flowers As Generative Propagation

1. Plant Reproductive Organs

The flower itself has the function of combining or uniting the fusion of sperm or male gametes and ovules or female gametes. With this, seed production will be carried out. The arrangement or arrangement of flowers in a stalk is called flowering. The reproductive organs in flowers are known as stamens and pistils.

2. Attracts the Pollinator

As we know that there are animals whose main food is nectar. Meanwhile, flowers have nectar or sweet liquid. If using mutualism symbiosis, the nectar in the flowers will be taken as food, at that time pollination of the flowers occurs.

During pollination, pollen is transferred from the male flower head to the female stigma. Thus, the meeting of pollen and pistil will result in the decay of gametes in plants.

3. Producing Nectar or Flower Sarees

Flowers always produce nectar. The nectar in flowers is very rich in sugar, so nectar is called the sweet liquid in flowers. This sweet liquid is produced when the plant is in bloom.

When the flowers are in bloom, that’s when the nectar-eating animals will be attracted to come to the flowers. The more animals that are interested, the faster the pollination process will occur.

4. Beautiful Parts of Plants

It is not uncommon for flowers to be a beautiful part of plants. Therefore, flowers always have bright colors and a variety of interesting shapes. If the plant does not have flowers, maybe the plant will be less attractive.

Bright colors and varied shapes make flowers can be used as ornamental plants. Therefore, until now flowers are still favored by many people to be used as ornamental plants in their yards.

Flower Parts

As we know that the parts of a flower have their respective functions. To find out more clearly what the parts of the flower are, let’s look at the explanation below.

1. Sterile Parts

The sterile part of the flower is divided into two, namely the petals and the flower corolla. See the explanation of the two parts below.

a) Flower Petals ( calix )

Petals or calyx is the outermost part of the flower. The color of the flower petals is usually green like the color of the leaves. At first glance, these flower petals are almost similar to leaves. Flower petals are smaller than leaves.

Then what is the function of flower petals? The function of the flower petals is to protect young flowers and protect the buds when the flowers are developing. If there are no flower petals, it is likely that the flower will not develop optimally.

b) Flower Crown ( corolla )

The crown is always synonymous with something beautiful and usually attracts attention. Likewise, the flower crown always has a bright color to attract the attention of nectar-eating animals. The flower crown is generally larger than the flower petals.

Although, generally the color of the flower crown is brightly colored, but sometimes the color is not so bright or flashy. Not only that, in some flowers, there are crowns that depend on the wind or water. Why so? Because with wind or water, the pollination process can be easier.

The flower crown serves to attract nectar-eating animals to the flower. The pollination process can occur one of them because the animals that eat nectar look for food in flowers.

Where does the color of the flower crown come from? The colors of the flower crowns come from pigments in the chloroplasts called carotenoids. Meanwhile, in cell fluids, they are called flavonoids . Although it is usually caused by these two pigments, sometimes the color of the flower crown can be caused by changes in the similarity of the cell fluids.

Basically the structure of the petals and corolla of this flower is similar to the structure of the leaves. The similarity lies in the ground parenchyma tissue, vascular tissue, and epidermal tissue.

2. The Fertile Section 

This fertile part is the reproductive part of the flower. The flower itself has two fertile parts, namely the stamens or stamens and pistils or pistilum . For more details, let’s look at the explanation as follows.

a) Stamens or Male Genitals ( stamen )

The first fertile part is the stamens or stamens . Stamens are the male reproductive organs. In other words, this stamen organ produces male sex cells in plants.

The stamens have a constituent part called filamin. This filament generally has a shape like a stalk and usually has an antenna at the end. The antenna on this filamin is the location where pollen grains are formed.

In general, stamens are divided into three parts. First, the stamen ( filamenum ), this stamen is the part of the stamen that has a thread-like shape with a transverse diameter and is usually round in shape.

Second, the anther ( anther ), the anther is the part of the stamen whose position or location is at the end of the stamen. In general, the anther has two chambers or theca , then each chamber is further divided into two smaller chambers or loculumum .

Third, connecting the sari chambers or connecting parts of the stamens which are located on the right and left between the anthers and the anthers. In other words, the anthers and anthers are connected by means of a connecting rod or konektivum .

Where are the male sex cells (male gametes) located? The male sex cells are located in the anthers. Inside the pollen chamber there are male sex cells or commonly known as pollen or pollen .

Thus, the function of the stamens is to pollinate the flower. However, there are some stamens that are categorized as barren stamens. Barren stamens occur because the pollen is unable to carry out or reproduce pollination.

b) Pistils or Female Genitals ( pistillum )

After discussing the male reproductive organs in flowers, now is the time to discuss the female reproductive organs in flowers. Flowers have female reproductive organs or organs known as pistils.

This pistil organ is formed from one or more carpels and this pistil is located in the center of the flower. Collections of carpels are called Ginocium .

Like stamens, pistils also have three parts. Each of these parts has different functions and tasks. First, the stigma ( stigma ), the stigma is located at the very top of the pistil. The stigma is generally sticky because the stigma is a place for pollen to stick.

Second, the pistil ( stylus ), the pistil is shaped like a long tube. The function of the stigma is to attach or connect the stigma with the ovary. In addition, the stigma is usually shaped like a thread.

Third, the ovary ( ovary ), this ovary is usually located at the bottom or base of the flower. In addition, when you are storing eggs, these ovaries usually look enlarged. In short, the ovary is the room or place in which there are seeds.

The pistil itself has an egg cell called an ovules or ovulum . These seeds will turn into seeds or cement after being fertilized by sperm from the stamens.

The function of this pistil is a place or container for pollen originating from the stamens or male reproductive organs in flowers. In simple terms, after the pistil has been fertilized by sperm from pollen, then this pistil will grow and turn into an institutional bladder. It is this organ bladder that produces new plants in flowers (breeds).

Breeding In Flowers

From the results of the previous discussion, it can be said that the reproductive organs in flowering plants are stamens or male cells and pistils or female cells. Then what is the process of reproduction that occurs in flowering plants?

1. Flowering plants reproduce or reproduce by forming a seed.

2. These seeds come from the formation that occurs from male sex cells and female sex cells. The male sex cells are in the form of pollen and the female sex cells are in the form of fruit.

3. The thing that must be underlined in the reproduction of flowering plants is the process of fertilization where the pollen (male) must enter the inside of the pistil (female).

Every breeding in flower plants is always accompanied by pollination. The process of pollination is the process by which the pollen reaches the pistil through the thread. Pollination is divided into two types of pollination, namely self-pollination and cross-pollination.

1. Self-pollinated

Self-pollination can only occur in the same flower plant or a different flower plant, but still in the same type. Self-pollination can be seen in barley, long bean, sesame, rice, beans, and others. However, self-pollination has a drawback, namely the seeds produced from this pollination cannot germinate.

Self-pollination is still divided into two types, namely natural self-pollination and artificial self-pollination.

Natural self-pollination is pollination that occurs when flowering plants have complete reproductive organs. Complete reproductive organs consist of stamens and pistils that are in one flower. In other words, flower plants that do not have complete reproductive organs cannot self-pollinate naturally.

Artificial self-pollination is pollination that occurs due to human intervention. Self-pollination assisted by human intervention is called self-crossing or selfing . The workings of this pollination, such as humans will collect the existing stamens on the stamens, then the pollen is placed on the stigma of the same flower plant.

2. Cross pollination

After discussing cross pollination, now what will be discussed is cross pollination. Cross pollination is the pollination of the stamens and the stigma that occurs in two different plants.

In the cross-pollination process, an intermediary is needed. This intermediary aims to carry pollen from one flower to another. You can see the intermediary in cross-pollination in insects, such as butterflies, wasps, hummingbirds, to the wind.

These nectar-eating animals really need flowers as a source of food because flowers contain nectar. When these animals look for food in one flower and another, some of the pollen will stick to the pistil and that’s when cross-pollination occurs.

The thing that needs to be underlined in cross-pollination is that not all flowers are liked by insects. Generally, these insects only like the striking color of the flowers and the smell is very strong. However, it is different with butterfly insects. As long as the flowers still contain honey, the butterflies really like the flowers.

Meanwhile, assisted pollination or using wind intermediaries usually occurs in flower plants that do not have crowns and flower petals, such as weeds.

Conclusion

Flowers can be said as plants that need animals, wind, and humans to pollinate. Flowers that are not pollinated will not be able to reproduce. Therefore, if we want to care for and grow flowers as ornamental plants, we must often pay attention to this pollination process.

After discussing the meaning of flowers and the parts of flowers and their functions. Are you interested in planting and caring for flowers as ornamental plants? For more details on how this pollination process occurs, you can read books that discuss the ins and outs of flowers.

The flow of Surrealism – Painting is included in the branch of the flow of fine arts. In the branch of painting, one can channel their creativity by using two-dimensional planes, such as canvas, board, drawing paper, and can also use other media. In the field of art, there are several streams that produce various kinds of beautiful and meaningful paintings. On this occasion, we will discuss a school of art that is quite well-known and still exists today, namely the Surrealism school. This one genre is a flow of art that displays images of real objects in conditions that are not possible in the real world. So that the flow of Surrealism has an image like in a dream state.

The development of the art of painting has indeed existed since ancient times. This relates to an expression of one’s soul which is poured into written form. From ideas or ideas from the existing flow of painting, it will certainly produce a style of painting which will then differentiate between one artist and another. Even in some schools of painting there is a teaching that can be easily understood.

In this article, we will discuss the definition of Surrealism, the characteristics, characters, and examples of the work of each artist. But before going deeper, the first thing we will discuss is the meaning of Surrealism.

Definition of Surrealism

Surrealism is a school that presents the contradiction between dreams and reality and then makes it real into an image that displays real objects in conditions that would not be possible in the real world. It is like in a dream or our subconscious. Surrealism itself uses the approach of Freud’s psychological theory which explores the subconscious and the image of a human dream as a depiction of human desires.

Dreams or images from the subconscious are believed to be able to show true human desires and desires, but these things have been buried in the subconscious due to social pressure or other things so as not to display them. Even though it has been covered up, it does not mean that what is a desire and also what a person really wants is a negative thing. It is possible that something that is hidden can occur due to lack of confidence, embarrassment, to the point of being feared because of certain traumas. It can also be as simple as a childhood dream that fades away as they have to face a more logical reality as they grow up. Having a little desire is okay, as long as we can control it and not follow it.

 

The Rise of Surrealism

Surrealism is one of the greatest art movements of the 20th century. Surrealism was coined by Andre Breton, a poet from the Dadaism school in his Surrealist Manifesto in 1924. This stream originated in the world of literature and ended up spreading to the world of fine arts and other fields of art. However, some scholars suggest that this genre dates back to 1917, through a work by Giorgio de Chirico that presents a view of a city sidewalk with a stylistic touch that seems almost hallucinatory. Although in the end, Chirico decided to leave his painting style. But his work has inspired Mac Ernst to adopt a similar style.

Like the majority of art schools, Surrealism is a product that exists from its historical period. This flow rebelled against the comfort zone produced by the lower middle class. The Dadaists disagreed with the satisfaction of the middle class. They conclude that the middle class is a group whose horizon is the most squeezed by its own comfort zone. Until they are not aware that they are actually one of the most disadvantaged groups in modern society.

This illustrates how the Dadaists with their various surprising and unreasonable ideas will try to move the middle class out of these generic ideas. Surrealism itself still adopts this idea, but does so by bringing dreamy images that tend to be imaginative on real objects. On the cloth side, Dadais presents something shocking through an ugly, random, and unorthodox image for the general public to see. The Surrealism flow always wanted to make their minds free from the various limitations of reality that were built by modern society.

The end of Surrealism

As for the polemic that has arisen among historians about the end of this school. For some historians, Surrealism ended after World War II. When other modern art movements rose to prominence. Meanwhile, experts reveal that the death of Andre Breton which occurred in 1966 marked the end of the Surrealism school. On the other hand, other opinions reveal that this one genre continues today and is reflected in many contemporary works of art.

 

Elements of Surrealism

The following are some elements of Surrealism that helped create a Surrealist work. These elements include:

1. Myth

Myth is an expression from within the human soul. Every human being has a fear within them that they believe in. While in Surrealism, they will present these myths, which we may believe or fear. With the existence of myths, the value of an art from Surrealist works will increase.

2. Dreams

Dreams are one of the best ways to reveal something that comes from the subconscious. With dreams, things that are not real can be created and realized in a form of work.

3. Metamorphosis

Metamorphosis will usually use automatic techniques, frottage, drawing, fumage, decalcomania, cadavre exquis, and development techniques.

Characteristics of Surrealism

The following are some of the characteristics of the Surrealism flow that you need to know:

a. Presenting images of real objects in unreal conditions
b. Imaging as in a dream
c. Having a high contrast, that means: there is a large form side by side with a small form
d. Playing an image in a dream with one in the real world
e. Impressed like a fantasy but still stick to the references that exist in the real world

Surrealist Style and Technique

Surrealist paintings are defined not only by identifiable characteristics, but also by a philosophy that believes in using certain techniques to express the intent of works of art and enable them to achieve their goals.

Several works by Surrealist artists, for example Picasso’s works are different from Max Ernst’s works. Artists tend to change their style over time, they will even use different styles and techniques in one work of art. Some of the techniques commonly used by Surrealist artists are collage, automatism, grattage and frottage.

1. Automatism

Automatism is often used in writing. Where the writer will let the flow of words flow by itself without any obstacles. The same process was applied to Surrealist painting, where the artists would let their brushes paint and move by themselves without any resistance.

2. Frottage and Grattage

Frottage is when an artist creates a textured surface and rubs it in using a soft material such as a crayon. While Grattage refers more when pieces of paint are removed using a certain method.

Figures of Surrealism

Below are some figures from the Surrealism school who had a considerable influence on the Surrealist art movement. These characters include:

1. Rene Magritte

Rene Magritte born on November 21, 1898 is one of the most famous Belgian artists of the 20th century. Magritte received a lot of praise and acclaim for his very special approach to Surrealism. However, before becoming an artist, to support his life, Magritte spent years working on designing and producing book covers.

Magritte is very interested in the existence of the middle class, namely people who spend most of their time working and spending their money to survive. According to Magritte, the middle class is classified as poor enough to receive subsidies from the government, but also unable to meet basic needs such as housing. He symbolizes this life through a painting of a man wearing a bowler hat.

Golconda Surrealism Painting and Its Analysis

The work features a human rain scene. Where everyone looks almost identical to one another and wears the same clothes, complete with a bowler hat. Even so, it could be that the men in the painting are just floating because there is no implied indication of movement. The background of the painting is an area in the suburbs that is similar to the area where Magritte lives. He also wears clothes in the same way, that is, like the people in the painting. A bowler hat is a hat commonly used by the middle class at that time.

One of the interpretations or interpretations that can be produced is that Magritte wants to highlight the boundaries between individuality and associations or groups that have been lost and blurred in modern times. All the men wore the same clothes, had similar body features, and were all floating simultaneously in the same place. Individual freedom has been lost, even though this is one of the basic human rights to express themselves the way they want.

2. Frida Kahlo

Frida Kahlo is an artist who regularly uses visual symbolism derived from the physical pain she experiences in an effort to better understand emotional suffering. Since childhood, Kahlo has suffered from polio which unbalanced her legs. During her life, Kahlo experienced pain that would not end. So he spends more time in the hospital. Before Kahlo, the language of death, loss, and loneliness was well researched by male artists. However, the results have not been significantly dissected by female artists. Not only that, Kahlo didn’t just enter the realm of general symbolism, but she also expanded it by creating her own symbol.

Kahlo is not only categorized as a Surrealist artist. But also became one of the figures of the feminist art movement. She has created many distinctive symbols or icons used throughout her career, including hair, animals and ribbons. Kahlo has succeeded in creating a new way to talk about even the most complex aspects of a woman’s identity. Not only being a great artist, Kahlo is also a figure much admired because of her unique personality. A portrait of Kahlo’s face which is also very iconic, with the characteristic thick and united eyebrows. He also had a major influence on other artists. Until now, there are still many contemporary artists who use their portrait images to be used as references for their works.

The Surrealism Painting The Wounded Deer and Its Analysis

This painting features a hybrid between a deer and a human, which is a portrait of the painter, Frida Kahlo. He put himself into a helpless creature and was injured because of the arrows that stuck all over his body. Apparently, this hybrid creature was being hunted in the forest.

When viewed from the scene in the painting, Kahlo confirms that he is still alive. However, the arrows that stuck all over his body would slowly kill him. The creature is seen wearing a pearl earring, as if highlighting her desire to become another woman who might live longer because she doesn’t suffer from a disease like her. He also seems to show his desire to live more freely in the open.

Kahlo does not describe herself as a stag with big antlers. This shows her spirituality towards feminist thought. Like satire on the condition of the art world which has always been dominated by a man. Rarely do women get a place to become artists. In this painting, he also shows his interest in appreciating other great artists from the past. The painting is associated with a painting with the theme of St. Sebastian, who has a similar scene, namely arrows sticking all over his body.

3. Salvador Dali

Salvador Dali is one of the most famous, dominant, and productive Surrealist artists of the 20th century. Dali is known as a pioneer artist who knows that commercial awareness is also needed for an artist. He frequently appeared on TV and received intensive press interviews. In the course of his career, he has not only painted, but has also explored other art media such as printmaking, sculpture, advertising art, design art, literature, film, and what is quite famous is the collaboration he did with Luis Buñuel and Alfred Hitchcock.

Apart from his unbeatable technical skills, Dali was also renowned for his eccentric and flamboyant personality. In his early use of organic morphology, his work bears the hallmarks of the Spanish artists Pablo Picasso and Joan Miro. His paintings also show his interest in Classical and Renaissance art. This is evident through the hyper realistic style and use of religious symbolism in his works.

Surrealism Painting The Persistence of Time and Its Analysis

The Persistence of Time is a fairly iconic and famous painting by Salvador Dali. The painting displays various kinds of wall clocks and an alarm that looks melted. In this painting, Dali makes an object that should be hard appear soft. The existence of a tree that looks like it is growing on a block of wood that is similar to a table adds to the impression of the contrast between reality and the world of dreams.

The horizon that looks wide but looks empty, coupled with the cliffs that are clearly depicted even though they are not close, makes the background of the painting look like in a dream world, or just an illusion. The Persistence Of Time seems to be the main focus in this work.

As we know that painting is a branch of fine art. Therefore, painting also includes a more complete development than drawing. In painting, there are various kinds of schools that have their own characteristics in drawing paintings. One such stream is the flow of Cubism. So, what is cubism, its characteristics, and who are the characters in it and its brief history. Below we will discuss this in more detail.

Definition of Cubism

The flow of Cubism is one of the fine arts that has a point of view from an object that is in one image. So that it will produce images that seem separate or fragmented. The fragmentation in the Cubism flow will form a geometric shape such as cubes, triangles, cylinders, circles, and others. That way, the flow of Cubism does not have to be cubic, but can also be geometric. A painting from the Cubist school has a front and side perspective that can be seen simultaneously in one painting object. So that it will produce artistic value.

 

History of Cubism

Cubism first appeared in 1907, when Picasso began using the style in his work entitled “Demoiselles D’Avignon”. The work is either a prototype or a work from pre-Cubism. In this work, various characteristics of the Cubist school have appeared, such as a radical distortion in the nose area, a split or fragmented background, and the position of the eyes that are a little odd but can give artistic expression. Georges Braque, who saw the painting in Picasso’s studio, felt interested and responded to the style used by Picasso by exploring a similar or similar style.

Examples of Cubist Works: Demoiselles D’avignon, by Pablo Picasso

Then, why is this flow called Cubism? The term cubism basically comes from a comment made by one of the art critics named Louis Vauxcelles when he saw several paintings by Georges Braque which were exhibited in Paris in 1908. He explained Braque’s paintings by simplifying the object into a geometric shape. So it looks to the cubes. That term eventually spread when the flow of Cubism increasingly gained the attention of the general public.

Cubism itself can be said to get influence and inspiration from the works of Paul Cezanne. Until one of its early phases was called Cezzanian Cubism. Cezanne’s work no longer pays attention to accurate perspectives. So that the work he makes does not have a consistent perspective. Even some objects look odd because there is no clear perspective. But that is one of the things that makes it look more interesting than with the classics which at that time had been considered too flat.

Pablo Picasso was also inspired by masks from African tribes. The style used to make the mask is very unrealistic and unnatural, full of distortion but still conveys a living human image. At that time Picasso had said: “The face consists of eyes, nose and mouth which can be distributed in any way according to your wishes”. That means, we can just draw or paint the mouth above the nose and the eyes under the nose, if we want. That is one of the views of Cubism that is important to understand.

Characteristics of Cubism

The following are some of the characteristics of the Cubism school that you need to know:

1. Only use geometric shapes

Paintings that have a Cubist style usually ignore the original form of the subject that exists in nature. Cubist artists deconstruct painted objects and carry out an analysis from various angles. That is one of the reasons the first type of Cubism was called Analytical Cubism. This is because the objects that have been analyzed are then painted in geometric arrangements, for example squares, triangles or cones.

2. Looks flat (flat) & minimal depth (sense of depth)

The parts in the subject are broken down and rearranged to make it look 2-dimensional and abstract in shape. This removes the illusion of depth from the painting itself. Cubist work also deliberately avoided using many traditional painting techniques. For example, perspective techniques, chiaroscuro (the use of dark and light colors to present a 3-dimensional impression), and foreshortening (shortening the subject to describe objects that are close to the observer).

3. Using multiple perspectives

The same subject can also be viewed from multiple angles simultaneously. For example, a cup that is broken into two parts. Where the left side will display the cup seen from the side, while the right side will depict the cup from above.

4. Consists of many fragments

Cubism flow itself is often referred to as a collection of broken glass by people who do not like it. When viewing paintings from this genre, observers need to piece together the pieces of the image. Then the painting is viewed as a whole to understand its meaning. Sometimes, painters break objects into parts so that they can be drawn from different perspectives. The backgrounds as well as the subjects of Cubist paintings often penetrate one another. In addition to the way of painting that uses multiple perspectives, this visual fragmentation makes works of Cubist style often difficult to understand.

 

Types of Cubism

Cubism developed through two distinct phases. The first phase is Analytic Cubism or Analytics Cubism and the second is Synthetic or Synthetic Cubism. However, this stage of Cubism is still debated and continues to be updated today. Various opinions from experts say that the flow of Cubism has three or even four phases. One phase before the Analytical phase and another after the Synthesis phase. So, to make it even more clear, below are the types of cubism that need to be understood:

Cezannian Cubism / Cezannian Cubism (1908 – 1909)

This was a phase of Cubism that was still rawly inspired by Cezanne’s works. A retrospective view of Cezanne has inspired many artists to take the positive side of their works. One of them is the freedom of perspective which can make a work more dynamic and not just imitating nature.

Analytic Cubism / Analytics Cubism (1910 – 1912)

Cubism in this phase developed in a fairly systematic way. Works based on observing objects in the context of their backgrounds and exploring them from various points of view. Picasso and Braque limited their subjects to the traditional portrait genre as well as still life. On top of that, they also limited the palette to earth tones as well as muted grays. It aims to reduce the clarity between fragmented figures and objects.

Synthesis Cubism (1912 – 1914)

In 1912, Picasso and Braque began to introduce foreign elements into their own compositions. Picasso added a wicker-like wallpaper to his work entitled: Still Life with Chair-Caning in 1912. Meanwhile, Braque stuck newspaper cuttings onto his canvas, then began to explore the collage movement. In essence, this phase is called Synthetic because they start composing and combining non-paint objects in their paintings.

Crystal Cubism (1915 – 1922)

Crystal cubism is a simplified form of various previous phases. In this phase, the flow of Cubism emphasized flat geometric planes that were stacked on top of each other. It was here that Cubism became close to formalistic abstraction, since geometric non-representative forms almost control all elements of works of art.

 

Artist Figures & Examples of Cubism Works

There were many artists involved in Cubism. This is because this flow can already be categorized into a fairly large sect. Below are some of the more influential Cubist artists and some examples of his work.

1.George Braque

Georges Braque was at the forefront of the Cubist revolutionary art movement. Throughout his career, Braque’s works have always focused on living objects and how to see different perspectives through lines, colors, and textures. Braque has been called one of the main originators and developers of Cubism. Although Picasso introduced it to the public. Braque himself started his art movement as a member of Fauvism. He began to develop Cubism after meeting Pablo Picasso. Even within a phase, their paintings have many similarities in terms of style, theme, and color. However, Braque says that his work is not like Picasso. Where his work tends to be purely from space and also images. This is certainly different from Picasso who used figures and objects as iconic signs. Braque seeks a balance as well as harmony in his compositions. Especially through papier colles, a paper collage technique that was discovered along with his observations of Cubism in 1912.

Examples of Cubist Works: Bottle and Fishes (1910-12)

Braque has always painted a bottle and a fish throughout his painting career. The painting above is an example of Analytic Cubism, namely the initial phase of collaboration in developing Cubism with Picasso. The painting has a characteristic palette of light earth tones. So that it can produce a very soft image even though the objects being painted are messy and many. The dynamic texture of brush strokes fills various potential voids in the large and wide elements of the painting. A neat composition using vertical objects resting on horizontal supports helps balance the painting.

2. Pablo Picasso

Pablo Picasso is one of the most dominant and very influential artists of the first 20th century. Especially because of the emergence of Cubism that was promoted with Georges Braque. Picasso is also known as one of the founders of the collage technique and made a major contribution to Symbolism and Surrealism. Although his main work is painting, his sculpture is also quite influential and has successfully explored various types of media and other fields such as ceramics and printmaking. Picasso himself had a charismatic personality. So it’s easy for him to become more famous.

From the beginning, Picasso was influenced by Henri Rousseau and Paul Cezanne, to the prehistoric art and crafts of African tribes. Picasso borrowed a lot from structure and imagery. This influence led him towards Cubism. Where he deconstructs the established perspective conventions of the Renaissance tool. Then revolutionized the artist’s attitude towards the image of form as well as space.

Picasso’s deepening of Cubism eventually led him to the invention of the collage technique. Where he decided to leave the idea of ​​the image as a window on the things that exist in the world. He also began to think of it as simply an arrangement of signs used in a different way. Sometimes, the object is just an Icon, sometimes it becomes a symbol. These ideas would be highly influential throughout the decades of the Cubist era.

Example of Pablo Picasso’s Work: Guernica

Pablo Picasso’s Guernica is one of the most famous paintings of all time. As with other famous works of art, the meaning of this painting is not very clear and is left free to interpret. Guernica itself is a small town in Northern Spain which became a means for bombing exercises by the German Luftwaffe during the Spanish Civil War. By looking at Picasso’s habit of frequently using metaphorical signs, it is likely that the painting contains many symbols, such as a horse, a bull, and a man with a sword. The various objects and figures seem to depict scenes of bullfighting. One of these extreme sports is indirectly a symbol of Spain.

3. Juan Gris

Juan Gris is the only artist who is very talented in making Picasso feel threatened. His style of Cubism was built on the foundations of early Cubism, but he later moved towards new Cubism. As a member of a group of avant-garde artists in Paris, Gris adapted the experiments of Pablo Picasso and Georges Braque. Gris’s paintings tend to be unique, different from other artists. Because, his background is an illustrator. Therefore, Gris is used to playing with design elements that are generally used to create commercial images.

Unlike the case with other Cabbage, Gris’s main goal is to feast the eyes. As the artist puts it, ‘I prefer emotions fixing the rules’. Despite his radical treatment of space as well as objects, Gris’s composition remains balanced. Where the chosen palette is bright colors and the subject that is often used is an avant-garde theme. Like Picasso and Braque, Gris also began to paste newsprint and advertisements into his works. The distinctive feature of the collage technique is that it will leave larger pieces of advertisements or newspapers, as if it still wants to maintain the integrity of the original information.

Example of a Cubist Harlequin with a Guitar

The painting is the favorite work of Gris’s mentor, Picasso. Harlequin is a main character figure in the commedia dell’arte or masque that originated in Italy in the 16th century and a charlatan who had a tendency to act on his own. In addition, Harlequin is also a subject that is often raised in the arts. From here, the background shows in the subject’s cartoon-like mouth and eyes. The bright graphic lines tracing the figure as well as the costume also contribute to reinforcing the impression a commercial poster appears. In addition, there are warm tones and familiar subjects that create harmony.

Benefits of Flexibility – Flexibility is an important component of physical fitness. Just like the other components, the level of flexibility can be used as a benchmark for assessing a person’s physical fitness.

There are several popular sports that require flexibility in joints and muscles, including floor gymnastics, equipment gymnastics, and beautiful jumping.

In these sports, joint and muscle flexibility is needed because there are so many movements in these sports that require athletes to move joints to limits that we rarely or even never do in our daily activities.

Definition of Flexibility or Flexibility

The ability to move joints optimally in order to reduce the risk of injury is called flexibility or flexibility. In other words, flexibility is the ability of a person to adapt his body to each work activity effectively and efficiently by stretching the body properly. If a person has good flexibility skills, it will be useful to minimize the occurrence of injuries during activities.

Benefits of Body Flexibility

As previously explained, the ability of the joints and surrounding muscles to carry out maximum movements without getting disturbed is flexibility. Practicing flexibility skills itself has several benefits, one of the main benefits of which is to avoid injury to the joints and muscles. Increasing flexibility throughout the body can make your joints move freely, smoothly, and can minimize disturbances such as sprains or sprains.

In addition, there are various other benefits of flexibility training, namely:

1. When your muscles are more flexible, relaxed, and not tense, then when you do any activity that requires quite extreme body movements, you will not feel too sore or sore.
2. Reducing the possibility of injury while playing various sports.
3. Reducing the possibility of muscle cramps.
4. When you focus on exercises that function to increase muscle flexibility, you will most likely be able to improve your posture at the same time.
5. The length of the spine, the length of the shoulder bones, and the length of the leg bones can all increase depending on how flexible your muscles and joints are.

 

 

How to Train Flexibility Levels for Beginners

The various sports movements below can train the flexibility of the joints and muscles of the body easily, but are quite effective. Do these movements once or twice a day or every time you start exercising.

1. Side lying quadriceps stretch

Side lying quadriceps stretch has a function to train the flexibility of the thighs and calves. This type of sport does not require the help of any tools so it is very suitable for beginners.

Follow these steps to train flexibility of the body.

1. Position yourself lying on the right side of the body, then bend your right arm and use it as a pillow under your head, and also make sure your legs are stretched out straight.
2. Bend your left knee and pull your left ankle or heel towards your buttocks with your left hand.
3. Make sure your waist and shoulders are parallel to the floor, while your head is parallel to your spine.
4. Squeeze your stomach muscles, exhale, and hold the position for about 30 to 45 seconds, then straighten your legs while contracting your quadriceps muscles.
5. Repeat for 3 to 6 reps and try to switch to the other side of the leg.

2. Glute bridge single leg progression

In addition to training the level of flexibility, glute bridge single leg progression is also a sport to strengthen the muscles of the back, waist, buttocks, thighs, and calves.

Just like the previous exercise, you also don’t need the help of additional equipment to do the following movements. This movement is also quite easy to do, so you can try it as a start in exercising.

This is how to do the single leg progression glute bridge movement to train body flexibility.

1. Lying on a mat or other flat surface, bend one calf and make sure your palm is touching the floor.
2. Open the other side of the thigh and calf to hip-width apart, then lift the other side of the leg, bend it, and place both hands behind the raised thigh.
3. Tighten your abdominal muscles, make sure your posture is straight and touches the floor, then take a deep breath.
4. Exhale while contracting your abdominal muscles, then lift your belly while pushing it away from your buttocks. Make sure your lower back and buttocks don’t touch the floor.
5. Inhale slowly, then lower your buttocks and lower back to the starting position.
6. Repeat several times, then replace with the other leg.

3. Seated butterfly stretch

Just like the side lying quadriceps stretch , this example of a flexibility exercise will train the calf muscles as well as the thighs. This movement is quite easy so it is suitable for beginners.

The following are the seated butterfly stretch steps that you need to follow.

1. Sit in a cross-legged position, making sure your back, neck and head are straight.
2. Place your hands on your feet.
3. Tighten your abdominal muscles to stabilize your spine, exhale slowly, then bend your hips and back forward.
4. Lower your elbows so they rest on the inside of your thighs, then push your thighs down.
5. Make sure your back is straight, then push your back and hips as low as possible, then hold for about 20-35 seconds and then try to relax and return to the initial position.
6. Repeat this movement for about 20-35 seconds.

4. Swan pose

This is an example of joint flexibility in the thigh muscles and also the waist muscles. You can find this movement in pilates sports.

Follow some of the following movements to do the swan pose exercise.

1. Start by lying on your stomach.
2. Place your palms on the floor, bend your elbows, and keep your arms close to your body so your hands stay under your shoulders. Make sure the position of the shoulders away from the ears.
3. Keep your feet together as close as possible or if you can’t, try to open them shoulder-width apart.
4. Push your palms toward the floor, tighten your abdominal muscles, then lift your stomach off the floor.
5. Inhale while stretching your back as far as possible, keeping your elbows close to your body and your head in line with your spine.
6. Hold the inj position for about 10-15 seconds, exhale, then slowly lower your stomach and chest to the floor.
7. Repeat this movement several times.

5. Trunk rotation

This movement aims to train the flexibility of the hips and lower back. This helps you to roll your back more easily.

In this exercise, you’ll need a special weight ball, so please have one handy beforehand. The following is an example of a trunk rotation flexibility exercise.

1. Sit on the mat with your knees bent, feet together, and position your heels touching the floor.
2. You can hold a special weight ball in your lap close to your body.
3. Make sure you are in an upright position, then tighten your abdominal muscles while rotating your body slowly, and your hands while holding the weight ball to one side. Make sure the ball stays parallel to your body.
4. Pause, inhale, then exhale slowly. Rotate the body with the hand carrying the weight ball in the opposite direction.
5. Repeat the movement back and forth and then repeat the entire sequence a few times.

6. Knee to chest

This exercise trains the flexibility of the lower back muscles and also the hips. Follow these knee to chest steps.

1. Position your body on your back while bending your knees.
2. Grab the top of the knee.
3. Pull your knees toward your armpits and hold for about five seconds.
4. Repeat this movement up to 3-10 times.

 

7. Lunges

In doing lunges, there are two types of movements that you can try to train flexibility more optimally, namely front lunges and side lunges. Quoting an explanation from the website of the National Strength and Conditioning Association, an example of this exercise is believed to increase the flexibility of the hip muscles. This flexibility movement is also useful for training the lower body muscles and keeping the body balanced and stable.

Here are the steps for doing front lunges .

1. Stand up and bend your left leg 90 degrees, position your right foot in front of your left foot and make sure your foot touches the floor properly.
2. Bend your left leg as low as possible while keeping your back straight. Stretch the muscles in the left groin. Then hold that position for about seven seconds.
3. Repeat for about 3 to 6 times and try on the opposite leg position.

Meanwhile, follow side lunges .

1. Position yourself standing straight and widen your legs.
2. Bend your left knee while your body leans to the left.
3. Make sure your back and right leg stay straight.
4. Hold this position for about 10 seconds, then repeat 3 to 6 times, and repeat with the opposite leg.

8. Cross-Over r

This example of a cross-over flexibility exercise can be described as very simple. This cross-over exercise will train the joints and muscles in the neck and back. Try these flexibility exercises.

1. Position your body to stand by crossing your legs, make sure your feet are in a tight position and straight.
2. Bend over and try to touch your toes as much as possible.
3. Make sure the position of the back and neck remains straight or not curved.
4. Hold this movement for about five to 10 seconds, repeat 3 to 6 times, then switch legs in the opposite direction.

9. Seat stretch

This exercise is very useful for training the flexibility of the neck, knees, thighs, calves, and also the back. This example of a seat stretch exercise is quite simple. Follow the steps according to the following instructions.

1. Position your body to sit by straightening your thighs and calves. Make sure the toes are pointing up as far as possible.
2. Touch your fingertips using your hand as much as possible. Feel the stretch slowly from the tip of the neck to the back.
3. After that, push your chin towards your knees.
4. Hold for approximately five seconds, repeat 3 to 6 times.

10. Standing quad stretch

In addition to training the flexibility of the thigh muscles, this movement is also an exercise to maintain body balance. Here are the steps for doing the standing quad stretch.

1. Position yourself by standing on one leg. Then, pull the raised leg toward your buttocks.
2. Make sure you lift your legs as high as possible while folding them as tightly as possible.
3. Hold for about five seconds, repeat about 3 to 6 times, then switch to the other side of the leg.

A Sport That Can Be Lived

If you are interested in learning flexibility more deeply, there are several sports that make all the muscles of your body work effectively and train all members of the body to increase flexibility to the maximum, including:

1. Yoga

This sport with smooth but quite complicated movements is indeed very useful for increasing the level of flexibility of the body. The body’s habituation to yoga movements is also usually not difficult because you will be introduced to basic or general movements that are easy first. Only after that switch the level to the middle and continue to the high level.

Yoga is not only good for training muscles, training flexibility, and also making the body fitter. However, it also teaches you to practice breathing and relaxation to release stress.

2. Pilates

Often yoga and Pilates are thought of as the same sport, but in fact the two things are different sports. Even though yoga and pilates both train body flexibility, pilates movements are relatively shorter or only last about 3 seconds at most. In pilates movements, you will be in a lying, sitting, and also kneeling position more than in yoga movements, which are mostly done in a standing position.

3. Ballet

Of course, not everyone can master it, and ballet is usually practiced from an early age. However, if you are used to doing ballet movements, your body will become flexible by itself. It does require a struggle if you have just started practicing ballet when you reach adulthood, but it is possible that you will be able to do it.

Apart from making it easier for you to adapt to your daily activities and prevent injury, the examples of body flexibility exercises that have been described earlier can help increase blood circulation to all the muscles in the body.

Having good blood circulation can help protect you from various types of diseases, such as lowering blood pressure to prevent various serious diseases such as stroke. Make sure you always do these movements to practice flexibility in each of your regular exercise schedules.

Enough of the summary regarding the understanding of flexibility, benefits, and how to improve it. Thank you for visiting, I hope this article is useful and can help you.

As a business actor, it’s normal to struggle with numbers and also calculations and various kinds of business terms, right? For example, when ordinary people only know the term wealth to refer to assets that a person owns, business actors will actually be more familiar with the term fixed assets.

In that sense, fixed assets and wealth do have a lot in common. However, when talking about fixed assets, there will be a series of specific things that make the meaning more than just wealth.

Assets or what is usually referred to as assets are assets that are a company’s economic resource that are used for the company’s operational activities.

According to the Financial Accounting Standards, in the framework of the preparation and presentation of financial statements (2002, page 13, paragraph 49), assets have the meaning of resources controlled by the company as a result of past events and from which future economic benefits are hope the company will get it. In general, these assets are divided into two, namely current assets and fixed assets.

Definition of Fixed Assets

Assets or assets are property that is one of the company’s economic resources used for the company’s operational activities. According to the Financial Accounting Standards, within the basic framework for the preparation and presentation of financial statements. To be able to produce a product, the role of this asset is very large. For example, land as a place for production, buildings used for factories or offices, machines and equipment as tools for production and so on.

To understand this fixed asset, there are several opinions expressed by experts, including:

According to the statement submitted by Financial Accounting Standards (PSAK) Number 16 paragraph 5 states that “Fixed assets are tangible assets that are acquired in ready-to-use form or built first, which are then used in company operations, not intended to be sold in the course of the company’s normal activities. and has a useful life of more than one year.

From the explanation above, we can conclude that fixed assets are:

– Is a tangible asset
– Has a useful life of more than one year
– Is used in the company’s operations
– Not intended to be resold

 

Fixed Assets Grouping

These assets are divided into several groups because they have different characteristics from other assets. The criteria itself consists of various types of goods. Therefore, further grouping of these assets is carried out.

This grouping depends on the accounting policies of each company. Because basically the more fixed assets owned by a company, the more groups there will be. Fixed assets owned by a company consist of various forms. Depending on the nature and also the field of business occupied by the company.

The value tends to be large and the types and forms that vary from this type of asset will cause companies to be more careful in classifying them. Of the various assets, for accounting purposes will be grouped as follows:

a. Which is usually unlimited, such as land for the construction of companies, livestock, and agriculture.
b. Which are usually limited and when their useful life has expired can be replaced with similar assets, for example, machines, buildings, tools, furniture, and others.
c. Which are usually limited and when they have expired they cannot be replaced with similar assets, for example, natural resources such as mining products and so on.

Based on the Angle of the Substance

According to Sofyan Safri H, fixed assets can be grouped in various angles, including:

a. Tangible Assets or tangible assets such as machinery, land, equipment and buildings.
b. Intangible Assets or intangible assets such as patents, copyrights, franchises, goodwill, copyrights, and so on.

Based on Angle Shrinkage or Not

The following is a grouping of fixed assets based on whether they are depreciated or not, including:

a. Depreciated Plant Assets: depreciated assets such as buildings, equipment, machinery, inventory, roads, and so on.
b. Undepreciated Plant Assets: assets that cannot be depreciated such as land.

 

Types of Fixed Assets and Examples

The types of assets can be divided into two groups, namely tangible or tangible and intangible or intangible. The following is a full explanation.

1. Tangible Fixed Assets

This type of assets includes assets that can have a tangible form so that they can be seen. For example, land, buildings, machinery, factories, and equipment. The period of use of tangible fixed assets is more than one accounting period. Tangible fixed assets can be divided into two groups, namely those that can experience depreciation or depreciation and those that cannot experience depreciation. Here is the explanation:

a. Land

Land has a form and will not experience depreciation. The acquisition price of this land includes the purchase price, certificate processing fees, commission fees, and land leveling costs.

b. Building

Buildings or buildings are included in the group of tangible fixed assets and can be depreciated. There are two ways to acquire buildings, namely through construction or purchase. The cost of acquiring a building by way of construction is the cost of the services of architects and contractors, material costs, construction worker costs, and building permit fees. Then the cost of acquiring the building purchased includes the purchase price of the building, intermediary commissions, certificate processing fees, tax costs, and also renovation costs.

c. Machine

As we know that the machine is real and can experience depreciation. The acquisition price of this machine includes the purchase price, shipping costs, installation costs, value added tax, as well as insurance costs.

2. Intangible Fixed Assets

Intangible assets are company assets that do not have a tangible form with a useful life of more than one year. The right or advantageous position for the company in earning income can be seen from this wealth. For example:

a. Patent

Patents are exclusive rights originating from the state to inventors for inventions in the field of technology to be used later in the production or sale of a product for a certain period. Where this patent provides legal protection to the owner of the right from the possibility of product imitation or counterfeiting by other parties. Patents can be obtained by purchasing or self-developed.

b. Goodwill

Goodwill is the difference in value of the accounting costs or the acquisition of a company with a fair market price or the book value of the company. Where this goodwill becomes an integral part of the corporate entity. So it cannot be sold separately. The factors that form goodwill include good reputation, well-known brand identity, strategic business location, employee competence, and also the technology used.

c. Licence

License is official permission obtained to do, use, produce, and also own something. Where this license can be in the form of permission to use trademarks, intellectual property rights, and also permits to sell products abroad. Licenses can be obtained by purchasing or submitting an official application to the government with or without a fee.

d. Copyright

Copyright is a right for intellectual work in the fields of science, art, and literature that is unique and is given based on ideas, methods, procedures, or concepts that have been realized. For example, copyrights on computer programs, maps, books, and photography.

 

Characteristics of Fixed Assets

As one of the assets or wealth owned by a company, fixed assets certainly have characteristics that distinguish them from other types of assets. According to Agus Ismaya Hasanudin in Accounting Theory, the characteristics of fixed assets are as follows:

a. Fixed assets are acquired for later use in operations and not for resale.
b. Fixed assets have a long-term nature and generally experience depreciation.
c. Fixed assets have physical substance.

Acquisition of Fixed Assets and the Method of Recording

Below are some explanations about how to get fixed assets or fixed assets:

1. Cash Purchase

Fixed assets obtained from cash purchases are recorded in the books with an amount equal to the money issued. The amount of money spent to acquire the asset includes the price listed on the invoice as well as all costs incurred to get the fixed asset ready for use. If there is a cash discount in the purchase of an asset, then the discount is a reduction to the invoice price, regardless of whether the discount is obtained or not.

If in a purchase obtained more than one type of fixed assets, then the acquisition price must be allocated to each product. For example, when buying a building and land, the acquisition price is allocated for the building and land. The allocation basis used is as much as possible based on the market price of each asset, namely in the case of purchasing land or buildings, the market price of the land and the market price of the building must be sought. Where each market price is compared and becomes the basis for the allocation of the acquisition price.

2. Installment Purchase

If fixed assets are obtained from installment purchases, then the acquisition price may not include interest. Interest made during installments, whether expressly stated or not stated separately, must be removed from the acquisition price and then charged as interest expense. The method of recording is that every year payments are made in a journal that reduces the debt to the amount of the loan principal repaid and debits the interest fee for the year concerned and cash credits in the amount of installments.

3. Exchanged with Securities

Fixed assets obtained by exchanging bonds or company shares are recorded in the general ledger at the market price of the shares or bonds used as exchange. If the market price of a stock or bond is not known, the acquisition price is determined by the market price of the asset.

If the market price of the securities and fixed assets being exchanged is not known, then under these conditions the exchange value will be determined by the decision of the company’s leadership. This exchange value is one of the bases for recording the acquisition price of fixed assets and also the valuable values ​​issued.

The exchange of fixed assets with bonds or company shares will be recorded in the Share Capital or Bonds Payable account in the amount of the nominal value. The difference between the exchange value and the nominal value is recorded in the Disagio or Agio account.

Fixed assets, for example machine xxxx
Capital xxxx
Agio Shares xxxx

If in this exchange the company adds a down payment. Then the acquisition price of the machine is the sum of the money paid plus the market price of the securities used as exchange.

4. Exchanged with Other Fixed Assets

Many purchases of fixed assets are made by way of exchange or trade-in. Where old assets are used to pay for new assets, either in whole or in part where the shortfall is paid in cash. Under these conditions, the principle of acquisition cost must still be used, that is, new assets are capitalized at an amount equal to the price of the old assets, then cash paid or capitalized equals to the market price of the new assets to be received.

5. Obtained from Gifts or Donations

Fixed assets obtained from gifts or donations can be recorded deviating from the cost principle. To be able to receive these gifts costs are often incurred, but these costs are much smaller than the value of the fixed assets received.

If fixed assets are recorded at the cost already incurred, this will cause the amount of assets and capital to be too small and the depreciation expense to be smaller. To overcome this, assets received as gifts are recorded at market value. Depreciation or depreciation of fixed assets received from the gift will be calculated in the same way as the others.

6. Self Created Assets

Through certain considerations, companies often make their own assets or fixed assets needed, such as buildings, tools, and also furniture. The creation of these assets is generally intended to fill capacities or employees who are still idle. All costs charged for manufacturing assets such as materials, direct wages, and direct factory overhead will not cause problems in determining the cost of fixed assets made.

However, indirect factory overhead costs will raise questions about how much should be allocated for the assets being made. There are two ways to charge factory overhead costs, including:

a. Increase in factory overhead costs charged to assets created.
b. Factory overhead costs will be allocated at rates for manufacturing assets as well as production.

This is an explanation of the meaning of fixed assets and their various types and classifications. Hopefully the information described above can be well understood and provides benefits for the business being managed.

Financial Management – ​​Is Sinaumed’s someone who keeps an eye on personal monthly expenses, be it through the widely available apps or manual tables?

If so, then Sinaumed’s includes managing personal finances. Management or financial management is not only limited to calculating ordinary expenses, but also helps us plan good spending and savings in the future.

In a company or organization, finance is also considered as the most important aspect. In order to generate successful business and growth, a company needs to prioritize good financial management. Because, there are a myriad of benefits and functions related to business survival.

Definition of Financial Management

In business, financial management is essentially the practice of making a business plan and then ensuring its implementation for each department. With good financial management, it is possible for companies to obtain data to create visions, make investment decisions and have insights to fund investments, control liquidity, profitability, cash, and so on.

Financial management in the system combines several financial functions, including accounting, fixed asset management, revenue and payment processing.

If these components are successfully integrated, companies can achieve financial visibility in facilitating day-to-day activities.

Tactical VS Strategic Financial Management

Tactical-level financial management includes procedures that govern how we process daily transactions, close monthly finances, compare actual expenses to budgeted money, and meet auditor and tax requirements.

Meanwhile, strategic financial management includes financial planning and analysis activities, investment planning by financial leaders using data, finding opportunities, to building a formidable company.

The Importance of Financial Management

Why is financial management important? Previously, we need to understand the three pillars of sound fiscal governance.

1. Develop a strategy, or identify the things that are needed by the company financially to achieve its goals, both short and long term. For example, a company leader needs insight regarding current performance for future planning.
2. Make decisions, or assist business leaders in deciding the best way to implement plans through the provision of up-to-date financial reports and relevant data.
3. Controlling or ensuring the contribution of each existing department to the company’s vision and operations according to the budget and in line with the strategy.

Well, these three pillars can be achieved through effective financial management. This is because every employee knows the direction of the company and can see progress.

Want to know more about financial management through books? Take a peek at the book recommendations from sinaumedia below!

Financial Management Objectives

Based on the pillars above, companies need to be assisted with good financial management. Here are some of the objectives of financial management:

• Maximize profits by providing insight. For example, insight into the increase in raw material costs that can trigger an increase in cost of goods sold.
• Track liquidity and cash flow to ensure that the company has enough cash to meet obligations.
• Ensuring the company complies with state and industry regulations.
• Develop financial scenarios based on current business conditions and predictions regarding various outcomes based on possible future market conditions.
• Effective interaction with investors and directors.

This objective can certainly be achieved by applying effective management principles to the company’s financial structure.

Scope of Financial Management

Sinaumed’s, financial management also has its own scope regarding its fields. Let’s look at the four main areas!

1. Planning

This area tasks financial managers with projecting the amount of money a company will need to maintain positive cash flow, allocating funds for growth, adding new products or services, dealing with contingencies, and sharing that information with business partners.

Planning can be broken down into several categories, including capital, labor, indirect, and operational costs.

2. Budgeting

In the area of ​​budgeting, financial managers allocate available company funds to meet expenses, such as mortgages or rent, wages, materials, employees, and other obligations. Ideally, there will be some remaining funds set aside for emergencies and to fund new business opportunities.

Companies generally have separate master budgets and sub documents. This includes, for example, cash flow and operations; Budgets may be static or flexible.

3. Manage and Assess Risk

This field sees financial managers as assessors and compensators for various risks, including:

• Market risk: Affects business investment, reporting and stock performance. It may also reflect specific financial risks to the industry, such as a pandemic affecting restaurants or a direct-to-consumer retail shift.
• Credit risk: For example, the effect of customers not paying their bills on time and thus the business not having the funds to meet obligations. This can affect creditworthiness and ratings, which determine the ability to borrow at a rate that is profitable for the company.
• Liquidity risk: The finance team must track current cash flow, forecast future cash needs, and be prepared to free up working capital as needed.
• Operational risk: This is a general and new category for some finance teams. For example, this could include cyberattack risk and consideration of buying cybersecurity insurance, disaster recovery and business continuity plans, and crisis management practices that are triggered if a senior executive is accused of fraud or misconduct.

4. Procedure

Finance managers, in this field, establish procedures for how the finance team processes and distributes financial data: invoices, payments and reports safely and accurately. These written procedures also outline the people who are responsible for making financial decisions in the company.

Financial Management Function

Financial management has a very important function for procuring funds, allocating financial resources, and utilizing funds. Here are the details of the function, Sinaumed’s!

1. Controlling and Making Decisions

The financial manager bears primary responsibility for making decisions and controlling finances. Through various techniques, they prepare for potential threats.

2. Financial planning

Decision making also includes planning activities and financial resources. Managers can use available information to gauge business priorities and needs. They also analyze the overall economic situation to plan budgets and make decisions accordingly.

3. Allocating Resources

Managers need to ensure that all financial resources are used in an appropriate way. They also need to oversee business investments in an effective and efficient manner. Proper allocation of financial resources leads to long-term profitability.

4. Manage Cash Flow

Managers have a responsibility to ensure cash management. In other words, they need to ensure that the organization is able to meet operational costs and emergencies. This is done by checking whether the business has sufficient working capital and cash flow.

5. Acquisition and Merger

A company can take critical strategic turns to maintain relevance in a competitive marketplace. Businesses can expand by acquiring new businesses or through mergers, when they enter into a new business. Such decisions relate to complex securities valuations, and the financial manager is the one who oversees the process.

6. Capital Budgeting

Capital budgeting refers to decisions that involve investing in stocks or bonds, such as building new factories and buying new equipment. Financial managers need to identify opportunities and challenges before a company decides to invest a large amount of capital.

In short, financial management functions to help businesses maximize their wealth. Even so, this is a continuous process that is interrelated. Financial management must also be fast and efficient.

Financial Management Principles

Here are 7 principles of financial management that Sinaumed’s needs to know before implementing them:

1. Consistency

System and financial policies within the company must be consistent at all times. Even so, this does not mean that the financial system cannot be adjusted when there are changes in the company’s internal affairs. An inconsistent approach to financial management is a sign that manipulation is taking place.

2. Accountability

Accountability is a moral or legal obligation. Do not tend to certain individuals, groups or organizations over property rights granted to third parties as they have been used. There are operational, moral and legal obligations for companies to explain all decisions and actions that have been taken.

In other words, companies must be able to explain how they use resources. This is because stakeholders have the right to know how their funds or rights are used.

3. Transparency

As we know, companies have obligations related to transparency. Companies must be open in providing information related to their activities. This also includes providing financial reports that are accurate, easily accessible to stakeholders , and show profits. If the company is not transparent, it means that something is being hidden, including regarding its finances.

4. Survival

A financial manager must be able to plan the finances assigned to him so that the company can continue to run, aka live. Even good financial management will have the right financial strategy for the company, Sinaumed’s.

5. Accounting Standards

Every company must have the same accounting system. This system must also be enforced. That is, all accountants internationally can understand and understand this same accounting system.

6. Management

This is a very general principle for many things. In accounting management, financial management must also be carried out by the company properly and effectively.

7. Integrity

The integrity of records and reports related to the company’s finances must also be properly maintained. In other words, these records must be understandable, complete, and accurate.

Want to learn Islamic financial management? Take a peek at this book recommendation from sinaumedia!

Financial Management for Startups

In the beginning, the responsibility of financial management in a startup was to create and stick to a budget that aligns with the business plan, evaluates what to do with the profits achieved, and ensures that bills are paid.

When a company grows and adds employees or finance and accounting staff, financial management becomes more complicated. We need to ensure our employees are paid with accurate deductions, file taxes and financial statements correctly, and watch for errors and fraud that may occur.

By drawing up a plan, startup entrepreneurs can answer the big questions: Will the goods and services they create be profitable? Can we launch a new product or make it happen? What might the next few years bring to the business?

Well, solid financial management provides systems and processes to answer these questions.

Financial Management Tips

Sinaumed’s, here are tips for those of you who want to start managing your finances personally, let’s take a good look!

1. Track spending to improve finances

If Sinaumed’s does not know what and where he spends his money each month, there is a good chance that Sinaumed’s’ personal spending habits need to be corrected. Better money management starts with spending awareness.

For a simple start, use a money management app to track expenses across categories, and see for yourself how much money we spend on non-essentials.

Once we familiarize ourselves with these habits, we can make plans to improve them.

2. Create a realistic monthly budget

Use your monthly spending habits and monthly salary that you’ve done to set a budget that you can stick to. There’s no point in setting a strict budget based on drastic changes like never eating out. Make a budget that fits your lifestyle and spending habits, Sinaumed’s.

We should look at budgets as a way to encourage better habits, like cooking at home more often. Even so, give yourself a realistic chance to meet this budget. That’s the only way this money management method will work.

3. Increase savings even if it takes time

Create an emergency fund that can be used when unforeseen circumstances occur. Even if the contribution of these tips is small, these funds can save us from risky situations when we are forced to borrow money at high interest rates or may not be able to pay our bills on time.

In addition, Gramds must also make a general savings contribution to strengthen financial security in the event of job loss. Use automatic contributions to strengthen the habit of saving money.

4. Pay bills on time every month

Paying your bills on time is an easy way to manage your money wisely and comes with great benefits: It helps you avoid late fees and prioritize important expenses. A strong history of on-time payments can also boost your credit score and increase your interest rates.

5. Reduce recurring costs

Does Sinaumed’s subscribe to services that are never used? It’s easy to forget about the monthly subscriptions or streaming services and mobile apps that weigh on our bank accounts even if these services are never used regularly.

Try reviewing spending on bills like these, and consider canceling unnecessary subscriptions to save more money each month.

6. Save cash for big purchases

Certain types of loans and debt can be helpful when making big purchases, such as a house or even a car that we currently need. Even so, for other large purchases, cash offers the safest and cheapest buying option.

When buying in cash, Sinaumed’s avoids interest and creating debt that can take months, often years, to pay back. Meanwhile, the money saved can be deposited in a bank account.

7. Start an investment strategy.

Even if our ability to invest is limited, a small contribution to an investment account can help in using the money previously earned to generate more income.

The path to better finances starts with changing our own habits. Some of these changes will be easier than others, but if Sinaumed’s stays committed, you will gain powerful money management skills that will help you throughout life. Meanwhile, we will have more money in life!

Financial Management Conclusion

Financial management is very important in personal and corporate life. Of course, we need to study financial management in general beforehand to be able to implement it in company activities.

Sinaumed’s, we can learn about financial management more enjoyably through books, you know ! With sinaumedia , you can get quality books and understand more.

Come on, get books related to financial management with your #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia, so you have information #MoreWithReading.

Plants are part of living things and can affect an environment. The plant itself consists of several parts, such as stems, leaves, roots, and so on. The root is the part of the plant whose job is to maintain or support the plant so that it remains standing.

Talking about roots, it cannot be separated from the so-called fibrous roots. On this occasion, we will discuss more about fibrous roots. So, keep reading this article to the end, Sinaumed’s.

Definition of Fibrous Roots

Then what exactly is meant by fibrous roots? Fibrous roots can be said to be side roots which can come out from the base of the stem. In addition, these roots usually look like hair.

In addition, the roots of each plant are different. The different types of roots are influenced by many things, one of which depends on the type of plant itself.

This root cannot develop to function as a substitute for the taproot. The Latin name for the fibrous root is radix adventitia. Usually, this root is present in monocot plants or plants that have seeds with two pieces. For example bananas, bamboo, and many more.

Characteristics of Fibrous Roots

After discussing what is meant by fibrous roots, we identify with the characteristics of fibrous roots, namely:

1. In general, plants with fibrous roots experience a condition where embryonic roots undergo a process of root regeneration faster than other types of roots.
2. Fibrous roots generally have a thread-like shape with the smallest size, known as thread fibers.
3. The shape resembles a fiber, so it is branched and this is in accordance with its name.
4. Fibrous roots are smaller than taproots
5. Not too deep into the ground.
6. The growth is at the base of the stem.
7. The size of the types of fibrous roots are almost all the same.
8. The root system is not strong enough so that the plant collapses easily when blown by the wind.

Types of Fibrous Roots

Based on the shape of the fibrous roots, there are 3 types of fibrous roots. Here are the three types of fibrous roots.

1. Root thread

Thread roots are very small thread-like roots. This is in accordance with its name, for example, plants with roots of this type are the majority of grasses and rice alias Oryza sativa.

2. Mine root

Mine root is a root that resembles a rope, hard, stiff and quite large. An example of a mine root plant is coconut aka Cocos nucifera.

3. Large fibrous roots

Large fibrous roots are roots that are almost the size of an arm and generally do not form branches. An example of a plant is pandanus alias Pandanus tectorius.

Advantages of the Fibrous Root System

This fibrous root system turns out to have several advantages. Here are some advantages of using a fibrous root system, namely:

1. The fibrous root model can help plants get lots of water and minerals from the soil.
2. The fibrous root system is concentrated only a few centimeters (cm) at the soil surface. This actually helps the roots in preventing erosion because the root system will hold the top layer of soil in place.
3. This fibrous root system is able to grow up to 100 miles. Therefore, these fibrous roots can find more water sources.

Examples of Fibrous Root Plants

For example, there are several types of fibrous roots based on the type of root. The following are examples of fibrous roots that you need to know:

• Corn

Corn is a plant with fibrous roots, this is because corn is a monocot plant. Interestingly, corn does not only have one type of corn root, but there are three different types of roots, namely seminary roots, roots, adventitious roots and supporting roots.

• Orchid

The next example of a plant is an orchid that has fibrous roots. Orchids are beautiful and expensive plants that also need fibrous roots to develop and grow. The fibrous roots of orchids are called succulents. The succulent form itself is a fibrous root that has a fleshy organ.

Understanding about plant tissue culture can be said to be quite fun. However, sometimes, some people don’t know about readings or books about plant tissue. To find out about plant tissue, you can find out in the Textbook of Plant Tissue Culture .

• Potato

The potato plant (Solanum tuberosum L.) is an annual and bulbous herbaceous vegetable plant. How to reproduce potato plants through tubers. This plant can thrive in highland areas with a cold climate. The area has a height of about 1000 to 2000 meters above sea level.

The cold air temperature is between 14-22 degrees Celsius. Rainfall required during the plant growth period is between 1000-1500 mm per year. Good soil conditions are loose soil that contains lots of nutrients. Will not develop and form tubers on hard and compact soil.

If potato plants are planted in the lowlands, with hotter air temperatures, potatoes will not grow tubers either. In potato cultivation, there are several techniques.

This type of plant has roots that are not only one type of root but there are two types of roots, namely fibrous roots and taproots. This causes the potato is a unique plant.

• Coconut tree

Coconut or scientific language Cocos nucifera is the sole member of the Cocos genus of the aren-arenan tribe or Arecaceae. The definition of the word coconut (or coconut, in English) can refer to the whole coconut tree, seed or fruit, which is botanically a fruit tree, not a nut tree.

The term coconut is derived from the 16th century Portuguese and Spanish word coco meaning “head” or “skull” after the three indentations on the coconut shell that resemble facial features. Almost all parts of this plant can be utilized by humans, so it is considered a multipurpose plant, especially for coastal communities.

In addition, coconut is also the name for the fruit produced in this plant. This plant has fibrous roots to absorb nutrients and to strengthen the plant so that it is strong. This plant has fibrous roots with a hard texture and forms a hump. This plant is fibrous for all types including trees and fruit.

• Pawpaw

The next example of a plant that has fibrous roots is papaya. This plant is also unique because it has no stems and is woody. These plants reproduce depending on the fibrous roots. What humans can use from the papaya tree is its sweet fruit, papaya leaves and flowers for vegetables.

Well, the content of papaya is good for the body, so many people eat papaya. However, not a few also want to plant papaya fruit, but don’t know how. Don’t worry, through the book I Can Grow Papayas, this is perfect to serve as a guide for those of you who want to grow papayas.

 

• Sugarcane / Saccharum Officinale

This part of the plant consists of roots, stems, leaves, flowers and fruit and seeds which are interconnected. Sugar cane has the following characteristics:

1. The root is a fibrous root that reaches 1 meter in length.
2. The stem of this sugar cane is straight, there is a grayish white waxy layer.
3. The leaves are incomplete and the veins are parallel, consisting only of the leaf blade and midrib.
4. This sugarcane does not bear fruit, it’s just that the stem is taken for consumption because it tastes sweet.

Apparently, this sugar cane can be used as a business that is quite promising. For those of you who want to plant sugar cane and turn sugar cane into an agribusiness, then you can read the book Profit Exorbitant from Sugar Cane Agribusiness .

https://sinaumedia.com/products/untung-selangit-dari-agribusiness-tebu-1

• Rice / Oryza Sativa

Rice is the staple food of Indonesian people. Therefore, rice is highly developed in Indonesia. This plant is a seasonal plant once a year to be planted. Each part of the rice plant has its own function.

Rice is included in the grain family or Poaceae (Graminae). Rice is a unique plant because it does not only have fibrous roots but has many types of roots. In rice, the root of the plant has four parts, namely as follows:

• Banana / Musa paradisiaca

Banana is a plant in the form of fruit where the fruit is often consumed because it is good for health. This banana plant usually grows in the tropics and has no wood.

When compared with other plants, banana plants have a structure that is quite unique and distinctive. This is what actually makes it easier for humans to identify plants that are categorized as banana plants.

If based on the morphological form, the banana plant can be divided into several parts, namely roots, stems, leaves, fruit, and flowers. The banana tree is a monocot plant, which has a fibrous root system or it can also be referred to as a rhizome root and does not have a taproot.

The root is centered on the hump and also the growth is not too deep. This is because the shallow growth makes bananas easy to collapse if growing on wet soil. The depth of the soil can be penetrated by banana roots which have a length of between 75 – 150 cm.

This banana root is usually located on a flat ground surface and can grow up to 4-5 meters.

• Salak / Salacca Edulis

Salak is a monocotyledon plant (single seed). Salak plants can also be called snake fruit and have a clumping nature. At the bottom of the soil, shoots will grow and the salak leaves themselves are long.

All parts of the leaf have sharp spines. The bark of the salak plant is not very long, but can grow up to 3 m or more. The crown of the leaves is large so that the stem cannot hold it because it is too heavy. The roots of the salak tree are only one type, namely fibrous roots.

In salak plants, the flowers consist of three types, namely mixed flowers, male flowers, and female flowers. Especially for mixed flowers, this is also known as a perfect flower because it can combine male and female flowers.

Male flowers are wrapped in a sheath (spandex) with long stalks. In salak plantations, male flowers are often sold in the market as a source of males. Meanwhile, the female flowers are covered with a short stalk. This seludang usually comes from when the salak tree.

Planting salak fruit is arguably not a loss, because many people like salak fruit. So, if you want to be successful in owning a salak garden, then you can read the Guide to Success in Local and Imported Salak Gardening. 

 

• Pinang / Areca Catechu

Areca nut is a solitary plant that grows individually. The stem is straight and reaches a height of 20-30 meters, with a diameter of 25-30 cm. The stem has leaf marks or clear nodes with a distance of about 15-20 cm per segment, but the size depends on the variety. When viewed from the type of root, areca nut is a monocot plant.

• Grass / Poa Annua

The stalks of sedge grass can grow upright, and have a triangular shape, small hollow and slightly soft. The height of the grass is around 10-30 cm and the cross section is 1-2 mm. The grass forms tubers at the base of the stem and forms long rhizomes which can form new shoots.

The roots of sedge grass can be said to have a fiber system. This is because many of the sedge roots are branched like having fine hairs.

Meanwhile, sedge grass leaves have a line leaf texture, smooth, hairless. It has a dark green upper surface and a light green lower surface. In addition, it has a longitudinal ditch in the middle, the tip is slightly pointed, shorter than the stem that carries flowers, the width ranges from 2-6 mm.

Parts Of Plants

Parts of a plant are not only roots, but also stems, leaves, flowers and fruit. The parts of plants that are used by humans vary, some use the roots, some stems, some leaves, some flowers, some fruit, but some can even be used by all components of the plant.

So what are the parts of the plant? Here are some parts of the plant you need to know.

1. Roots

Roots are one of the important organs in plants that have various functions and structures, for example to absorb water, look for nutrients, store food and distribute food to all parts of the plant. The plant root itself consists of several different tissues. Usually, roots develop below the surface of the soil. Even so, there are also some plants whose roots can grow in the air.

2. Stem

The stem can be regarded as one of the most important parts of the plant. This is because the stem has a function to support other plant parts.

3. Leaves

Leaves are organs of plants that have quite important organs because they function for the process of photosynthesis.

4. Flowers

The flower is the part of the plant that has a function as a means of reproduction.

5. Fruit

The fruit is the part of the plant that functions to disperse plant seeds.

Thus the discussion of fibrous roots, starting from the definition to examples of fibrous root plants. Hopefully all the discussion above is useful for you, Sinaumed’s. If you want to find books about roots or plants, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com .

To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Yufi Cantika Sukma Divine

Reference:

• https://www.orami.co.id/magazine/akar-serabut
• https://pertanian-mesuji.id/klasifikasi-dan-morfologi-tanaman-padi-oryza-sativa/
• https://rimbakita.com/pisang/
• https://www.pecintambuh.com/2022/04/pisang%20merah.html/
• https://www.detik.com/edu/detikpedia/d-5824387/fungsi-akar-dan-strukturnya-pada-plants
• https://kumparan.com/berita-update/mengenal-akar-serabut- Kunci-kehidupan-dinding-monokotil-1w8MZSHalDE
• https://www.teknikbudidaya.com/cara-menanam-kentang/
• https://brainly.co.id/ assignment/33915185
• https://www.bing.com/ck/a?!&&p=3b35c2fc5ff68855JmltdHM9MTY3MTA2MjQwMCZpZ3VpZD0wYWI0ZWUxMS0yMjMyLTY0NmYtMzBhYi1mYzZkMjMwMjY1OTImaW5zaWQ9NTA5NA&ptn=3&hsh=3&fclid=0ab4ee11-2232-646f-30ab-fc6d23026592&u=a1aHR0cHM6Ly93d3cuZGV0aWsuY29tL2VkdS9kZXRpa3BlZGlhL2QtNTgyNDM4Ny9mdW5nc2ktYWthci1kYW4tc3RydWt0dXJueWEtcGFkYS10dW1idWhhbg&ntb=1
• https://responsibility.live/baca-https-brainly.co.id/juang/1237088
• https://www.smpn6bandarlampung.sch.id/2016/03/pengertian-dan-exemple-
• https://brainly.co.id/juang/1237088
• https://www.bing.com/ck/a?!&&p=aafb42da6e3fdfabJmltdHM9MTY3MTQwODAwMCZpZ3VpZD0zZTcwYzVjZC1kMjA5LTZlOGEtMDAyMi1kNzRkZDNiMzZmN2ImaW5zaWQ9NTA5NA&ptn=3&hsh=3&fclid=3e70c5cd-d209-6e8a-0022-d74dd3b36f7b&u=a1aHR0cHM6Ly9yaW1iYWtpdGEuY29tL3Bpc2FuZy8&ntb=1
• https://rimbakita.com/pisang/
• https://rsudsyamsudin.org/9133/pelepah-pisang-dinding-textur/

 

sinaumedia Literasi – It seems that almost every one of us has one social media account, maybe even
more than one and is monitored almost every time. Not a few also take the time to play
cellphones while eating, studying and even disturbing your sleeping hours, Sinaumed’s? Are you
one of those people who can’t miss scrolling social media timelines all the time? Be
careful. Even though the initial goal is to update the latest information, seeing a row of
posts on the cellphone screen can eat away at your mind for a long time, you know. Various
studies have reported that long-term use of social media can change your mindset and interfere with your
mental health. Behind all the beauty of photos and the excitement of stories of people in
cyberspace, long-term use of social media will have a negative impact on your health.

Overly active use of social media can leave an imprint not only on mental health, but also on physical
health, especially by changing sleep patterns. A 2014 study of adults in the United States aged
19–32, found that participants checked their preferred social media account for more than an hour per day,
and about 30 times per week. 57% of these users also reported having trouble sleeping.
The researchers suggest that the reason behind why social media users experience poor sleep is the
fact that they feel compelled to be active on websites at all hours, including late at night on
Sinaumed’s.

Social media also reduces your productivity. A research paper published last year in the
Journal of Applied Social Psychology states that we spend more time on social media networks than we
realize, thus wasting one of life’s most valuable resources: time. The researchers found
evidence that internet and Facebook-related stimuli could distort the perception of time due to attention
and arousal-related mechanisms. Reports show that even when we’re at work, we still
subconsciously look at our phone screens to check our recent “likes” and comments count, even though we know
we shouldn’t. One data set also found that employees spend approximately 2.35 hours per
day,

Another bad consequence of continuous use of social media is an increased risk of depression, insomnia,
poor self-image, decreased self-confidence, anxiety disorders and eating disorders, to self-harm behavior.
All of these risks are strongly suspected of appearing as a concrete manifestation of our
subconscious tendency to like to compare ourselves to other people’s lives so we don’t enjoy life.
This theory has been explained in a study entitled Online Social Networking and Mental Health which
was published in the journal Cyberpsychology, Behavior, and Social Networking. Has social media
also become toxic in your life? Here are some signs that you need to know about Sinaumed’s.

CONTENT SLAVES

If you are at this level, you will do everything just for content. Forcing to buy this and
that for the sake of content, or snacks for the sake of content, or vacations for the sake of content, or
flipping merrily when the green light at a red light is on the road for the sake of content, all you do is
for the sake of content so that you forget the boundaries of existing norms, even forcing yourself to do
extreme things just for the sake of content. It’s even worse if you get into debt to look cool
on social media.

FORGET THE REAL WORLD

Even though it has become part of everyday life, using social media often makes you forget to build
relationships with people in real life. The same negative effect also occurs when someone is
too focused on social media and puts it in a position that is more important than anything else.
For example, when someone is very worried about uploading photos that they feel are not beautiful,
or are more concerned with updating photos on Instagram than enjoying a vacation. You also
always check your cellphone all the time just to see your timeline or social media notifications.
No matter the time and place, while working, eating, hanging out with friends, watching movies, you
just keep checking your cellphone repeatedly, Sinaumed’s.

MAKE SOCIAL MEDIA AS AN ESCAPE

Are you the type of person who often spit out problems on social media and make social media accounts a
place to “garbage” excessively? Be careful, because this can be dangerous if it is not stopped
immediately or left alone. Apart from making other people feel uncomfortable, this habit
certainly does not solve the problem you are facing. Instead of getting a solution, maybe the
existing problem becomes more complex or other new problems emerge.

COMPARE YOURSELF WITH OTHERS

Constantly comparing yourself to others. This is usually caused by following an influencer or
public figure with a life that “seems” perfect on social media. Even though everyone must have
their own problems, maybe even more severe than what we experience. After scrolling through the
timeline on social media, maybe someone only sees the happy side, so they start to compare it with their own
condition when they are facing problems, without taking into account what strengths and benefits they
already have, which other people may not necessarily have.

Watch Insecurity

INFERIORITY

Insecure is one of the negative effects that can be caused by social media if not used wisely.
These feelings are usually seen when someone is easily suspicious, such as suddenly becoming a
drama queen, easily offended, and feeling insecure about their body condition. On social media,
we cannot limit other people’s comments that might hurt our feelings. Therefore, what can be
done to prevent feelings of insecurity is not to worry about their negative opinions on social media.

MEDSOS STALKING HOBBY

For people who are too active on social media, stalking other people’s social media accounts can become one
of their habits. But it turns out that the effect can actually create competition which in the
end makes you feel lonely. Apart from that, you also know more about people’s lives through
their social media accounts than the lives of those closest to you. If your hobby has entered a
dangerous stage, maybe it’s time for you to do a Sinaumed’s social media detox.

NOMOPHOBIA SYNDROME

Nomophobia is a fear syndrome that occurs when you don’t have a smartphone. You feel that a
smartphone is an object that must be near you for 24 hours. You feel restless, worried, and
confused when your favorite cellphone is not there. It’s as if in your life dictionary these
things are a must and you can’t miss them, even if you go to the toilet or the toilet. If you
feel that way, it means it’s time for you to do a social media detox for a healthier psychological
condition, Sinaumed’s.

SOCIAL MEDIA DETOX

For those who feel tired of the virtual world, take a break for a while or as long as possible to restart
again, such as the physical fatigue we feel after a long time of work and lack of vacations, it’s better to
take a break from the hustle and bustle to refresh your mind. Do a social media detox.
What is social media detox, in simple terms is a kind of self-healing by staying away from social
media to calm the mind for mental health due to exposure to the negative effects of social media.
One way to do a social media detox is to take a short break from cyberspace. Here are
some tips you can do. Check these out!

KEEP YOUR SMARTPHONE OUT OF REACH

Starting a social media detox is not as easy as turning your palm. Especially if you have a
lot of free time. However, immediately keep your cellphone or other electronic device out of
reach. Especially if you don’t have much activity. Immediately “fill” your empty
hands with other activities so you don’t always think about reaching for your cell phone. Also
keep your cell phone out of reach and turn it to silent or vibrate mode while studying. This
method makes it easier for you to focus more on completing tasks more efficiently.

CREATE A SOCMED LIMIT ALARM

The most efficient way to detox social media is to limit the time you access it. The
reasonable limit for using social media according to psychologists is 30 minutes to one hour per day.
You can divide the total 1 hour into several “sessions” for the day. For example, 15
minutes in the morning, 15 minutes at lunch, 15 minutes on the way home on public transit, and 15 minutes at
dinner. In order not to go too far, remind yourself to log out of social media accounts by
setting an alarm. There are also many applications that can help remind you when you reach a
set time limit. It’s best to avoid accessing social media just before bedtime, because it can
interfere with the quantity and quality of your sleep, Sinaumed’s.

TURN OFF SOCIAL MEDIA NOTIFICATIONS

Turn off notifications on all social media so that you are not tempted to check your cellphone every now
and then to see the latest updates. Unless the account is used for work needs. If
necessary, set any application that is installed on the front screen of the cellphone. Try to
install only what is needed by Sinaumed’s.

DIFFICULT ACCESS TO SOCIAL MEDIA

Making access to social media a little complicated because if you install a social media application on the
smartphone’s front display it will make it too easy for you to access social media. Try
removing some of the shortcuts (shortcuts) for direct access to some of these social media.
Then, create a special folder on your smartphone for several social media applications.
That way, you’ll need a few steps of tapping and scrolling before you can access Sinaumed’s.

PHONE-FREE AREA

Even though it sounds silly, there’s no harm in trying this method. You can determine for
yourself which areas of the house are not allowed to carry, let alone play smartphones. For
example, in the TV room or dining room to focus on gathering with family, or in the bedroom to get away from
the habit of playing on your cellphone before going to bed to disturb your sleeping hours which should be
Sinaumed’s.

A DAY WITHOUT SOCIAL MEDIA

Designate one day a week for “a day without social media”. For example Sunday, so you can
spend time hanging out with friends or family, as well as doing hobbies that you like.

DIGITAL DETOX RETREAT

Try a digital-detox retreat. Try a special digital detox vacation discovered by Tanya Goodin,
a digital entrepreneur who has seen the effects of screen dominated life on health. This
retreat does not allow anything related to technology. Instead of that, you can enjoy
mindfulness workshops, yoga, hiking, flying kites, and storytelling. They also serve raw food
and ban alcohol, so your life will be totally reset. If you prefer adventure over wellness
retreat, then you just need to ‘fly under the radar’. A place where there is no WiFi connection
or phone signal at all for you to enjoy your time to the fullest without a smartphone connection at
all.

CHANGE PLATFORMS

It’s not comfortable playing social media but can’t let go 100%. The solution is to replace a
more useful platform. Replace social media platforms that show off ideas. For
example creating a podcast that can be posted on Soundcloud or Spotify, or creating YouTube content which,
if you get lots of views, you can monetize and earn.

SELF CONTROL AT YOUR BEST

The point is self control. If at this time, maybe you still enjoy doing personal uploads to
cyberspace, it’s legal, but what needs to be considered is the content of the post. Upload
wisely because digital footprints will forever be imprinted. If we ourselves can delete it, but
we can’t control other people to download our photos, videos or screenshots of our posts, which in the
future can become a boomerang for us.

Watch An Art Of Being Totally Stupid

RESET YOUR MIND

Many people have proven the benefits of meditation. The importance of taking time to refocus
even more than updating social life depends on connectivity. If you spend all day in front of
the computer, periodically take time to relax by sitting or taking a short walk. If you really
can’t leave your desk, try logging into Do Nothing for 2 Minutes. This web page will ask you to
concentrate on a relaxing seascape, and if you move the mouse or try to type, the timer will repeat again.
This website is not going to help you avoid the problem of eyes that keep staring at the screen,
but it is certainly useful for calming your mind. You can work around this by closing your eyes
and just listening to the sound of the waves.

SET RULES

In the end, it all depends on your choice. Investing in a traditional alarm clock and keeping
your phone out of your bedroom overnight can keep you from scrolling both before bed and when you wake up.
Don’t forget to enforce technology bans at certain times in your life, mute Whatsapp conversations,
and turn off email alerts and respond only at certain times. Remember that not much will happen
when you step away from social media. Reading more, going for walks, and looking for new
hobbies will be advantages that you will feel in Sinaumed’s soon.

Of the many benefits that can be obtained from using social media, you need to be aware if what you feel
after using social media is excessive anxiety. If anxiety has struck due to the negative things
you receive from using social media, you should be aware of it and start doing a social media detox.
Apart from letting go of dependence, you also need to focus more on building good relationships in
real life Sinaumed’s. Good luck!

EDUTORE

sinaumedia developed an educational platform called Edutore. On this platform, you can access
many question practice books like those in sinaumedia by subscribing. Edutore has a slogan
“Everyone Can Be Smart” and that is also what Edutore aspires to be. So that Edutore can
participate in educating Indonesian children. On the Edutore Youtube Channel, various topics
are discussed, ranging from unique general knowledge such as “Why are the brake lights red”, learning
English with Captain J, to studying with Edutore which contains discussions of questions such as CPNS
synonyms, antonyms, and others. Check the YouTube account directly, click here.

Source: from various sources

Characteristics of Fiscal Policy – ​​Talking about fiscal policy, might remind Sinaumed’s of the news that in November 2017, the world bank provided loans to Indonesia worth US$300 million or the equivalent of Rp.4.05 trillion.

This loan was disbursed to help increase regional spending, including in terms of tax policies and revenue administration.

The World Bank Representative for Indonesia, Rodrigo A. Chaves also said that this loan was provided in order to continue the significant progress that Indonesia has achieved so far. According to him, fiscal reforms must be continued so that Indonesia can fulfill all its aspirations.

Characteristics of Fiscal Policy

1. Encouraging Investment Entry

Fiscal policy has the objective of increasing economic growth and maintaining the stability of the country’s economy. One of the things that can be obtained by enforcing fiscal policy is economic stability which can increase the trust and interest of foreign investors to invest in Indonesia. Investment by foreign investors is expected to have a positive effect on the country’s economy.

2. Encouraging the State’s Development and Economic Growth

Through fiscal policy, the government can make various adjustments to state spending and revenue in the hope of achieving development and economic stability.

In general, the government through the implementation of fiscal policy will change the amount of tax which is one of the instruments of fiscal policy and has a role as a source of state revenue to finance development.

3. Providing Better Access to Various Community Services

One of the actions that the government has taken with the aim of realizing social justice is the enactment of the National Economic Recovery Program issued by the Ministry of Finance so that people in the middle to lower and vulnerable economic categories are able to survive the COVID-19 pandemic.

This makes the realization of social justice that can be felt by all Indonesian people.

Fiscal Definition

According to Sinaumed’s Besar Bahasa Indonesia, fiscal has a relationship with state income and tax matters. The word fiscal itself comes from the Latin word fiscus which is the name of someone who had or held power over finances in ancient Rome.

Meanwhile, in English fiscal is called fisc which means regulation or treasury of incoming and outgoing money in the kingdom.

So, this fiscal is used to provide an explanation of the form of state and royal income that is collected from the public as well as by the state or royal government which is considered as income and is used for expenditure with programs to obtain national income, production, the economy, and is also used as a balancing device. in the economy.

In Indonesia, the term fiscal policy refers to government policies by directing a country’s economy through government revenues and expenditures. Then, the question arises, what is the difference between monetary policy and fiscal policy? The difference lies in the purpose.

If monetary policy has the goal of stabilizing the economy by controlling the amount of money in circulation along with the interest rate, Sinaumed’s can understand fiscal policy by reading the following points.

Fiscal Policy Objectives

Broadly speaking, the objective of fiscal policy is to influence the course of the economy with the following objectives:

1. Increasing GDP and economic growth

Fiscal policy has the aim of increasing economic growth to the maximum because it will have a major effect on state income or income, including: customs and excise, income tax, land and building tax, foreign exchange, tourism, imports, and so on.

In addition, examples of state spending in question include:

• Development of public facilities and infrastructure.
• Weapon shopping.
• Government project.
• Aircraft and other programs for public welfare.

2. Expanding employment and reducing unemployment

As Sinaumed’s already knows, unemployment is a problem that is a scourge for a country. In Indonesia, the unemployment rate has been reduced by 140,000 people.

According to the percentage of the open unemployment rate, if in February 2017 the figure reached 5.33%, in February 2022 it would be at the level of 5.13%.

3. Stabilize the price of goods and overcome inflation.

The decline in the price of an item causes the loss of hope for profit for the private sector. However, rising prices can also result in inflation.

On the other hand, inflation can provide benefits such as creating full employment opportunities. However, inflation can also have a negative impact on groups or people who have low incomes because purchasing power decreases.

The problem of unstable inflation will have great potential to reduce public trust in the government. Through fiscal policy, it is hoped that the level of national income, employment opportunities, levels of national investment, and distribution of national income will run as expected.

Fiscal Policy Instruments

Then to find out more about fiscal policy,  Sinaumed’s must also understand some of the instruments. Fiscal policy instruments are various sectors in the economy that are used by the government to maintain the stability of the macro economy. These sectors include:

1. Taxes

An important sector in fiscal policy instruments is taxes from both the domestic and foreign sectors. In order to achieve economic goals, the government can increase or decrease people’s purchasing power through taxes.

For example, if taxes are reduced, the amount of output of goods and services will also increase so that it will affect and increase people’s purchasing power. However, the opposite also applies if taxes are increased, it will reduce the output of goods and services and can reduce people’s purchasing power.

2. Expenditures

The fiscal policy instrument that Sinaumed’s needs to understand next is state spending. This is the same as the basic concept of whatever happens, even in Sinaumed’s’ own life. For example, if family income decreases, of course, Sinaumed’s will try to save money and reduce expenses so that there is a balance between income and expenses.

3. Public Bonds

The last fiscal policy instrument is regarding the issuance of bonds for citizens or bonds. These debt securities are quite well known in the field of investment, where people who have funds are offered to buy debt securities from the state, and the state will repay the debt accompanied by interest on the loan.

One of the bond products is Government Securities which are traded or Retail SBN. This letter is traded as one of the investment products. If Sinaumed’s decides to buy Retail SBN, besides getting returns through interest, Sinaumed’s will also play a direct role in financing the country’s development budget, you know !

Various Kinds of Fiscal Policy

Basically, fiscal policy is categorized into two kinds, namely according to theory and according to the amount of income and expenditure. Well, here’s the explanation,

Fiscal Policy According to Theory

1. Functional fiscal policy

Functional fiscal policy is a policy that under consideration, expenditures and receipts of the government budget are determined based on looking at various indirect effects on national income especially with the aim of increasing employment opportunities.

2. Deliberate fiscal policy

Deliberate fiscal policy is a policy enacted to address current economic problems by intentionally manipulating the budget, either through changes in government spending or changes in taxation.

There are three forms of deliberate fiscal policy. First, creating changes to government spending. Second, creating changes to the tax collection system. Third, creating changes simultaneously both in the tax collection system and in the government management system.

3. Unintentional fiscal policy

Unintentional fiscal policy is a policy enacted to control the speed of the business cycle so that it is not too volatile. Types of involuntary fiscal policies are proposals, minimum price policies, progressive taxes, and unemployment insurance.

Fiscal policy according to the amount of income and expenditure

1. Balanced fiscal policy

Balanced fiscal policy is a policy that makes spending and revenue have the same amount. There are positive and negative impacts of this one fiscal policy. The positive impact is that the state does not need to borrow a certain amount of funds, both from within the country and from abroad. The negative impact is that economic conditions will worsen if the country’s economy is in an unfavorable condition.

2. Surplus fiscal policy

In a surplus fiscal policy, the amount of income must be higher when compared to expenditure. Surplus fiscal policy is one way that can be done to avoid inflation.

3. Deficit fiscal policy

A deficit fiscal policy is a fiscal policy that is the opposite of a surplus policy. One of the advantages of this policy is that it can overcome the sluggishness and depression of economic growth. As for the drawback, the country will always be in a state of deficit.

4. Dynamic fiscal policy

The function of dynamic fiscal policy is to provide income that can be used to meet all the needs of the government which also increase over time.

Examples of Fiscal Policy Applicable in Indonesia

There are several examples of fiscal policies that have been implemented by the Indonesian government. Among them:

1. The first fiscal policy was when President Joko Widodo announced the Tax Amnesty program in 2017. This program was launched because there were many cases of tax arrears reports and many people did not report the amount of wealth they owned. Therefore, finally President Joko Widodo decided to implement the Tax Amnesty program.

The Tax Amnesty Program is a program for the elimination of taxes owed as well as countless criminal sanctions in the field of tax administration sanctions. With this amnesty, many political parties are competing to immediately settle tax arrears as well as many individuals who immediately report the amount of their wealth to the authorities. This program can increase Indonesia’s national income against rupiah and it is proven that national income can increase up to 15.22 trillion rupiah.

2. The second is the tax relaxation that will take place from 2020 to early 2021. This tax relaxation program aims to increase people’s purchasing power.

3. An example of the last fiscal policy is gas and fuel subsidies. The purpose of this fiscal policy in the fuel sector is to facilitate mobility and economic transactions in society.

Differences between Monetary Policy and Fiscal Policy

In order to maintain the stability of the country’s economy, the government can implement two policies, namely monetary policy and fiscal policy. These two economic policies are equally important for increasing economic growth and maintaining the stability of the country.

The first difference between monetary policy and fiscal policy is in terms of different decision making. If fiscal policy is to be managed and decided by the Ministry of Finance, then the decision on monetary policy is absolutely in the hands of Bank Indonesia (BI).

The second difference can be seen from the objectives of implementing monetary policy and fiscal policy. The objective of monetary policy is to maintain the amount of money circulating in society. While the purpose of implementing fiscal policy is to maintain state revenues and expenditures in order to create economic stability.

Also read:

• Definition of Balanced Budget: Policy to Method
• Monetary Policy Instruments: Definition, Types
• Macroeconomics: Definition, Purpose, Scope
• Monetary Policy: Definition, Types, Purpose
• Macroeconomic Theory: Definition and Key Issues
• What is Economic Growth Theory
• Understand the Definition, Purpose, and Scope of the Economy

Characteristics of Language in Advertisements – Sinaumed’s certainly understands that the existence of advertisements is included in terms of marketing which is very useful for introducing a product or service to the general public. Yep, basically advertisements are used for such things so that currently the number of advertisements is very diverse, both in mass media and electronic media.

An advertisement is required to have an interesting delivery of language so that it can always be remembered and unknowingly influences readers or listeners as potential consumers to try and buy a product or service. A good form of advertising is simple but the use of the language used in conveying the message of the offer really “touches” potential customers.

Then, what are the characteristics of good language in an advertisement? Can advertisements that are either broadcast in electronic media, heard on the radio, or shown through the mass media affect a person’s mindset?

So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t confused about this, let’s look at the following review!

Characteristics of Language in an Ad

Before discussing the characteristics of the language contained in an ad, you must first understand what the nature of the ad is. According to Johnson and Lee (1999), advertising is a commercial and non-personal communication process about an organization and its products or services that are transmitted to the general public through mass media, such as newspapers, radio, television, websites, and so on.

Basically, all advertisements, both commercial advertisements and public service advertisements, are trying to provide information to the general public. In making advertisements, one must pay attention to the use of language which is very important for the success of advertisements in the eyes of the public. The language used in advertisements must be able to be a presentation to the public so that they are interested in something being advertised.

According to Salamadian (2017), language features in an advertisement text are as follows:

1. Using Persuasive Sentences

Persuasive sentences are sentences that aim to convince and persuade the reader or listener to carry out the idea expressed in the sentence about something. In making advertisements, you also have to use this type of persuasive sentence because so that readers or listeners feel persuaded to accept the offers in the advertisement. Usually, the use of persuasive sentences in an ad emphasizes a certain diction, for example “cheap”, “fast”, “reliable”, and many others.

2. Using Slogans and Special Jargon

Slogans and jargon are interesting, striking, and easy to remember sentences or words to convey something to the general public. The use of this slogan usually consists of four to five words which of course has its own charm so that the message or offer in the advertisement can influence people.

The preparation of diction and sentences for a slogan must be creative and up to date. Even if you can try to use the diction that was currently being widely discussed so that people can easily remember it.

3. Using the First Person Point of View

Without realizing it, it turns out that the use of the first-person point of view is very influential on the ad content, you know… Text in an advertisement will usually use the first-person singular or plural subject, for example I , I , and we , who act as if they are parties. advertiser.

Examples of using first-person point of view in public service advertisements about drug prevention:

As a result if you use drugs; friends stay away from you , your parents are disappointed, caught by the police, satan is happy. Say no to drugs.

4. Short and Easy to Understand

The arrangement of sentences in an advertisement must be short but also easy to understand. The point is that the message to be conveyed in an advertisement is to the point , it doesn’t need to be convoluted and still uses language that is easily understood by the general public, not just a group of people.

What is the Purpose of an Ad?

In general, the purpose of advertisements, both commercial advertisements and public service advertisements, is the same, namely that the message contained in the advertisement is conveyed to the general public.

1. Introducing the Product

Especially for a commercial advertisement, the main goal is to introduce a product or service to the general public as consumers. Especially if the product is a new type where not many people know about the existence of the new product.

2. Displaying Social Messages

This is found in public service advertisements which aim to increase public knowledge and awareness of the social issues that are being raised in these public service advertisements. The communication contained in public service advertisements is made in such a way that it can be enjoyed by all people from various social groups.

3. Offer Products

After introducing a product, especially in commercial advertisements, there will definitely be scenarios related to product offerings with the aim of driving sales. So, almost the same as the proverb “one oar, two islands exceeded”.

Therefore, in commercial advertisements, it is very important to pay attention to the use of sentences so that the message to be conveyed is truly understood by potential customers. The more effective the commercial advertisement is, the more transactions will be formed, thereby making the company benefit.

4. Expanding Target Targets

Especially in commercial advertisements posted and aired in the mass media, the aim is to make the introduction and product offerings accessible to the wider community. Not only that, if commercial advertising is easily accessible to the wider community, it will expand the target market at the same time.

Meanwhile, in public service advertisements, the intended target is all members of the public from various social groups to be willing to accept and understand the knowledge that is being discussed in the public service advertisement.

What is the Function of a Commercial Ad?

The existence of commercial advertising certainly has various functions, which are accepted by various parties. Here are three functions of the existence of a commercial advertisement.

1. Giving Information

The first function of the existence of a commercial advertisement and public service advertisement is to provide information. It needs to be understood once again that an advertisement is actually made to convey messages or information to the general public regarding something, including products or services for trade purposes to knowledge of the social issues being discussed.

Meanwhile, in public service advertisements, the information provided relates to all areas of life, from politics to health. An example of a public service advertisement in the health sector is information about administering MR immunization to prevent measles and rubella.

Usually using language delivery:  Let’s protect your baby from illness, disability, and death due to measles and rubella. Immediately give MR immunization. 

2. Persuade

The second function of the existence of commercial advertisements and public service advertisements is to persuade. That is, this commercial advertisement can function so that the general public is willing to buy and try the product or service that is being advertised. After they try the product, they may later repurchase it because they feel comfortable with the product.

Meanwhile in public service advertisements, its existence functions to persuade the public to carry out the things that have been notified in the public service advertisement. For example, in drug prevention community service advertisements, usually the information will be in the form of persuasion not to use any type of drug.

Usually, the use of language sentences is as follows:  The consequences if you use drugs; friends stay away from you , your parents are disappointed, caught by the police, satan is happy. Say no to drugs.

3. Remind

The third function of the existence of commercial advertisements and public service advertisements is to remind. In advertising efforts, especially commercial advertisements, the goal is to make the general public read the information or content contained in the advertisement repeatedly. Therefore, the broadcast of commercial advertisements on television is often repeated, because so that the general public who watch them will continue to remember the brand or brand of the product.

Meanwhile, in public service advertisements, this function is to remind the public to be willing to do the things discussed in the advertisement. As is the case with commercial advertisements, public service advertisements are often repeated in various media so that people can be influenced and at the same time do what is asked of the public service advertisement.

For example, in a public service announcement that discusses the dangers of smoking, there will usually be a sentence stating that smoking is a killer because it causes cancer and other fatalities.

The Concept of Language in an Ad

Does Sinaumed’s realize that the use of language in an advertisement really influences human life in such a big way? Even today, hedonism and consumptive lifestyles are increasingly practiced because they are easily influenced by the language conveyed in an advertisement.

According to Schrank (1996), claims that contain product superiority, especially in commercial advertisements, are dishonest. Dishonesty here means that the information in an advertisement contains lies by using figurative words or distorted figures of speech.

Does Sinaumed’s know that some advertisements that have exaggerated claims can actually be categorized as false information? Yep, because basically, none of these products have true advantages as claimed in their advertisements. According to Corbett (1971), Tropes are figurative words that contain an unusual meaning from the meaning of the word designated. These tropes are usually used in advertising to convey information in an informal way, where the delivery of information is more like an implicit statement. The purpose of using tropes in an advertisement is to make a persuasive statement in order to influence others.

The following are several types of tropes that are contained in several commercial advertisements:

	Type	Meaning	Sample ad
Substitution (Simple Tropes)	Hyperbole	Excessive claims	Pantene Shine – Pantene Ads
	annaklasis	Repetition of a word with a double meaning	Sarimi sticks to the heart sticks to the tongue – Mie Sarimi ad
	Resonance	Phrases that have different meanings with a combination of pictures	Men have taste – Gudang Garang Cigarette Advertisement (with a healthy masculine image)
Destabilization (Complex Tropes)	Metaphor	The replacement of meaning based on the similarity of meaning	There is a mother at home, everything must be in order – Mama Lime advertisement
	Paradox	Contradictory, false or improbable statements	“This picture was taken by someone who didn’t bring a camera.” – Kodak Movies

According to Swales, the language contained in advertisements actually has its own approach and goals and is an event of communication with a set of communication goals. The purpose of this communication is what makes the language in an advertisement have its own style of language. Especially in commercial advertisements, the use of language that includes diction and sentence structure is also related to the identity of the product or service being advertised.

The Effect of Advertising on the Language Acquisition Process in a Child

Previously, it was mentioned that an advertisement can have a major influence on humankind, not only with regard to lifestyle but also in efforts to acquire language, especially in a child. Yep, this was revealed in a study entitled The Effect of Advertising with Music on Children’s Language Acquisition by Erika Fibriyanti.

In this study, he highlighted the use of television as a medium of entertainment during self-isolation during the Covid-19 pandemic which is currently occurring. It is possible that children will also make television and the commercial advertisements it displays as entertainment. Today’s advertisements use a lot of background music so that the ad is not too monotonous and is accompanied by a distinctive chant.

For example, the Shopee e-commerce advertisement, which holds a special event every month with the ad text “shopee pee pee pee shopee shopping day…” and is sung in a distinctive tone to make it easy to remember.

In fact, advertisements with background music and distinctive tones are very useful in the process of acquiring language in early childhood, because they tend to remember things they have just heard, especially if they have a distinctive tone. Actually, language acquisition efforts that occur in early childhood can be done anywhere and anytime, including from an advertisement on television.

Children usually pay more attention to things that are considered interesting accompanied by cheerful visuals and music. This attention can later be called the listening process which can then be imitated. Imitation is tantamount to producing new utterances or languages ​​that he unconsciously learns and accepts.

In this case, it is a note for parents to keep an eye on the advertisements that appear on television and pay attention to whether the child will imitate them or not. Because sometimes there is vocabulary or diction contained in an ad that is inappropriate for children to imitate.

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

 

Source:

Fibriyanti, Erika. (2020). The Influence of Advertising With Music On Children’s Language Acquisition . Jakarta: UIN Syarif Hidayatullah.

Harjanto, Ignatius. (2010). (Language) Advertising: Understanding and Utilizing It as Language Study Material. Magister Scientiae, No.27.

Also Read!

• 8 Advertising Purposes, What Are They?
• Definition and Characteristics of Advertising
• What is Personal Selling?
• Definition and Forms of Direct Marketing
• Definition and Types of Magazines
• Definition and Benefits of Market Segments
• 12 Examples of Marketing Strategies You Can Try
• 10 Benefits of the Internet in Education
• Understanding and Advantages of Digital Marketing
• Definition and Types of Communication Media
• Definition and Functions of Search Engines
• Definition and Benefits of e-Commerce

Fauvism is a school of art and style that originally developed in France at the end of the 19th century. This school of fauvism art eventually developed to several places in Europe based on the foundation of the concept of expressionism pioneered by Van Gogh.

The name of the flow of Fauvism, comes from a satirical word that is fauve which means wild animals. The word arose from Louis Vauxcelles when he commented on an exhibition held at the Salon d’Automne. To find out more about the flow of Fauvism, see the explanation below.

Fauvism definition

Fauvism is a school that values ​​the concept of expression in capturing the atmosphere to be depicted. Fauvism flow is different from the works of impressionism. Where, fauvis painters can argue that harmony which is not connected with reality in nature, will show more of the artist’s personal relationship with nature.

Fauvism emphasizes more on the quality of artistic elements, such as lines, shapes and strong colors over realistic values ​​that are still maintained by impressionism.

This means that in the flow of fauvism, even though impressionism came out of the principles of realism or naturalism, its basic nature is still the same, i.e. it still imitates nature. Fauvism uses a style that is almost the same as impressionism, but Fauvism rejects the basic idea of ​​imitation of nature.

In the flow of Fauvism, artists prefer to use every element in their works to become works that are independent without the need to be associated with image resemblance or realisticity. An example is the use of color as symbolism.

The term Fauvism itself comes from the French language, namely les Fauves , which means beast. The term was taken from an art critic and commentator named Louis Vauxcelles who expressed his amazement at the works of Fauvism artists.

The term wild beast was used, because fauvism artists were considered to have rebelled against various kinds of mainstream art principles that existed at that time in Paris, but these fauvist artists were able to prove that they produced great and stunning works.

The basic concept of the flow of Fauvism was first traced in 1888 from Paul Gauguin’s comments on Paul Serisier, his comments are as follows.

“How do you interpret that tree? Yellow, therefore added yellow. Then, the shade looks a bit blue, because of that added ultramarine. Reddish leaves? Just add vermilion.”

Everything that has to do with objective or realistic observation, as in naturalist painting, is replaced by emotional and imaginative understanding.

As a result of this emotional and imaginative understanding, the color and concept of space have a poetic feel. The colors used are clear and are no longer adjusted to the colors on the ground, but follow the heart and desires of the painter.

The use of lines in Fauvism flow becomes simpler, so that connoisseurs of the painting can detect clear and strong lines in the painting. Therefore, the shapes of objects in paintings become easier to recognize without the need to consider many details.

Fauvism painters also call for rebellion against the establishment of painting which has long been aided by the objectivism of science like what existed in impressionism. Although, knowledge from previous painters is still used as a basis for painting. This upheaval occurred in the early days when the flow of Fauvism was popular, namely in the period 1904 – 1907.

Characteristics of Fauvism

The flow of Fauvism has several characteristics, as follows:

• In the flow of Fauvism, model images in Fauvism paintings do not have the same accuracy as with reference to painted models.
• Objects from the painting model, outlined with lines that are clearly visible and very firm. Examples such as images found in the forms of cartoon character images and so on.
• The use and selection of colors in Fauvism paintings tend to be contrasting, bright and bright. The striking color was chosen, because the color does not look at the accuracy according to the reference of the painting model.
• Brush markings in Fauvism paintings tend to be very striking, contrasting and not obscured by shading.
• Some are Fauvism painters, some paint in landscape forms and some painters are still attached to certain types of objects.
• In accordance with its understanding, the flow of Fauvism painting conveys what is in the minds and ideas possessed by the painters.
• Contrasting and striking colors are used, as a way to express the ideas of the author.

Characteristics of Fauvism

Based on the characteristics of Fauvism, here are some of the characteristics of Fauvism that you need to know.

1. Color

In the flow of Fauvism, color is the priority when painting an object. Raw and pure colors are not something that is secondary to the composition of a painting. For example, when a painter paints a red sky, the entire landscape of the painting must follow suit.

Another example is when a painter wants to maximize the effect of a red sky, the artist can choose the color of the building in green, the water in yellow, the sand in orange, and the boat in blue.

Artists from the Fauvism school can also choose colors that are just as contrasting and just as bright. One thing that cannot be forgotten from the art of Fauvism is that there are no artists with this style who give realistic color to their paintings.

2. Has a simple shape

Because in the flow of Fauvism the artist avoids normal painting techniques, simple forms of the objects the artist paints are born. Simple forms in Fauvism painting, become one of the necessities in Fauvism flow apart from using contrasting and bright color tones.

3. Expression

The third characteristic of Fauvism is that the paintings presented are of the expressionist type. Expressionism can express the emotions of artists through high color selection and popping forms, or it can also be said that the paintings of this Fauvism school have a passion that appears in their paintings.

4. The object of the painting is an everyday object

Fauvism artists tend to paint landscapes or scenes from everyday life. Everyday objects are a source of inspiration for Fauvism artists because they are considered uncomplicated, and Fauvism artists can play a wider and unlimited range of colors.

Concept Art in Fauvism

In accordance with the understanding and origins of the Fauvism school, this school has an art concept that departs from efforts to perfect the Impressionism school that was present and was used mainstream by artists.

The flow of Fauvism departs from the denial of Paul Gauguin’s style which carries the decorative style and expressionism of Van Gogh. although it is not the same as the impressionism school, but in the fauvism flow, the paintings from the fauves show the same and consistent technique.

The difference is that in Fauvism paintings, they always have the same traits and characteristics, namely the strength in the use of color, dashed and firm lines, and the appearance of the painting object which is irregular or disorganized appearance .

Freedom and spontaneity in Fauvism painting is one of the personal responses in which fauves artists can be equated with expressionism.

Fauvism is included in the history of fine arts in the West. Apart from learning about the history of art schools born in the west, Sinaumed’s can also study art schools in the east. What and how are the characteristics of the existing eastern art schools? If you want to find out more, Sinaumed’s can read material on the history of eastern art in a book entitled ‘Sejarah Seni Rupa’ which is available at sinaumedia.com!

Figures in the Flow of Fauvism

In the flow of Fauvism, there are several important figures who carry the flow of Fauvism in each of his works. Here are some important figures in the flow of Fauvism.

1. Henri Matisse

The first figure who played a major role in the flow of Fauvism was Henri Matisse. He is the father figure of Fauvism and is known as one of the biggest rivals of the famous artist, Pablo Picasso.

Henri Matisse was initially interested in Cubism, but Henri Matisse also rejected the general idea of ​​Cubism. Matisse prefers to continue to develop Fauvism along with his group.

Matisse is of the opinion that art must still have a soft and calming side, but on the other hand art must not be stiff like the flow of cubism.

Almost all of the key characteristics and ideas in Fauvism appear in every work of Henri Matisse. However, Matisse still has one characteristic, namely freedom when he draws.

He doesn’t want to get too technical instead of fixating on accuracy. So that all the burden of the painting process appears in each of his works. Therefore, in each of Matisse’s works, he allows the appearance of anatomical errors and slightly deviated forms. However, the expressions depicted by Matisse are not obscured by the mistakes in the painting.

As the father of Fauvism, Henri Matisse believed that art should not create difficulties for the artist. Instead, art should be able to provide joy in the process.

2. Maurice de Vlaminck

One of Henri Matisse’s colleagues was Maurice de Vlaminck who also competed with Cubism artists, such as Pablo Picasso. These two Fauvism artists have something in common, namely the ability to innovate and create something new.

For Pablo Picasso, ideas were cubism, while for Vlaminck and colleagues innovation was the expressive use of bright colors and was nothing but fauvism.

Vlaminck is one of those artists whose role is to be a true pioneer of modern art. However, Vlaminck is also one of the artists who is vocal when criticizing the development of modern art.

Maurice de Vlaminck is unique from his fellow fauvists. He uses a bolder outline that is heavy and dark in contrast to the color of the shape he made himself. Examples include soft, light and bright colors.

The hallmark of Vlaminck, eventually became a focal point and an addition to the style of Fauvism which is already very contrasting and expressive from other art streams.

The uniqueness possessed by Vlaminck is not only seen in each of his paintings, but also seen in his attitude. For example, his hypocritical attitude towards modern art, but modern art can also be seen in the styles of his paintings.

Another attitude is when Vlaminck often insults the flow of cubism, but in some of his paintings he is also seen using the cubism style.

3. André Derain

Derain also had a major role in the development of two significant artistic movements at the beginning of the 20th century. Together with Matisse, Vlaminck, Derain also succeeded in producing Fauvism.

Different from other members of the Fauvism group, Derain is actually quite close and not a rival of the Cubism school like the other two figures. Derain is considered to be quite close to Pablo Picasso so that Derain’s presence is considered as a process of synthesis from fauvism and Picasso’s ideas which became an integral part of early cubism.

However, Derain’s contribution when producing some of the ideas behind the movement continues to be debated. Some also consider that Derain only provides derivative ideas.

The debate about Derain’s ideas arises because of the fact that Derain is constantly looking for artistic meaning and strives to create timeless art that has been erased in the peculiarities of modern times.

But throughout Andre Derain’s life, he continued to perform various experiments using various idioms in painting styles. Derain became one of the important figures who started the spread of modern art in the world.

4. Kees Van Dongen

Van Dongen is one of the figures in the Fauvism school who has works with the strongest Fauvism flow. Although he was not an innovator, like the other three figures of Fauvism, Van Dongen succeeded in adapting the colors with Fauvism lines to the paintings of women depicted living in luxury.

One of his famous paintings is when he depicts women’s jewelry. The painting was then considered very brilliant with images of the luxurious clothes of the dancers and artists.

Apart from these paintings, Van Dongen also continued to paint with passion. He also describes his passion for painting in the flow of Fauvism in accordance with the flow of the group he follows.

Not only that, the painting by Van Dongen is also recognized as the most brilliant of the paintings he previously made after 1920. However, unfortunately Kees Van Dongen is considered to be too immersed in the artwork he paints by depicting worldly life. In addition, his work was also considered inferior compared to the works of other fauvism schools at that time.

5. Raoul Dufy

The fifth figure of Fauvism is an artist from France. As an artist with a Fauvism style, most of Dufy’s works use painting subjects with luxurious and exclusive nuances.

He succeeded in making one of the largest paintings in the modern era at that time. The painting is titled La Fee Electricite which depicts the history and importance of electricity in the 20th century.

Unlike other fauvism figures, Dufy also contributed to the fashion sector at that time by associating with a fashion designer named Paul Poiret. From this association, Dufy became an artist with a stable financial condition.

That is the explanation of the flow of Fauvism. If Sinaumed’s wants to know more about other modern art schools, Sinaumed’s can learn more by reading books related to modern art schools available at sinaumedia.com

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia provides a variety of quality and original books for Sinaumed’s. So what are you waiting for? Buy and read the book right now!

Faraday’s law – Faraday’s law is one of the laws of physics that has made a major contribution to the progress of electricity. This law makes electricity a very important thing for modern human life. Michael Faraday at that time succeeded in creating the first electric generator that was used to meet human needs until the discovery of electromagnetic induction.

It was explained that there were discoveries regarding the quantitative aspects contained in electrolysis and the results were in the form of Faraday’s two laws of electrolysis. Several types of quantitative aspects are mentioned, such as the mass of the product, the volume of the gas, the number of moles of electrons, the current strength, and the electrolysis time required in the process.

Faraday’s Law Inventor Biography

Portrait of Michael Faraday.

Faraday’s law was formulated by the British chemist and physicist, Michael Faraday. In 1833, Faraday described discoveries about the quantitative aspects of electrolysis that eventually led to Faraday’s two laws of electrolysis.

Quoted from the XII Chemistry Module compiled by Arni Wiyati (2020) in this case electrolysis is an electrochemical cell in which electrical energy is used to carry out non-spontaneous redox reactions. The quantitative aspects referred to in the electrolytic cell are the mass of the product, the volume of the product gas, the number of moles of electrons, the current strength, and the time of electrolysis. The two laws obtained are divided into Faraday’s laws 1 and 2.

Michael Faraday (22 September 1791-25 August 1867) himself was a British scientist who earned the nickname “the father of electricity”, because thanks to his efforts electricity became a technology that was of many uses. He studied various fields of science, including electromagnetism and electrochemistry. He also invented the device that would become the Bunsen burner, which was used in nearly all science laboratories as a practical source of heat.

The effects of magnetism led him to discover the ideas that became the basis for the theory of the magnetic field. He gave many lectures to popularize science to the general public. His rational approach in developing theory and analyzing results is admirable.

 

1. Michael Faraday’s Childhood

Michael Faraday was born in Newington Butts, London, United Kingdom. The family moved to London in the winter of 1790. And it was in the spring of that year that Faraday was born. Faraday was the third of four children who had little formal education. At the age of 14, he was apprenticed as a salesman and bookbinder. During his seven years working as a bookbinder and salesman gave him many opportunities to read many books and it was during this time that he developed his curiosity towards science.

At age 20, he quit his apprenticeship and attended lectures given by Humphry Davy. It was from there that he later got in touch with Davy and eventually became Davy’s assistant when the scientist experienced impaired vision due to nitrogen trichloride. And this is where he started his extraordinary life story.

2. Michael Faraday’s Scientific Achievements

a. Chemistry

Faraday began his work in chemistry as an assistant to Humphry Davy. He succeeded in discovering Chlorine and Carbon substances. He also succeeded in liquefying several gases, investigating alloys of steel, and manufacturing several new types of glass intended for optical purposes. Faraday was the first to invent the Bunsen Burner. Which is now widely used throughout the world.

Faraday worked extensively in chemistry. Find other chemical substances, namely Benzene and dilute chlorine gas. The liquefaction of chlorine gas aims to establish that the gas is a vapor of a liquid having a low boiling point and to provide a more certain basic concept of molecular assemblage.

He also determined the composition of the hydrated chlorine clathrate. Faraday was the discoverer of the Law of Electrolysis and popularized the terms anode, cathode, electrode and ion. He was also the first to study metal nanoparticles.

b. Electricity and Magnetism

Faraday became famous for his work on electricity and magnetism. His first experiment was to make a voltaic pile construction with 7 and a half pennies, stacked with 7 sheets of zinc and 6 sheets of salt water soaked paper. With this construction he managed to decompose magnesium sulfate.

In 1821, Hans Christian Ørsted published the phenomenon of electromagnetism. It was from here that Faraday then began research that aimed to create a device that could produce “electromagnetic rotation”. One of the tools he succeeded in creating was the homopolar motor.

In this tool there is a continuous circular motion caused by the force of the magnetic circle around the cable which is extended into a pool of mercury where a magnet has previously been placed in the pool, so the cable will rotate around the magnet when an electric current is supplied from the battery. This discovery became the basis of today’s electromagnetic technology.

Faraday made a breakthrough when he wound two separate coils of wire and found that current is carried in the first coil, while the current is introduced in the second. This is what is known today as mutual induction. The results of this experiment resulted in that “a change in the magnetic field can produce an electric field” which was then made a mathematical model by James Clerk Maxwell and is known as Faraday’s Law.

vs. Diagmatism

In 1845, Faraday discovered that most matter exhibits a weak resistance to an electric field. This event is called diagmatism. Faraday also discovered that the plane of polarization of linearly polarized light could be rotated by the application of an external magnetic field in the direction of motion of the light. This is what is called the Faraday Effect.

Then in 1862, Faraday used a spectroscope to find differences in changes in light, changes of spectral lines by applying a magnetic field. However, the equipment he used at that time was inadequate, so it was not enough to determine the changes in the spectrum that occurred. This research was continued by Peter Zeeman and he published his results in 1897 and received the Nobel Prize for Physics in 1902 thanks to references from Faraday.

 

Faraday’s Law Working Principle

Before knowing more about Faraday’s Law and what are the applications in it. It is necessary to first understand the working principle of this law, starting from its understanding. Faraday’s law is a rule whose content is in the form of an explanation of the relationship between the mass of a substance present at an electrically charged electrode produced by an electrolytic supply.

Michael Faraday saw that each atom obtained was carried by one mole of electrons, this he observed during the process of electrolysis. As a result, a constant is found that is useful for calculating the amount of charge contained in one mole of electrons. Making it easier to calculate stoichiometry is one of the benefits.

There is the Faraday constant which is used to calculate the amount of charge contained in one mole of electrons. The Faraday constant facilitates the process of electrolysis stoichiometric calculations and in effect makes it possible to carry out stoichiometric calculations without having to take into account the electron charge at any time.

The Faraday constant is represented by F and has the following values, F is L/Mole x charge of the electron or electrons, F is (6.02214 x 10^23 electrons/mol) x (1.6022 x 10^-19 C/electron) and F is 96,500 C. After that the next understanding related to Faraday is the division of this law which is divided into two types.

Basically, Faraday’s law is used to make hypotheses or predictions regarding how a magnetic field can interact with an electric circuit. Useful to bring up the electromotive force or known as electromagnetic induction. Faraday’s law is divided into two types, namely Faraday’s law I and Faraday’s II.

1. Faraday’s Law I

Faraday’s law I states that the mass of a substance that is dissolved or precipitated is directly proportional to the charge passed through the cell and the equivalent mass of the substance. Faraday’s law I reads as follows, the mass of the substance obtained at the electrode during the electrolysis process is proportional to the amount of electric charge flowing.

From the sound of the law above it can be seen that the mass of the product which is symbolized by W, precipitated or dissolved on the electrode will be more and more. Increasing the number of masses goes hand in hand with an increase in the electric charge which is symbolized by the Q used, so it can be concluded that W = Q, the formula for Faraday’s law I is W = e. i . t/F.

• W is the mass of the substance produced in terms of grams.
• e is equivalent.
• i is the current strength in amperes.
• t is the time in seconds.
• F is the Faraday constant, which is 96,500 Coulombs/mol.

2. Faraday’s Law II

Faraday II’s law has a very interesting point, where this law applies to two electrolytic cells with different substance properties. The existence of a different number of zets of electrolysis products so that they appear is directly proportional to the equivalent mass of the existing substances, in understanding this according to the sound of Faraday II’s law.

The sound of Faraday II’s law is that the mass of a substance produced in an electrode that appears during electrolysis (W) is directly proportional to the equivalent mass (e) of the substance. If some electrolytic cells are arranged in series or the same amount of electric current includes the same amount of electric charge.

So that it will bring up the mass ratio of the substances obtained to be the same as the equivalent mass ratio of each substance. The formula for Faraday II’s law is W1 / W2 = e1 / e3, W1 is the mass of substance 1 (grams), W2 is the mass of substance 2 (grams), ei is the equivalent of substance 1 and e2 is the equivalent of substance 2.

This explanation confirms that the application of this law is used to account for the quantitative aspects of the substances involved in reactions in electrolytic cells. In addition, Faraday is also a law regarding electromagnetic induction after conducting an experiment on how a magnetic field induces an electric current.

Discovery of Electromagnetic Induction

Michael Faraday became head of the laboratory at the Royal Institute to replace Sir Humphry Davy who was seriously ill at that time. Six years later Faraday discovered electromagnetic induction by using an induction ring as the first electronic transformer in the world at that time.

In a second experiment, performed in September 1831, Faraday discovered electric-magnetic induction, which is the production of a steady electric current. This discovery later became the principle behind the birth of modern electric motors, transformers and electric generators. Likewise with the discovery of Faraday’s Law which has been explained in detail above.

Prior to 1839, Michael Faraday experienced a problem that made his health decline drastically, namely a nervous breakdown. The scientist’s deteriorating health reduced his research, although he still carried his responsibility as a lecturer at that time until 1861.

Right at the age of 75, the inventor of electricity finally died at his residence in Hampton Court. On August 25, 1867, according to reports Faraday died while sitting in his office. His body was later buried in Highgate Cemetery in North London and a monument was erected as a memorial.

 

Examples of Faraday’s Law Questions

1. Problem 1

The source of the electromotive force is…

a. magnet moving around the coil.
b. electric charge moving around the coil.
c. a stationary magnet around the coil.
d. two permanent magnets around the coil.
e. the interaction of the magnetic poles around the coil.

Discussion:
The electromotive force originates from a magnet that moves around the coil.

Answer: A

2. Problem 2

When Faraday conducted an experiment to prove whether a magnetic field could generate an electric current, a phenomenon occurred where an electric current appeared when a magnet was in a state of ….

a. move.
b. away from the coil.
c. shut up.
d. static.
e. close to the coil.

Discussion:
When Faraday conducted an experiment to prove whether a magnetic field could generate an electric current, a phenomenon occurred where an electric current appeared when the magnet was in motion.

Answer: A

3. Problem 3

The correct statement about the magnitude of the induced emf is…

a. proportional to the magnitude of the magnetic field.
b. Inversely proportional to the magnitude of the magnetic field.
c. Proportional to the change in magnetic flux and inversely proportional to the number of turns of the coil.
d. Inversely proportional to the change in magnetic flux and the number of turns of the coil.
e. Proportional to the change in magnetic flux and the number of turns of the coil.

Discussion:
The magnitude of the induced emf is proportional to the rate of change of the magnetic flux and the number of turns of the coil.

Answer: E

4. Problem 4

What is the equivalent mass for the following reaction Cu2+ (aq) + 2e – Cu (s) if it has, copper (Cu) Ar = 63.5 ?

Judging from the above reaction, it can be seen that there is a change in the oxidation number, namely at +2, so the equivalent mass of Cu is ME = Ar/bioxal = 63.5/2 = 31.75. If the same amount of electricity is supplied to two or more electrolytic cells with different electrolytes, the ratio of the substances released is directly proportional to the ratio of the equivalent masses of the substances.

5. Problem 5

If in the network above a Cu deposit of 5 grams is formed, then how much Ag is deposited on the electrode? (Cu = 63.5, Ag = 108).

Answer:

To calculate the mass of Ag, wag uses the formula provided in the figure above where ME = Ar / oxidation state. While it is known that Cu, wcu = 5 grams. To calculate MEcu and MEag, you must first write down the Cu and Ag reduction reactions as shown below.

If the Faraday I and Faraday II laws are combined, we get w = I xtx ME, then this comparison becomes an equation by adding a factor of 1/96,500 and we get the formula for Faraday’s law w= 1/96,500 x I xtx ME.

6. Problem 6

A coil consists of 50 turns, the magnetic flux in the coil changes by 5 x 10 ^-3 Weber in 10ms (milliseconds) intervals. Calculate the Electromotive Force or induced emf in the coil!

Solution:

Number of turns (N) = 50
Time interval (Δt) = 10ms = 10 x 10 ^-3 seconds
ΔΦ = 5 x 10 ^-3 weber
emf induction (ɛ ) = ???

Answer :

e = -N (ΔΦ/∆t)
e = -50 (5 x 10 ^-3 wb / 10 x 10 ^-3 )
e = -50 (0.5)
e = -25V

So, the Induction Electromotive Force is -25V .

—

Thus the explanation and discussion of the principles of Faraday’s law, starting from the meaning and examples of questions that are easy to work on. sinaumedia makes students love to understand science related to nature, including basic things such as the occurrence of electric currents and these laws in it.

The Hindu-Buddhist Kingdom in Indonesia – Hindu-Buddhist became one of the fastest growing religions in the archipelago in the past. The influence of Hinduism has reached the archipelago since the 1st century AD. The rapid development of Hinduism was followed by the establishment of many Hindu-style kingdoms at that time. Several kingdoms existed around the 4th century, namely the Kingdom of Kutai Martapura in East Kalimantan, Tarumanagara in West Java, the Kingdom of Kalingga on the North Coast of Central Java, and the Kingdom of Bedahulu in Gianyar.

The ancient Hindu kingdom in the archipelago that stands out is the Medang Kingdom because it is known for building the Prambanan Temple. Since then, Hinduism then spread along with Buddhism throughout the archipelago and reached its peak of influence in the 14th century.

Buddhism, on the other hand, first entered the archipelago (now Indonesia) around the 5th century AD, judging from the remains of the existing inscriptions. Allegedly it was first brought by a traveler from China named Fa Hsien. The first Buddhist kingdom that developed in the archipelago was the Sriwijaya Kingdom, which existed from 600 to 1377.

The Sriwijaya Kingdom was once one of the centers for the development of Buddhism in Southeast Asia. This can be seen in the notes of a scholar from China named I-Tsing, who traveled to India and the Indonesian Archipelago, and recorded the development of Buddhism there.

The following is an explanation of several Hindu-Buddhist kingdoms that once existed in the archipelago and had a major influence during their heyday.

List of Famous Hindu-Buddhist Kingdoms in Indonesia

1. Kingdom of Kutai Martapura

Yupa Inscription.

According to a study conducted by Muhammad Sarip (2021) in his book entitled The Kingdom of Martapura in Kutai Historical Literacy 400–1635 , the oldest Hindu kingdom in the archipelago is Martapura (not Martadipura) in Muara Kaman District, not Kutai Kertanegara (established in the 14th century). This is based on the Yupa Inscription or inscribed stone monument which was found in two stages, namely in 1879 and 1940.

Yupa numbered seven, the majority told about the prosperity of the Mulawarman period. Now, the seven Yupa stones are in the National Museum. The classic book entitled Surat Salasilah Raja Dalam Negeri Kutai Kertanegara with a thickness of 132 pages from 1849 is an authentic source for writing the history of the Kingdom of Kutai Kertanegara.

The book was written by Khatib Muhammad Thahir, a Banjar who became the clerk of the Kingdom of Kutai Kertanegara. This book is written in Jawi script (the text uses Arabic letters, while the language is Malay). This book can be a historical source by setting aside the fairy tale part, even though it is classified as literature mixed with exaltation mythology. The original manuscript of the book is currently kept in the State Library of Berlin, Germany.

The finding of the seven Yupa fruits became the beginning of the discovery of the oldest kingdom of the archipelago. Based on Sarip’s explanation, there are three famous names in the Kutai Martapura Kingdom which are mentioned in Yupa. First, Kundungga (not Kudungga) who was written by the Hindu brahmins at that time as the founding father of the kingdom, not the first king.

Second, Aswawarman son of Kundungga, the first king of Martapura. Third, Mulawarman son of Aswawarman, the famous king who brought the glory of Martapura to the point where he was able to donate 20,000 cows to the Brahmins. There is no further record of who will be Mulawarman’s successor.

However, Muhammad Fahmi (2016) through his research entitled The Kingdom of Kutai Kartanegara ing Martadipura and the Role of the King in the Development of Islamic Religion in the 17th and 18th Century Kutai Kingdom mentioned the rulers of the Kutai Martapura Kingdom, among others:

• Maharaja Kundungga Posthumous Dewawarman;
• Maharaja Aswawarman;
• Maharaja Mulawarman;
• Maharaja Sri Aswawarman;
• Maharaja Marawijayawarman;
• Maharaja Gajayanawarman;
• Maharaja Tunggawarman;
• Maharaja Jayanagawarman;
• Maharaja Nalasingawarman;
• Maharaja Nala Parana Tungga;
• Maharaja Gadinggawarman Dewa;
• Maharaja Indrawarman Dewa;
• Maharaja Sanggawarman Dewa;
• Maharaja Candrawarman;
• Maharaja Prabu Mula Tungga Dewa;
• Maharaja Nala Indra Dewa;
• Maharaja Indra Mulyawarman Dewa;
• Maharaja Sri Lanka Dewa;
• Maharaja Guna Parana Dewa;
• Maharaja Wijayawarman;
• Maharaja Indra Mulya;
• Maharaja Sri Aji Dewa;
• Maharaja Mulia Putera;
• Maharaja Nala Pandita;
• Maharaja Indra Paruta Dewa;
• Maharaja Dermasatia.

Furthermore, Salasilah Kutai then revealed the process of the collapse of the Martapura Kingdom with its last king, Dermasatia. Sarip discusses in a separate sub-chapter the expansion carried out by Kutai Kertanegara in 1635 when it was ruled by the 8th king, Aji Pangeran Sinum Panji Mendapa.

In short, there was a war for seven days and seven nights until the two kings stabbed each other, which resulted in the death of Dermasatia. Martapura’s defeat marked its downfall, as well as the annexation of territory by Kutai Kertanegara. Since then, the winning kingdom has completed its name as Kutai Kertanegara ing Martapura.

The Kutai Kingdom era actually ended in 1960, but since 2001 it has been revived as a form of historical and cultural preservation, without any governing authority. Somewhat different from before, the kingdom was named Kutai Kartanegara ing Martadipura. Kartanegara with “a” instead of “e”, Martadipura instead of Martapura.

Regarding this matter, Sarip did not escape reviewing it. Regarding Kartanegara, for him it is not so fatal because “Kartanegara” and “Kertanegara” have the same meaning. However, it is different with Martadipura, who cannot be justified because he changed his name by inserting unnecessary syllables.

The name Martadipura as a change from the word Martapura only appeared in the 1980s. The Regent of Kutai for the 1965–1979 period, Ahmad Dahlan, revealed that the idea came from Drs. Anwar Soetoen, an official of the Level II District Government of Kutai.

Soetoen thought that between the words “marta” and “pura” it was necessary to insert the preposition “di” instead of “ing”. According to him, the preposition “di” has the same meaning as the word “ing” in Javanese Kawi. Dahlan revealed this case in his book about Salasilah Kutai , which was published in 1981.

Sarip in his book also discusses the misunderstanding of the name Kundungga to become Kudungga, which has taken root over the last few years. Equally important, Sarip’s work raises questions about the naming of the museum in Tenggarong which is called Mulawarman, not Aji Batara Agung Dewa Sakti as the founder of Kutai Kertanegara, even though this museum is a former palace of Kutai Kertanegara, not a witness to the history of Kutai Martapura.

Not to mention the addition of the Suwana Lembu statue that welcomes museum visitors which also has the potential to create assumptions that the animal is the mount of King Mulawaman. The Suwana ox is actually a mythological animal mounted by Aji Batara Agung Dewa Sakti.

2. The Kingdom of Tarumanagara

Tarumanagara or the Taruma Kingdom is a kingdom that once ruled in the western region of the island of Java in the 5th to 7th centuries AD. Tarumanagara is one of the oldest kingdoms in the archipelago which left historical records and artifacts around the kingdom’s location. These remains show that Tarumanagara was a Vaishnawa Hindu kingdom.

The word tarumagara comes from the words taruma and nagara . Nagara means kingdom or country, while taruma comes from the word “tarum” which is the name of the river that divides West Java, namely Ci Tarum. Archaeological findings located at the Ci Tarum estuary are extensive baths, namely the Batujaya Baths and the Cibuaya Baths, which are thought to be civilizations left over from the Kingdom of Tarumanagara.

One of the inscriptions used as a historical source for the existence of the Tarumanagara Kingdom is the Ciaruteun Inscription. The location of the inscription is in Ciaruteun Village, Cibungbulang District, Bogor Regency.

This inscription was discovered in the flow of the Ciaruteun River, Bogor in 1863 and is divided into two parts, namely the Ciaruteun A inscription written in Pallawa script and Sanskrit consisting of four lines of Indian poetry or anustubh rhythm (rhythm found in classical Vedic and Sanskrit poetry ) , and the Ciaruteun B Inscription which contains footprints and spider motifs whose meaning is unknown.

According to the caretaker of the Ciaruteun Inscription, the symbol contained in the inscription signifies the valiant and powerful King Purnawarman. This inscription is 2 meters long, 1.5 meters high, and weighs 8 tons.

The literal translation of this inscription is as follows.

First line: vikkrantasya vanipateh

Second line: srimatah purnnavarmmanah

Third row: tarumangarendrasya

Fourth line: visnor=iva padadvayam ||

Its meaning is as follows.

” Here are a pair of (soles) feet, which are like (soles of the feet) of Lord Vishnu, are the soles of His Majesty Purnnawarman, the king of the country of Taruma (Tarumanagara), the bravest king in the world. “

Based on the message contained in the Ciaruteun Inscription, it can be seen that this inscription was made in the 5th century and informs that at that time there was the Tarumanagara Kingdom, led by King Purnawarman who worshiped Lord Vishnu.

The Tarumanagara kingdom was influenced by Indian culture, as evidenced by the king’s name ending in -warman and footprints indicating the power of his era. In 1863, this inscription was washed away by a flood, so that the existing writing was reversed, then in 1903 this inscription was returned to its original place. It was only in 1981, this inscription was protected.

Another news source that proves the founding of the Tarumanagara Kingdom comes from Chinese news, in the form of travel notes of Fa-Hien (explorers from China) in book form with the title Fa-Kuo-Chi, which states that in the early 5th century AD there were many Brahmins and animists. in Ye-Po-Ti (the name for Javadwipa, but there are other opinions which state that Ye-Po-Ti is the White Way in Lampung).

In 414, Fa-Hien came to Java to make historical records of the To-lo-mo Kingdom (Tarumanagara Kingdom) and stopped at Ye-Po-Ti for 5 months. In addition, news from the Sui Dynasty wrote that To-lo-mo envoys had come from the south in 528 and 535.

News of the Tang Dynasty further wrote that To-lo-mo envoys had arrived in 666 and 669. Based on these news, it can be seen that the Tarumanagara Kingdom flourished between 400 – 600, which at that time was led by Purnawarman with jurisdiction over almost all of West Java .

As for the kings who once ruled the Kingdom of Tarumanagara, among others:

• Jayasingawarman (358 – 382);
• Dharmayawarman (382 – 395);
• Purnawarman (395 – 434);
• Wisnuwarman (434 – 455);
• Indrawarman (455 – 515);
• Chandravarman (515 – 535);
• Suryawarman (535 – 561);
• Kertawarman (561 – 628);
• Sudhavarman (628 – 639);
• Hariwangswarman (639 – 640);
• Nagajayawarman (640 – 666);
• Linggawarman (666 – 669).

3. Medan Kingdom

Early records of the Medang Kingdom are in the Canggal inscription (732), which was found in the Gunung Wukir Temple complex in Canggal Hamlet, southwest of Magelang Regency. This inscription is written in Sanskrit and uses the Pallawa script. The contents tell about the founding of Siwalingga (symbol of Shiva) in the area of ​​Kuñjarakuñjadeça (Kunjarakunja), which is located on an island called Yawadwipa (Javanese) which is blessed with lots of rice and gold.

The formation of the phallus was under the command of Sanjaya. This inscription tells that in the past Yawadwipa was ruled by King Sanna, who was wise, just in his actions, an officer in war, generous to his people. After Sanna’s death the country was in mourning, falling into divisions. Sanna’s successor was Sannaha’s son (his sister) whose name was Sanjaya. Sanjaya conquered the areas around his empire and his wise rule blessed his land with peace and prosperity for all his subjects.

The stories of Sanna, Sannaha and Sanjaya are also described in Carita Parahyangan, a text compiled around the end of the 16th century. Broadly speaking, the story from the Carita Parahyangan manuscript has characters in common with the Canggal Inscription.

Although the manuscript appears to be dramatized and does not provide specific details about the period, the name and story theme which are almost identical to the Canggal Inscription seem to confirm that the manuscript is based on historical events.

Prambanan temple.

The period of the reign of Rakai Panangkaran to Dyah Balitung (range between 760–910) which lasted 150 years, marked the peak of the glory of ancient Javanese civilization. During this period, ancient Javanese art and architecture emerged, as a number of magnificent temples and monuments were erected spanning the horizons of the Kedu plains and the Kewu plains. The most famous temples are Sewu and Prambanan temples.

4. The Kingdom of Srivijaya

Muara Takus Temple is considered to have existed during the golden age of Srivijaya, so some historians consider it to be one of the relics from the Srivijaya Kingdom.

Sriwijaya is a maritime empire located in Sumatra, but its power reaches Java, Kalimantan, Sulawesi, the Malay Peninsula, Thailand, Cambodia and others. Sriwijaya comes from Sanskrit, sri which means “shining” and vijaya which means “victory”.

The Sriwijaya kingdom was originally established around 600 and lasted until 1377. The Srivijaya kingdom was one of the kingdoms that had been forgotten, which was then reintroduced by a French scholar named George Cœdès in the 1920s.

George Cœdès reintroduced Srivijaya based on his discoveries from inscriptions and news from China. George Coedes’ findings were later published in Dutch and Indonesian newspapers. Since then, the Sriwijaya Kingdom began to be recognized by the public.

The loss of news about the whereabouts of Sriwijaya was caused by the small number of relics left by the Sriwijaya Kingdom before it collapsed. Some of the causes of the collapse of the Sriwijaya Kingdom include:

• Attacks of the Chola Dynasty from Coromandel, South India (1017 and 1025). This attack succeeded in capturing the king of Sriwijaya and then the Chola dynasty became in power over the Srivijaya Kingdom. As a result of this attack, Srivijaya’s position in the archipelago began to weaken;
• The emergence of the Malay Kingdom, Dharmasraya. After the weakening of the power of the Chola Dynasty, the Dharmasraya Kingdom emerged which took over the Malay Peninsula and also suppressed the existence of Srivijaya;
• Another reason that led to the collapse of Sriwijaya was the war with other kingdoms such as Singasari, Majapahit and Dharmasraya. Aside from being the cause of the collapse of Sriwijaya, this war also caused many Sriwijaya relics to be damaged or lost, so that their existence was forgotten for several centuries.

The development of Buddhism during the Sriwijaya period can be known based on I-Tsing’s report. Before conducting studies at Nalanda University in India, I-Tsing made a visit to Sriwijaya. Based on I-tsing’s records, Sriwijaya was home to Buddhist scholars and became a center for learning Buddhism.

This proves that during the Sriwijaya Kingdom, Buddhism developed very rapidly. In addition, I-tsing also reported that in Sriwijaya there were Theravada (sometimes called Hinayana) and Mahayana Buddhist schools. Buddhism in Sriwijaya was further influenced by the Vajrayana school from India.

The rapid development of Buddhism in Sriwijaya was also supported by a Buddhist professor in Sriwijaya, namely Sakyakirti. The name Sakyakirti comes from I-tsing who met him during a stopover in Sriwijaya. Apart from the Buddhist Grandmaster, I-tsing also reported that there is a Buddhist school that has good relations with Nalanda University, India, so that there are quite a number of people studying Buddhism in this kingdom. In his notes, I-tsing also wrote that there were more than 1,000 priests studying Buddhism in Sriwijaya.

5. The Kingdom of Kadiri

Not much is known about the early days of the Kadiri or Panjalu Kingdoms. The inscription of Turun Hyang II (1044) issued by the Kingdom of Janggala only reported that there was a civil war between the two sons of Airlangga.

At the end of November 1042, Airlangga was forced to divide his kingdom because his two sons competed for the throne. The son named Sri Samarawijaya got a western kingdom called Panjalu and its center was in a new city, namely Daha. As for his son, Mapanji Garasakan, he got an eastern kingdom called Janggala and its center was in the old city, namely Kahuripan.

According to Nagarakretagama, before it was split into two, the kingdom led by Airlangga was already called Panjalu and its center was in Daha. Thus, the Janggala Kingdom was born as a splinter from Panjalu. Meanwhile, Kahuripan is the name of the old city that was abandoned by Airlangga and later became the capital of Janggala.

At first, the name Panjalu or Pangjalu was indeed more often used than the name Kadiri. This can be found in the inscriptions published by the kings of Kadiri. The name Panjalu is also known as Pu-chia-lung in the Chinese chronicle Ling wai tai ta (1178). The name “Kediri” or “Kadiri” itself comes from the Sanskrit word, khadri, which means pacé or Morinda citrifolia (noni).

Sri Jayabhaya photo illustration.

When ruled by Sri Jayabhaya, Panjalu experienced its heyday. The territory of this kingdom covered all of Java and several islands in the archipelago, even to the point of defeating the influence of the Sriwijaya Kingdom.

Jayabhaya is also entrusted with writing predictions in the Javanese tradition known as the Jayabaya Term or Jayabaya Prophecy. This prediction is known among the Javanese people and has been preserved for generations by the poets.

The main origin of Jayabaya’s Fiber Prediction can be seen in the Musasar Book composed by Sunan Giri Prapen. Even though there are many doubts about its authenticity, the first stanza of the book says that Jayabaya made these predictions.

6. The Kingdom of Singhasari

Singhasari Temple was built as a place of worship for Kertanegara, the last king of the Singhasari Kingdom.

Based on the Kudadu Inscription, the official name of the Singhasari Kingdom is the Tumapel Kingdom. According to Nagarakretagama, the capital of the Tumapel Kingdom was named Kutaraja when it was first founded in 1222.

In 1253, King Wisnuwardhana initially appointed his son Kertanagara as yuwaraja (crown prince) and changed the name of the royal capital to Singhasari. The name Singhasari, which is the name of the capital city, is even more famous than the name Tumapel.

This is what made the Tumapel Kingdom also known as the Singhasari Kingdom. The name Tumapel also appears in Chinese chronicles from the Yuan Dynasty with the spelling Tu-ma-pan.

Based on information at Pararaton, Tumapel was originally just a subordinate area of ​​the Panjalu Kingdom. The person who served as Akuwu (equivalent to sub-district head) of Tumapel at that time was Tunggul Ametung. He was killed by means of trickery by his own bodyguard named Ken Arok, who later became the new Akuwu. Ken Arok also married the wife of Tunggul Ametung named Ken Dedes. Ken Arok then intended to release Tumapel from the rule of the Kadiri Kingdom.

In 1254, there was a feud between Kertajaya, king of the Kadiri Kingdom, and the Brahmins. The brahmins then joined forces with Ken Arok who made himself the first king of Tumapel with the title Sri Rajasa Sang Amurwabhumi. The war against the Kadiri Kingdom erupted in Ganter Village which was won by Tumapel’s side.

Nagarakretagama also mentions the same year for the founding of the Tumapel Kingdom, but does not mention Ken Arok’s name. In the manuscript, the founder of the Tumapel kingdom was named Ranggah Rajasa Sang Girinathaputra who succeeded in defeating Kertajaya, the king of the Kadiri Kingdom.

The Mula Malurung inscription on behalf of Kertanagara in 1255 then stated that the founder of the Tumapel Kingdom was Lord Shiva. This name is probably the posthumous title of Ranggah Rajasa, because in Nagarakretagama the spirit of the founder of the Tumapel Kingdom is worshiped as Shiva.

Apart from that, Pararaton also mentioned that Ken Arok first used the nickname Bhatara Shiva before advancing in the war against the Kadiri Kingdom.

7. The Majapahit Empire

Majapahit is an ancient kingdom in Indonesia that existed from around 1293 to 1500 AD. This kingdom reached its peak of glory during the reign of Hayam Wuruk who ruled from 1350 to 1389. The Majapahit kingdom was the last Hindu-Buddhist kingdom that ruled the Malay Peninsula and was considered as one of the largest countries in the history of Indonesia.

Majapahit left many holy places, remnants of religious ritual facilities at that time. These sacred buildings are known as temples, holy baths (pertirtan) and hermitage caves. Most of the abandoned buildings are of the Shiva religion and a few are Buddhist, namely Candi Jago, Bhayalangu, Sanggrahan, and Jabung. Other relics from this kingdom are Kakawin Nagarakretagama, Arjunawijaya, and Sutasoma.

During the reign of Raden Wijaya (Kertarajasa), there were two Shiva and Buddhist high religious officials, namely Dharmadyaksa ring Kasiwan and Dharmadyaksa ring Kasogatan , then five Shiva officials under him were called Dharmapapati or Dharmadihikarana .

During the Majapahit era, there were two books outlining the teachings of Mahayana Buddhism, namely the Sanghyang Kamahayanan Mantrayana which contained teachings aimed at ordained monks, and the Sanghyang Kamahayanikan which contained a collection of teachings for a person to achieve release.

The main teaching in Sanghyang Kamahayanikan is to show that the various forms of renunciation are basically the same. It seems that the syncretism of the writer Sanghyang Kamahayanikan is reflected in Shiva’s identification with Buddha and calls him “Shiva-Buddha”, no longer Shiva or Buddha, but Shiva-Buddha as the highest consciousness.

Syncretism in the Majapahit era reached its peak in 1292 – 1478. It seems that at that time the Hindu-Shiva, Hindu-Vishnu and Buddhist schools could coexist. All three are seen as various forms of the same truth.

Shiva and Vishnu are seen as having the same value and are described as “Harihara”, i.e. an image (statue) of half Shiva and half Vishnu. Shiva and Buddha are seen as the same. Based on Mpu Tantular’s Kakawin Arjunawijaya Book, it is said that when Arjunawijaya entered the Buddhist temple, the pandhitas explained that the Jinas from all over the world depicted on the statues were the same as Shiva’s incarnations.

Vairocana is the same as Sadasiwa who occupies the middle position. Aksobya is the same as Rudra who occupies the eastern position. Ratnasambhava is the same as Brahma who occupies the southern position, Amitabha is the same as Mahadeva who occupies the western position and Amogasiddhi is the same as Vishnu who occupies the northern position. Therefore, the monks say there is no difference between Buddhism and Shiva.

Furthermore, in the Kunjarakarna Book it is stated that no one, both followers of Shiva and Buddha can get liberation if he separates the real one, namely Shiva-Buddha.

The renewal of the Shiva-Buddhist religion during the Majapahit era was seen, among other things, in the way of honoring the king and his family who died in two temples with different religious characteristics. This can be seen in the first king of Majapahit, namely Kertarajasa, who was worshiped in Sumberjati (Simping) Temple as a form of Shiva (Siwawimbha) and in Atahpura as Buddha.

Apart from that, the second king of Majapahit, Jayabaya, was also honored in Shila Ptak ( red. Sila Petak) as Vishnu and in Sukhalila as Buddha. This shows that belief in the highest reality in Shiva and Buddhism is no different.

Although Buddhism and Hinduism have spread in East Java, it seems that ancestral beliefs still play a role in people’s lives. This is indicated by the structure of the temple in which there is a place of worship of the ancestors, in the form of a megalith stone, which is placed on the highest terrace of the holy place.

After the Majapahit Empire suffered a setback at the end of the reign of King Brawijaya V (1468 – 1478) and collapsed in 1478, Buddhism and Hinduism were gradually replaced by Islam.

—

So, that’s information about the Famous Hindu-Buddhist Kingdom in Indonesia . The history of the Archipelago in the era of the Hindu-Buddhist Kingdom developed due to trade relations between the Archipelago and foreign countries, such as India, China and the Middle East. Since the arrival of Hinduism and Buddhism, the prehistoric people of the Archipelago who previously had animistic and dynamism beliefs turned to embrace Hinduism and Buddhism. 

• The Founder of the Kutai Kingdom: History, Heyday, and Legacy
• The Founder of the Majapahit Empire: History and the First King
• The Founder of the Singasari Kingdom: Origins and a Brief History
• History of the Founders of the Sriwijaya Kingdom and Their Lineages
• History of the Kingdom of Sunda and its Legacy

Fall Flower Song: Song Lyrics, Meaning and Profile of the Creator – Every time we welcome a certain national day, it is definitely not uncommon for several national TV or radio stations to play national anthems on social media. Like the song ‘Indonesia Raya’ which is popular every time it enters August because it coincides with the momentum of Independence Day.

Apart from that, there is the song ‘Our Mother Kartini’ which is highly recommended every Kartini Day celebration at the end of April. As well as there are many other songs with nationalism nuances that have a close connection with Indonesia’s historical moments. But did you know that many people are still not familiar with the obligatory anthem and the national anthem.

Even some people still can’t tell the difference between the two types of songs. The anthem is a song whose meaning in the lyrics is a condition for national values ​​and this song has become one of the symbols of the nation and state of Indonesia.

The song ‘Indonesia Raya’ is a mandatory anthem regulated in Law number 24 of 2009 concerning the Flag, Language and National Emblem, as well as the National Anthem. Therefore, in every official event or certain ceremony this song must be sung as a series of events.

Meanwhile, the national anthem is a song whose lyrics contain the values ​​of nationalism and patriotism. This type of song was indeed created to evoke the spirit of nationalism and instill love for the country. This song also usually contains lyrics that invite people to remember the struggles of the heroes in the hope that they can give encouragement to the nation’s spirit in the future.

There are many examples of national songs. Like the song ‘Berkibarlah Benderaku’ composed by Ibu Sud, it tells about pride in the red and white flag as the national symbol. Several national songs are also closely related to historical events, such as the song by Ismail Marzuki ‘Halo-Halo Bandung’ which contains the struggle of the people against the colonialists during the Bandung Sea of ​​Fire incident.

In general, the national anthem also invites everyone to remember the struggles of the heroes, one of which is Ismail Marzuki’s other work entitled ‘Autumn Flowers’. This song has very deep lyrics about the struggle of the heroes and their important role for the nation’s independence. Therefore, the feeling of loss and appreciation for their struggle is something that everyone who enjoys the fruits of their struggle should do.

Lyrics and Chords of Fall Flowers 

[Verses]

Am F Am

How my heart is not sad

E Dm F E

Has fallen.. my hero

Dm G C

How my heart will not be sad

G F#m G E

Servant left alone

Am F Am

Who is now the solace

E Dm F E

Nan is loyal.. and officer

Dm G C

Who is now the hero of the heart

G C

True defender of the nation

[Chorus]

G C

My hero has fallen

G E Am

Cash has pledged filial piety

G C

Falling one grows a thousand

G C E

Homeland glorious sacred..

Am F Am

My flowers fall in the dedication garden

E Dm F E

on the day you wake up motherland

Dm G C

Fragrant, longing for juice

G C E

Homeland glorious magic

[Interlude]

Am GCA Dm A Dm

Dm Em F Em Am

[Chorus]

G C

My hero has fallen

G E Am

Cash has pledged filial piety

G C

Falling one grows a thousand

G C

Homeland glorious sacred..

G C

My hero has fallen

G E Am

Cash has pledged filial piety

G C

Falling one grows a thousand

G C E

Homeland glorious sacred..

Am F Am

How my heart is not sad

E Dm F E

Has fallen.. my hero

Dm G C

How my heart will not be sad

G G C

Servant left alone

Meaning of Fall Flower Song

The song Autumn Flowers  has a deep meaning about nationalism and respect for the services of heroes. This song was made to commemorate every hero who fell on the battlefield while fighting for Indonesian independence. As this song was released right after Indonesia’s independence was proclaimed.

Each of the lyrics of this autumn flower song contains sadness for the loss of the heroes who have risked their lives for the nation’s future. This part of the song opens with a fragment of the lyrics ‘ How my heart will not grieve, my hero has fallen ‘. Describes the feelings of someone who is faced with the fact that someone who is loved and loved is facing the divine bosom.

The word ‘ fall ‘ in the lyrics is synonymous with the story of warriors who died on the battlefield. They became heroes for the Indonesian people because they fought for independence and dared to risk their lives. In the next lyrics, ” How my heart will not be sad, I am left alone “.

In this section and the two previous lines of lyrics, it describes sadness over the loss of a loved one. The departure of someone who is loved, especially if he is a beloved husband or wife, of course this incident will leave a sad feeling of loneliness. Like most couples during the struggle for independence, many women were abandoned by their husbands to fight against the colonialists.

Until finally not a few of them died and their wives and families were afflicted with loneliness after their spouses or family members had left forever. The meaning of this fragment is still continued in the next lyrics. ‘ Who is now the solace, the loyal and the officer, who is now the hero of the heart, the defender of the nation ‘.

These four lines of lyrics emphasize the importance of the presence of those who died on the battlefield, and it is not easy to find replacements. The impact of the departure of loved ones touches personal aspects as well as in the broader context as a nation. Personally, when a loved one leaves, there are no more loyal and courageous people (officers) to look after their partner, no one who can comfort them when they are sad.

A wife is abandoned by a husband who loves her, as well as children whose parents are their protectors. And likewise in the context of the nation’s society, the death of war fighters means that the Indonesian people have lost people who have fought with a sincere heart.

The figure of a true hero against the invaders and mortgaged his life for the sake of the nation. The dedication and loyalty of the freedom fighters were a valuable asset at that time, so their departure was everyone’s deep sadness.

In the next four lines of the lyrics ‘ My hero has fallen, Cash has promised service, One has fallen and a thousand has grown, Tanah Air Jaya Sakti ‘ emphasizes that everything the freedom fighters have done is for the benefit of the nation’s future.

The fragment in the lyrics of ‘ Death One Grows a Thousand’ implies a deep meaning about the struggle that will produce a worthy result. When thousands or even millions of lives were sacrificed, there was new hope for Indonesian independence.

That’s the reality, the loss of something may be a prelude to the emergence of something else. This message served as a reminder not only for the Indonesian people, who at that time were rearranging their post-colonial life, but also messages that were still applicable in today’s life. The bad situation that befell is not the end of everything, everything must rise to prepare for new hope.

In the last four lines, ” My flowers fall in the devotional garden, On the mother’s day, Fragrant fragrance adds essence, Jaya Sakti homeland “, means the sincerity and generosity of those left behind.

Thousands of people who had to die for independence did not die in vain, but left with a very meaningful future impact. The struggle of the heroes has left a spirit of nationalism for the nation, about the struggle for Indonesian identity.

This song has a very deep meaning about respect for the services of heroes. Because of this, the song ‘Autumn Flowers’ is often played every Hero’s Day commemoration which falls on November 10th. One of them was the song ‘Autumn Flowers’ which was also sung as an accompaniment to the departure of Indonesia’s third president, BJ Habibie who died in September 2019.

A few days after his death, this song is sung every morning apple together with the flag flying at half-mast as a form of respect for his services. Nuances of sadness are not only expressed through each of the song’s lyrics, but also a gentle melody that will instantly hypnotize anyone who listens to remembering sadness.

Plus the message of the song is deep, making anyone who hears it instantly be carried away by the atmosphere in the song. A sad mood, shrouded in gray clouds because of the departure of people who have made great contributions. At the same time, bringing about a mood full of respect and gratitude, thanks to the struggle of Indonesian heroes, they can achieve independence, which will soon celebrate its 76th year.

Historically, this song was released at the same time as the Surabaya battle. The first battle that took place after the proclamation of independence on August 17, 1945. The event involved freedom fighters who are often referred to as ‘ Arek-Arek Suroboyo ‘ against the Allied troops which occurred for several days in early November.

There were thousands of freedom fighters who died in the battle, and it was from this incident that November 10 was commemorated as Heroes’ Day. And the song ‘Autumn Flowers’ is often used to commemorate the departure of these fighters.

Even so, this song is not specifically an accompaniment to the deaths of thousands of heroes in the events of the November 10 battle. But also respect for the thousands of lives that were lost during the early years after the proclamation which was still filled with chaos.

After President Soekarno read out the text of the proclamation on August 17, it does not mean that the Netherlands just left Indonesia. The struggle for Indonesian independence continues, because the Dutch kingdom and its allies, England are still in Indonesia and have not recognized Indonesian independence. Even after the defeat of Japan, the Dutch apparently intended to re-occupy Indonesia.

This created a number of instability both from the political and social aspects, and triggered a number of bloody events such as what happened in Surabaya as well as other battles in the regions. Four years after the proclamation, the Dutch government finally recognized Indonesian sovereignty in 1949.

However, those four years were not a short time for the Indonesian people to defend their sovereignty. A number of important agreements were even made during this period in order to dampen the military ceasefire, such as the Renville agreement and the Linggarjati agreement.

The attitude of the Netherlands and its allies that did not comply with the two agreements which then contributed to various bloody events in those years. And even though it only lasted a few years, the chaos that occurred in the early days of Indonesia’s independence has claimed hundreds of thousands of lives, especially from civilians. Not only soldiers, the struggle of the people is the struggle of heroes who also deserve the highest respect.

As the years go by, this song can have a broader meaning. Along with the meaning of the word ‘ hero ‘ which is not only defined as people involved in independence, but also everyone who fights for the progress of the nation. Because of that, the song ‘ Death Flowers’ can be the right choice to pay homage to anyone who contributes to society today.

Profile Ismail Marzuki Composer song Fall Flowers

The song ‘ Leave Flowers ‘ was composed by Ismail Marzuki in 1945, not long after Indonesia officially became independent. He is known as an artist who has composed many national songs, as well as a radio announcer at Radio Rakyat Indonesia (RRI). His name was later named a national hero since 2004.

The man who was born on May 11, 1914 in Jakarta, has been involved in the world of art since he was small. Ismail Marzuki was born to an artist father, who was a tambourine and harp player in a group of keroncong musical instrument players. Gradually, entering his teenage years he began to interact more and more with the music artists in his environment.

In 1931, when he was 17 years old, Ismail joined a famous Keroncong music band at that time, Lief Java as a saxophone and guitar player. This orchestral music group existed when it was still in the Dutch colonial era, its headquarters were in the Kemayoran area, Jakarta.

Ismail along with other group members were often invited to perform keroncong music on a radio station made by the Dutch at that time, NIROM, which later became the forerunner of RRI. It was through his appearance at NIROM that Ismail Marzuki’s band began to attract a lot of fans.

Ismail’s first work was a song called ‘ O Sarinah ‘. This song was made when he was 17 years old and the lyrics are in Dutch. He and his group also appeared in a film called ‘ Terang Bulan ‘, in which he was also tasked with making several songs for film accompaniment.

Meanwhile, several other works which are also well-known as the national anthem are songs entitled ‘ Rayuan Pulau Kelapa’, ‘Indonesia Pusaka’, ‘Halo-Halo Bandung’ and a keroncong music ‘ A Pair of Ball Eyes ‘. It is estimated that there are more than 250 pieces of music that he has created. Most of these songs contain lyrics with a nuanced message of nationalism, along with a solemn and sad tone.

His family life is not far from music. He married his wife, Eulis Zuraidah in 1940. Eulis was a well-known singer from a keroncong band in Bandung. it was from there that Ismail began to know Eulis.

Apparently Ismail, who was also in the group, was attracted to Eulis and they decided to get married. From the results of their marriage, the two had an only daughter named Rachmi Aziyah. This artist and national hero later died at the age of 44.

He apparently struggled with a long-standing lung disease. After his departure, the Jakarta government under Governor Ali Sadikin then created Taman Ismail Marzuki in 1968. This 9-hectare park was originally a zoo area before being moved to Ragunan. Its construction was meant to commemorate the services of the Hero who had created many monumental works.

So, that’s an explanation of the song Autumn Bunga, which is one of the national anthems that Sinaumed’s needs to know. The song that we often sing at school or celebrate Heroes’ Day seems to have a philosophical meaning. As a generation of a good nation, we need to understand the national anthems so that we can interpret them in the life of the nation and state.

Also read other articles related to “Song of Fall Flowers” :

• Traditional musical instruments
• Melodic Musical Instruments
• Rhythmic Instruments
• Music Genres
• Kinds of Traditional and Modern Musical Instruments

Factors Causing Poverty – Poverty is one of the social problems that is always present in developing countries like Indonesia. Poverty is considered as one of the social problems that is difficult to describe, if it is not addressed immediately and find the root causes of poverty.

Poverty in general is a condition of a person’s economic inability to be able to meet the average standard of living of the people in an area. The condition of inability to meet these needs is characterized by the low ability of a person’s income to be able to meet basic needs such as clothing, food and shelter.

Some experts express their opinion regarding the definition of poverty. In addition, poverty also occurs because there are several causes that drive this phenomenon.

Definition of Poverty According to Experts

Previously, the definition of poverty in general was explained, several experts also expressed their opinions regarding the meaning of poverty, along with the definition of poverty according to experts.

Soerjono Soekanto, argues that poverty is a condition when an individual or a group of individuals is unable to maintain himself or herself with the standard of living of groups in society, and are unable to utilize their energy, mental and physical to achieve the standard of living of the group.

Gillin and Gillin expressed their opinion that poverty is a condition when an individual cannot maintain a scale of life that is high enough to be able to provide physical and mental efficiency, so that he and his family can carry out their functions properly in accordance with good societal standards. Due to inadequate income or unwise spending.

Reitsma and Kleinpenning, argue that poverty is the inability of an individual to be able to fulfill his life needs, both material needs and non-material needs.

Suparlan revealed that poverty is a standard or a low standard of living for a person, due to material shortages compared to the standard of living in the surrounding community.

In contrast to other opinions, according to Friedman poverty is an inequality of opportunities that a person gets to be able to formulate social power in the form of assets, financial resources, goods or services, socio-political organizations, social networks, skills, knowledge and information.

According to Ellis, poverty is a multidimensional phenomenon that can be studied in economic as well as social and political dimensions.

Hall and Midgley said that poverty is a condition of material and social deprivation that causes an individual to live below a decent standard of living, or it can be said that poverty is a condition of relative deprivation when compared to other individuals in the community.

The last expert who argues about the notion of poverty is Syaifudin who says that poverty is a way of thinking of someone who views poverty as an absolute symptom and a relative symptom.

Syaifudin divides this way of thinking about poverty into two, namely a cultural way of thinking or perspective and a structural perspective.

From some of the expert opinions above, it can be concluded that poverty is a condition, in which an individual is unable to meet his basic needs due to factors that affect the individual, making it difficult to get the same opportunities as other individuals.

Read more: Definition of Poverty

Factors Causing Poverty

As previously explained, poverty is a social problem that is difficult to unravel and often occurs in developing countries like Indonesia. Poverty can occur because there are several factors that cause poverty.

The following are the factors that cause poverty.

1. High Population Growth Rate

A high birth rate in an area can result in a country’s population growth rate being greater.

Thus, it can cause the available jobs to be limited to be able to recruit people who need jobs to get a salary so they can buy their basic needs.

In addition, when the population growth rate is high but not comparable to the economic growth rate. This will lead to an increase in poverty.

2. Unemployment Society Increases

A high population growth rate can cause jobs in a country to be limited. Thus, the unemployment rate in the area will increase. The more people are unemployed, the poverty rate will increase.

3. Low Education

Individuals who have low education tend not to have sufficient skills, insight or knowledge to get a job.

Thus, people with low education cannot compete with people who have higher education in the world of work and business. This is what makes people with low education less competitive and causes unemployment and poverty to increase.

4. A Natural Disaster Occurs

Natural disasters can be a factor causing unavoidable poverty. Natural disasters such as floods, landslides and tsunamis can cause damage to infrastructure and psychological damage to the people affected by the disaster.

In addition, natural disasters can be a cause of poverty, because the people affected by the disaster will lose their possessions.

5. Unequal Income Distribution

Unequal distribution of income can cause inequality in the pattern of resource ownership. Generally, people who have limited and low resources are generally below the poverty line.

In addition to the five factors that cause poverty, some experts argue that poverty can be caused by private property or exploitation of workers. Some experts such as Henry George, Karl Marx argue about the causes of poverty.

According to Henry George, the main cause of poverty is private ownership and monopoly by individuals on land. George’s view emerged, when land ownership has become a measuring tool to see the personal wealth of an individual.

Karl Marx argued that the cause of poverty is the exploitation that occurs to workers who are carried out by capitalism.

Meanwhile, Robert Malthus said that the cause of poverty is because the population tends to increase more geometrically, but food production only increases arithmetically.

Types of Poverty

There are four types of poverty that Sinaumed’s needs to know about. Here’s an explanation.

1. Absolute Poverty

Absolute poverty is poverty which is a condition where the income of an individual or group of people is below the poverty line. So that the individual or group of people will find it difficult to be sufficient and meet their standard needs such as clothing, food and shelter needed to be able to improve their quality of life.

The poverty line referred to in the sense of absolute poverty is the average expenditure or average consumption of an individual to meet basic needs related to the fulfillment of the individual’s welfare standards. This type of absolute poverty is the type of poverty that is most widely used as a concept to determine or define the criteria for an individual or group of people who are poor or not.

2. Relative Poverty

Relative poverty is a form of poverty that can occur, due to the influence of development policies that do not reach all levels of society. So that it can cause income inequality and inequality in welfare standards in the country. Regions that have not received the reach of development programs are known as disadvantaged areas.

3. Cultural Poverty

Cultural poverty is a form of poverty that can occur, due to the attitudes and habits of an individual or a society that generally come from culture and customs which are generally relatively unwilling to improve their standard of living in modern ways. The habits mentioned can be in the form of being lazy, less creative, wasteful and relatively dependent on other parties.

4. Structural Poverty

In contrast to cultural poverty, structural poverty is a form of poverty caused by low public access to resources which generally occurs in a social and cultural and socio-political order that does not support poverty liberation in a country. Generally, structural poverty sometimes has discriminatory elements.

Poverty Impact

Poverty as a social problem can have an impact on the individual and the wider community. Poverty can also have other impacts, here are the explanations.

1. Increasing Crime in an Area

Poverty can be one of the causes of crime. This is because the poor will tend to want to fulfill their basic needs by using any means, including by means of crime. Some forms of crime that can be committed by an individual are fraud, theft, robbery and murder.

2. Mortality Rate Increases

Poor people who are unable to meet their basic needs will find it difficult to get access to adequate health for themselves and their families. This difficult access to health can cause the death rate of a population to increase, especially the death rate of the poor.

3. Access to Closed Education

In developing countries like Indonesia, the cost of education that must be paid by an individual is quite high, so that this will close the poor’s access to education.

In fact, one of the causes of poverty is the low level of education. So that closed access to education can exacerbate the conditions of poverty that exist in an area or country.

4. Increasing Unemployment Rate

Poor people will find it difficult to get access to proper education. Thus, the poor will find it difficult to compete for jobs with rich or affluent people. This is what can trigger an increase in the unemployment rate.

5. Conflicts that Occur in Society will Emerge

Poor people generally will get different treatment from rich people. Examples include gaining access to certain facilities. The gap that occurs in the community will trigger conflict in social life because of the jealousy that arises.

Ways to Overcome Poverty

Poverty is a social problem that will be difficult to unravel if it is not handled early. Poverty can spread to areas that previously had low levels of poverty, because in a few years if poverty is not resolved immediately there will be an increase through other causes of poverty.

For example, in Indonesia poverty occurs due to the low level of education that can be obtained by the community. Because it was not immediately addressed, poverty that occurred due to low levels of education also increased due to other factors such as the spread of epidemics, natural disasters and others.

Therefore, it is important for the government to immediately overcome this social problem of poverty. There are several ways that the government can do to overcome poverty. Here’s an explanation.

1. Update Population Data

The government can update population data, especially to complete data on poor and vulnerable populations who are then categorized as deserving of social assistance from the government.

Thus, government budget funds that have been allocated for social assistance can be channeled to the right citizens and really need these social assistance funds. In addition, after updating the data, the government can increase the social assistance budget and expand the number of beneficiaries to citizens who have fallen into poverty due to influencing factors, for example, the Covid-19 pandemic.

2. Integrate Social Assistance Distribution

In various places, there are various forms of social assistance, differing in the types and amounts measured by the government. However, these differences actually created social tensions in several regions.

The social tension then got worse, because there was a database of social assistance, especially the Integrated Social Welfare Data (DTKS) which was used by the local government and did not include people who were not previously recorded. However, the unrecorded economic condition of the people has worsened due to several factors.

To be able to overcome this problem, the government can update data as in the first solution and integrate the distribution of social assistance, through cooperation between state banks so that social assistance funds can directly enter and be received by beneficiaries.

Integration of the distribution of social assistance funds can simplify the distribution process, and there will be no overlapping beneficiaries.

3. Reducing the Expenditure Burden of the Poor and Nearly Poor

One way to deal with poverty is to reduce the burden of spending on society, especially the poor and near-poor. Especially reducing costs controlled by the government or administered prices.

There are four costs that are controlled by the government and can be reduced to ease the burden on the poor and near-poor. These include water rates for households, electricity rates, LPG prices, and fuel prices.

4. Providing incentives in the fields of agriculture, livestock and fisheries

The government can tackle poverty by increasing incentives for farmers, ranchers and fishermen through product purchase schemes carried out by the government. In addition, the government can also improve logistics routes for agricultural, livestock and fishery products. So that residents who work in this field can increase their production and face the lack of market uptake.

By providing incentives in these three areas, the government will help to secure the availability of national food stocks, especially during times when food stocks are running low and hard to find.

By securing stock availability, the increase in cost of goods can be suppressed. So that people who are almost poor, can still meet their basic needs. Thus, the level of poverty can be reduced.

5. Manage the APBN Carefully

The government needs to manage its state budget carefully, so that it can increase the budget for social assistance that will be provided to the poor and near-poor. By managing the state budget more carefully, the government can allocate special funds for the poor and near-poor in order to meet their basic needs.

Example of Poverty

Here are some examples of poverty according to its types.

• Subjective Poverty: Occurs because of one’s own thinking with the assumption that the individual’s needs cannot be met sufficiently. Even though the individual is actually not poor. Example: seasonal beggars.
• Absolute Poverty : Occurs in families or individuals who have no income. Example: poor family.
• Relative Poverty: Occurs due to the influence of uneven development in society. Example: people are unemployed because of a lack of available jobs.
• Natural Poverty: Occurs due to scarcity of natural resources. Example: residents who are in the region of the African continent.
• Cultural Poverty: Occurs because the individual does not want to improve his standard of living. Example: people in the interior who still hold fast to their customs and do not open up opportunities for modernity, such as the Baduy people.
• Structural Poverty: Occurs because of the social structure. Example: Papuan people who do not benefit from Freeport.

Factors Causing High Population Growth – The cause of population growth is the increase or decrease in the number of population which can be influenced by several factors, such as births, deaths and migration.

As calculated by the population census up to last December 2020, the total population of Indonesia has reached 271,349,889 people, according to what has been calculated by the Ministry of Home Affairs.

The census says that Indonesia is in the fourth position as the country with the largest population in the whole world. Its position is below China, India, and even the United States.

However, the pace of population growth in Indonesia has actually slowed down in recent decades. Reported by Antara, from 2010 to 2020, the average rate of movement of Indonesia’s population growth has only moved by 1.25 percent. This percentage has decreased from the 1971-1980 period which was 2.31 percent.

“One of the reasons for the decrease in the rate of population growth is a government policy aimed at suppressing the rate of population growth through the Family Planning Program which has been implemented since the 1980s,” said BPS head Suhariyanto.

In its own definitive sense, population growth is an increase or decrease in the population. The causal factor is the number of births (births), deaths (mortality), and even migration (migration) between one region to another, as quoted from “Number and Population Density of Indonesia” which has been published by the Ministry of Education and Culture.

Understanding of population growth by Members

Many thinkers expressed their opinions and thoughts on population growth. This is due to population growth is an important thing in a state order. Each country has different needs and capacities at this stage of population growth.

Some of the theories include:

Malthusian theory

Prior to Malthus himself, the idea of ​​population growth was only a reproduction which was an attempt to replace people and people who had died because of the relatively high number of deaths. Some of the views on population prior to Malthusian theory as well as the discordance in practice before and after Malthus’s time.

1. The teachings of Confucius in ancient China in 500 BC stated that the high population growth reduced the output value of production. This teaching also states that the government has a responsibility to be able to maintain the stability of the population and the area of ​​land where the population lives and does activities. So, the solution is by migrating to a place with a small population.
2. Plato and Aristotle had the opinion that the quality of humans in producing goods was more important than the quantity of society itself, especially maintaining the welfare of the people. So the large population is not necessarily efficient in carrying out a production activity.
3. In the 17th century, since the emergence of Mercantilism which spread the pronatalist doctrine which had a view on population growth which was very important because it became an instrument for increasing people’s income. Pronatality itself is a theory which states that the national income is the same as that of all production results minus the wages received by the workforce. Because labor wages at that time tended to fall, so that the labor force itself would rise and countries that had dense populations would benefit.
4. The next idea came from William Godwin, he believed that the food supply could increase drastically with the advent of advanced technology. He also added that this would not cause overpopulation or overpopulation because society would naturally continue to limit births. Meanwhile, poverty and unemployment are not caused by overpopulation, they are caused by unequal social institutions.

Teori Adam Smith

In the 18th century Adam Smith and the Physiocrats argued against the Pronatalist doctrine. These people view that population is not a very vital issue that affects the welfare of a society, but it is the land factor which is very closely related to a level of production.

Adam Smith added that there is a harmonious relationship between population growth and economic growth, in which population growth is strongly influenced by economic growth.

He also said that population growth was influenced by the demand for labor or the demand for labor and the demand for labor was influenced by the productivity of a piece of land.

Neo-Classical Theory

Some of the Neo-Classical thinkers have the view that in the long term economic development will experience a stationary state, namely in a state where the form of the economy will not experience growth but is static. According to classical economic thinkers, this form of high population growth will result in the population doubling in a generation and will reduce the level of development back to a lower term. So as a result, at this level workers will get very minimal wages.

Population Density Factor 

The number of population growth is a rate of increase in a region or country in a certain period of time. Population increase is a change in the total population as well as its increase and decrease which is caused by the following factors.

Below are the factors that influence the density of the population:

Death (mortality)

There are so many factors that cause this death, usually influenced by age, the surrounding environment, where you live, whether there are infrastructure to support life. Examples include food, hygiene, health. In addition to these factors, it can be influenced by major events such as other unexpected natural disasters.

Usually this factor has a low percentage. If the death rate increases, the population number will decrease, but conversely if the death rate decreases, the population number will also increase because the birth rate has increased drastically. Death is the permanent loss of signs of human life.

birth (fertility)

The factor of this birth can be said to be the main factor causing population growth in this world because the average growth of the population is the cause of the high birth rate compared to the death rate because there is still an embedded ideology that advocates having many children.

If the birth can be accelerated with health technology, then automatically the increase in the population can increase drastically due to the increase in the birth rate. Births that increase the population and factors that can inhibit births (antinatal) and support births (pronatal).

Factors supporting birth (pronatality)

Marriage at a young age, because there is an assumption that late marriage will cause embarrassment to the family. Children are often seen as a source of energy to help parents. Furthermore, with the assumption that many children have a lot of fortune and children will be a source of pride for parents.

Factors inhibiting birth (anti-natality)

There is a family planning program that can support limiting the number of children, as well as provisions on the age limit for marriage, for women who are at least 16 years old and for men who are at least 19 years old. There are restrictions on civil servants, namely they are only allowed to have 2 children. Postpone marriage until the end of education and until allowed fatherly get a job.

Migration

Migration is an event of moving a group from one area to another. In many cases, a group migrates to be able to find new sources of food reserves to avoid scarcity that occurs due to population density. Apart from migration, there is another term for population dynamics called mobility.

This definition of mobility has a broader meaning than migration because it includes the permanent as well as temporary movement of an area. A review of regional migration is very important, especially related to density and uneven distribution of the population.

Types of Population Growth

Population growth can be divided into three types, which are explained as follows:

1. Natural Population Growth

Population growth is obtained from the calculation of the difference between birth and death rates in one year which is called natural population growth. Growth is expressed in thousandths. The simplest can be done by observing residents in our environment.

In one year, there are how many births occur. For example, currently the population in area A is 1000 people, then calculating the difference between the birth and death rates will find the population growth rate in area A. For example, if the number of babies born is 40, then the population who died is 20. then using the formula below population growth in the village is 40-20 per thousand, or 20 per thousand or 2%.

The calculation can be used the formula:

P = L – M

P = Population growth

L = Born

M = Dead

 

2. Non-Natural Population Growth

For non-natural population growth is obtained from the difference in the number of people who do immigration (in-migration) and emigration (migration out). Non-natural population growth is called population growth due to migration.

Calculation of non-natural population can use the following formula:

P = I – E

P = Population growth

I = Immigration

E = Emigration

 

3. Total population growth

Total growth is a population growth that is calculated from the difference between the number of births and deaths plus the difference from non-natural growth.

Calculation of the total population can use the following formula:

P = (L – M ) + (I – E)

P = total population growth in one year

L = number of births in one year

M = number of deaths in one year

I = Immigration

E = Emigration

 

The rate of growth of the total population in Indonesia is not too much different from the natural rate of population growth, because the number of migrants (immigration or emigration) will not be so large that the effect will be very small and can be neglected. The growth of the population can usually be expressed as a percentage (%) and is generally calculated for a period of time per year.

In terms of population, there is a term population growth and population growth. Population growth in percent (%) and for population growth the amount will be stated with a certain number. For example, Indonesia’s population increased to 250 million in 2014 with a population growth rate of 1.49% per year.

Birth and death are a major factor in population growth which is strongly influenced by health conditions, environmental quality, and education. Health in the community is very much influenced by environmental conditions and awareness of health through education.

Unkempt environment, slums, factory waste that is above a reasonable threshold, untreated sewers and others are examples that cause various diseases to come. This has an impact on the death rate from an area which can cause the death rate to be high.

The country of Indonesia itself has a population that continues to grow every year. This resulted in the Indonesian state continuing to be active in improving the quality of the population for development purposes. Education is a suitable and strategic way to be able to improve the quality of the Indonesian population.

The total population of Indonesia in 2010 was recorded at 237.6 million people with a total growth rate of 1.49%. If the rate of population growth remains constant, then the figure is 1.49%, so that in 2045 Indonesia’s population is expected to reach 450 million people. The population growth that occurred was far higher than Indonesia’s ideal growth of 0.5%.

China is still considered to rule this world with the largest population at this time. The country occupies the first position with a population of 1.355 billion.

For the country India itself is in second position which has a population of 1.236 billion. Meanwhile, the US is still in third position with a population of 318,892 million. Indonesia is in fourth position with a population of 253.60 million people, followed by Brazil which has a population of 202.65 million (Population Reference Bureau, World Population Data Sheet 2014)

Impact of Population Growth

Rapid or uneven population growth without being matched by the attainment of high quality human resources resulting in the emergence of various kinds of problems in the population. The fast, irregular population has a negative impact on the environment, and all of this is caused by the increasing needs of the growing population.

The following are some of the impacts of population growth:

Chemistry

Poverty is the inability of a person to be able to meet basic material needs at certain standards. This standard is better known as the poverty line, which is the level of spending on basic needs, including clothing, food, adequate shelter.

To be able to tackle the problem of poverty, the Indonesian government is planning an Presidential Instruction for Disadvantaged Villages. This program is executed in two stages. First, the government determines which village has the highest concentration of the poorest population. The number of villages that are left behind is up to a third of the total number of villages in Indonesia.

Second, the government then gathers residents in underdeveloped villages into a shelter under village welfare institutions, such as KUD, farmer groups, and so on. Then the government will provide a budget for each lagging village that can be used by groups there to be able to start businesses that are sustainable, environmentally friendly, even appropriate.

The environment is polluted to meet human needs

Humans certainly have a lot of needs. From clothing, food, boards, with an increasing population, of course, their needs will also increase, one example is the need for paper for printing in offices and schools.

Paper made from trees. Trees are cut down to produce paper for human use. This has been faced by the government, however, if the population increases, of course more trees will be cut down. So that government programs cannot run smoothly due to the increasing amount of paper needed.

Even in dense areas, the denser the population, the more waste continues to grow. The increase in population will also affect the development of government development in Indonesia.

The development carried out in the regions as well as in cities in Indonesia is one of the programs undertaken by the central and even regional governments to be able to advance the country’s infrastructure. The more active development is carried out the lower the quality of nature. This is due to the low level of people’s concern for the natural surroundings and the development carried out by the residents is not in accordance with the appropriate regulations.

 

Clean water is reduced

People who live near the river will use the river water to carry out their daily activities, such as washing, bathing, etc. If someone who lives by the river then throws garbage into the river, the water will be polluted and the living things that live in it will die. Contaminated water will be thought of as trivial, but there will be many losses that can occur, for example there will be floods, as well as various kinds of diseases.

Unemployment

The low level of health and the high rate of malnutrition in the community, in general, can have an impact on the low level of thinking and working skills of the population. So in some developing countries and poor countries, the quality of human resources is still low, both in skills and knowledge. This is what causes the high unemployment rate. Because in general it is difficult for these residents to float in the world of work.

On the other hand, the cause of the high unemployment rate is the low quality of education of the population and high population growth. With population growth that is not balanced with employment growth, resulting in a high level of competition and employment opportunities will tend to decline. To be able to overcome this problem, two efforts are needed, namely efforts to improve quality and create jobs.

How to balance population growth

According to Thomas Robert Malthus, population growth is like a geometric progression (1, 2, 4, 8, 16, …) while the increase in the amount of food production is like an arithmetic progression (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, … ). This of course will be very worrying for the future where we will lack stocks for food.

Things to do to reduce the rapid growth of population:

1. Intensifying family planning and family planning programs, limiting the number of children in a family in general and en masse, so as to reduce the number and birth rate.
2. Postpone the period of marriage in order to reduce the number of higher birth rates and establish a marriage law that contains rules and stipulates the limit between the ages of marriage.
3. Improving the form of health services and facilities for family planning acceptors.
4. Facilitate and improve services in the education sector, so that the desire to marry can be inhibited and make it compulsory to study basic education for the community from 6 years to 12.

Things that must be done to be able to keep up with the increase in population:

• Add to the creation of jobs

With the increase in the standard of living of the people, it is hoped that the trust of many children will be lost – a lot of fortune. In addition, it is also expected to increase the level of education that can change the pattern of thinking in the field of population.

• Increase awareness and education of the population

By becoming more aware of the impact and effects of uncontrollable growth, it is hoped that the general public will voluntarily contribute to the success of the family planning movement.

• Reducing population density with the transmigration program

By spreading the population in areas that still have low population density, it is expected to be able to reduce the rate of unemployment due to the discrepancy between the number of residents and the number of jobs available.

 

Physics teaches us about many things and makes life easier. Making the tools we use in everyday life refers to the laws of physics. For example, nail clippers apply simple plane theory.

Most of us will feel bored and dizzy when studying physics. This is due to the large number of formulas and the complexity of how to calculate the numbers. However, basically physics will be easy to learn by understanding the basic concepts.

One of the physics that is often taught is pressure. Various pressures, uses of pressure, various pressure calculations, and others. So, what exactly is pressure? What does it do? What types?

To find out the pressure, You can listen to the following explanation.

Definition, Formulas, and Pressure Units

Pressure is the magnitude of the strong pushing force. In the SMP and MTs Integrated Science book for Class VIII semester 2 written by Lutfi, et al, pressure is the magnitude of the force acting on each unit surface area. Pressure can occur because of a push on an object in a perpendicular direction.

Pressure is related not only to force, but also to area, temperature, and volume. The international unit of pressure is the newton per unit area (N/m ² ). While the symbol P or p. In addition, another unit of measurement for pressure is Pascal (Pa) which is the last name of the physicist, Blaise Pascal.

Then it can be stated that 1 N/m ² = 1 Pa

The magnitude of pressure is a derivative of the principal quantities, length, and time. In addition, pressure is a vector quantity, but is expressed in numbers or values. Basically the pressure formula as below.

P = F/A

Information:

P = pressure in Pascals

F = force in newtons

A = surface area in m ^{2 units}

Types of Pressure

Pressure has several types as follows.

1. Pressure Solids

In solids that are given a thrust from above, pressure will arise. The greater the area of ​​the press field, the smaller the pressure. Therefore, the factors that affect the amount of pressure are the pressure force and the area of ​​the field.

The formula for the pressure of a solid is as follows.

P = F/A

Information:

P = pressure in Pascals

F = force in newtons

A = surface area in m ^{2 units}

2. Liquid Pressure

Liquid pressure is also known as hydrostatic pressure. Hydro means static water in still water conditions. This pressure occurs because of the weight of the water which makes the liquid exert pressure. The pressure of a liquid depends on the depth of the liquid in a chamber and gravity also determines the pressure of the water.

The formula for liquid pressure is as follows.

P = p xgxh

P = hydrostatic pressure (Pascal or N/m ² )

p = density of liquid (kg/m ² )

g = acceleration due to gravity (10 m/s ² )

h = depth of liquid (meters), calculated from the surface of the water to the depth of the object.

3. Gas Substance Pressure

Earth has a protective layer in the form of an atmosphere. This layer extends up to 1000 km above the earth and has a mass of 4.5 x 1018 kg. The mass of the atmosphere pressing on the surface is called atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure at sea level is 76 cmHg.

Every place has a different air pressure. Gas in a closed space will apply Boyle’s law, namely the pressure and volume of gas are constant or fixed as long as the temperature of the gas is still the same.

The gas formula in a closed room is as follows.

px V = constant

p1 x v1 = p2 x v2

The mixed gas formula is as follows.

(p1 x v1) – (p2 x v2) / (v1 + v2)

Information:

p1 = initial atmospheric pressure (atm)

v1 = initial volume (m ³ )

p2 = final atmospheric pressure (atm)

v2 = final volume (m ³ )

Factors Affecting the Amount of Pressure

The factors that affect the amount of pressure are the compressive force and the area. The following is a more detailed explanation of these two factors.

1. Press Force

The compressive force is a vector quantity that has a direct value. The compressive force is applied perpendicular to the compression plane. The amount of pressure is influenced by the compressive force. The greater the compressive force given, the greater the pressure generated.

For example, when trying to drive a nail into the wall by hand it will never stick. This is caused by the compressive force generated by the hand is very small.

Unlike the hammer, when using a hammer, nails will be stuck in the wall easily. This is caused by the hand-driven hammer having a greater compressive force.

2. Area of ​​Press

The influence of the compressive field area can be seen from the pressure formula. Of which, the compression area (A) is the denominator. Meanwhile, the compressive force (F) is the quantifier.

This means that the compressive force is perpendicular to the pressure force. Thus, the area of ​​the compressive field is inversely proportional to the amount of pressure. The wider a field of pressure, the smaller the pressure generated.

A given compressive force can produce different effects. It depends on the pressure field. The same compressive force will provide greater pressure on the compressed area with a smaller area.

For example in the use of fingers and syringes. Hand needles have a larger surface area than syringe needles. When both are given the same compressive force, the resulting pressure will be different.

When the finger of the hand is given a compressive force to suppress someone’s hand, the pressure exerted is small. This is due to the large surface area. Meanwhile, when the syringe is given a compressive force of the same magnitude to suppress someone’s hand. So, it can penetrate the person’s skin.

This can happen because the area of ​​the syringe press is smaller than the area of ​​the press of the fingers. All of the applied force is concentrated into a very small area on the sharp end of the needle.

The same compressive force on the area with a wider distribution on the fingers will produce a smaller pressure.

The Benefits of Pressure in Everyday Life

Pressure is very useful for everyday life. Here are some tools or objects that use pressure as their working principle.

• Hydraulic pump to help wash the car.
• The soles of the shoes are made flat to apply minimal pressure to the floor so they don’t poke into the floor.
• Small dots under the football boots to put a lot of pressure on the ground. So, ball players can tread firmly on the ground and not slip easily.
• The tips of the nails are made sharp to apply great pressure and easily stick into boards, wood or walls.
• The ax is made sharp to increase the pressure making it easier for carpenters to cut or split wood.
• The blade is made thin to apply great pressure to the object so that it is easy to cut.
• The base of the table is made flat to provide little pressure on the floor. So, don’t stab the floor.
• The tip of the needle is made sharp so that it exerts great pressure and makes it easier to puncture.

Example of a Pressure Problem

The following are examples of questions that can be used as learning references by You in learning pressure.

1. Determine the hydrostatic pressure of water at a depth of 5 meters (ρ = 1,000 ^kg / _m ³ ) and the acceleration due to gravity is 10 ^m / _s ² .

Answer:

Is known:

h = 5 meters

ρ = 1000 ^kg / _m ³

g = 10 ^m / _s ²

Asked:

p _h ……..?

Completion:

p _h = ρ . g. h
= 1,000 . 10 . 5
= 50,000 ^N / _m ² or Pa, or
= 50 kPa (kPa = kilopascal)

2. The pressure of the liquid is 3,000 Pa, the height of the liquid is 30 cm, what is the density of the liquid?

Answer:

Is known:

p = 3,000 Pa

h = 30 cm = 0.3 m

Asked:

ρ….?

Completion:

p _h = ρ . g. h
3.000 = ρ . 10 . 0.3
ρ = ^3,000 / ₃
ρ = 1,000 ^kg / _m ³

So, the density of the liquid is 1000 ^kg / _m ³ .

Answer:

Is known:

h = 2 m

ρ = 1000 ^kg / _m ³

g = 10 ^m / _s ²

Asked:

p _h …….?

Completion:

p _h = ρ . g. h
= 1,000 . 10 . 2
= 20,000 Pa, or
= 20 kPa

So, the hydrostatic pressure at that depth is 20 kPa

4. The height of a city is 300 meters above sea level (above sea level). What is the air pressure in that city?

Answer:

Is known:

Altitude = 300 m

Asked:

Air pressure…?

Completion:

Air Pressure = 76 cmHg – ( ^Altitude / _{100 meters} )
= 76 cmHg – ( ^{300 meters} / _{100 meters} )
= 76 cmHg – 3
= 73 cmHg, or
= 730 mmHg

5. A cylinder with a volume of 2 m ³ has a pressure of 6 atm, then the volume is reduced to 0.5 m ³ . What’s the pressure now?

Answer:

Is known:

V ₁ = 2 m ³

p ₁ = 6 atm

V ₂ = 0.5 m ³

Asked:

p2 _…… ?

Completion:

p.1 . _{_} V ₁ = p ₂ . V ₂
6 . 2 = p ₂ . 0.5
p ₂ = ¹² / _0.5
p ₂ = 24 atm

So, the pressure now is 24 atm.

Factors Affecting the Amount of Pressure – Physics makes a major contribution to human life. Through the laws of physics, many tools can facilitate various human activities. Like the hydraulic jack used to lift a car, it uses the pressure of a liquid from Pascal’s law.

Unfortunately, most people often feel bored when studying physics because there are so many formulas and numbers that have to be calculated or can be said to be the same as mathematics. When in fact, physics can be learned easily as long as you understand the basic concepts.

Well, one of the physics that is considered complicated is pressure. How did it happen? Because in the chapter on pressure, there are calculations, symbols, graphs, and pictures. In short, there are many aspects that need to be understood.

In this article, we will discuss pressure in easy-to-understand language so that Sinaumed’s can better understand the chapter on pressure. Come on, let’s look at the review of the factors that affect the amount of pressure below.

What Is Meant by Pressure?

In short, pressure is the amount of force acting per unit. This is the same as the principle that force can affect motion and changes in the shape of objects. For example, when you drive a sharp nail into a block of wood, the force (force) you apply causes the nail to sink into the block.

In addition to force, pressure is also related to area, temperature, and volume. In physics, the International (SI) unit for pressure is newtons per unit area (N/m2), while the symbol for it is P or p.

To make it easier to understand, try to imagine Sinaumed’s walking on soft ground. Every time you take a step, your footprints will appear on the ground, right? Well, these traces are evidence of pressure from the soles of your feet.

Generally, you’ll want to place your entire foot on soft ground so you don’t sink easily. If you walk on your tiptoes, your feet will sink quickly because the pressure on the ground is much greater.

So in conclusion, pressure is the amount of force exerted on a surface area. Meanwhile, the magnitude of the pressure is highly dependent on the magnitude of the force.

In physics there are lots of terms or laws that you have to remember. To make it easier, Sinaumed’s can use the Physics Dictionary book written by Cahya Budi Kartiawan to find explanations about terms in physics.

Factors Affecting the Amount of Pressure

1. Press Force

The first factor affecting the amount of pressure is, of course, the compressive force. In principle, the greater the compressive force applied, the greater the resulting pressure will be. For example like this, suppose you are repairing a study cupboard that has holes in your house. To close the hole, you have to use wood that is nailed firmly.

So, in order for the nails to stick through the wood and the surface of the cupboard, of course you have to put out a lot of force (force). Because, if you hit a nail with little force, the nail won’t stick properly. In fact, it might come off again after two or three hours.

So, the greater the power (force) exerted by the hammer on the nail, the greater the pressure generated, so that the nail sinks deeper. Vice versa, the smaller the force (force) applied, the less pressure is generated so that the nail will not stick perfectly into the wood.

2. Press Surface Area

In addition to the compressive force, the amount of pressure is also strongly influenced by the surface area of ​​the press. In principle, the greater the surface area, the smaller the pressure. That’s why a sharp knife is easier to cut food than a dull knife, why is that?

This is because a sharp knife must have a thinner edge than a dull knife. In other words, the compressed surface area is smaller. That way, the pressure received by the knife becomes greater, so you can cut or slice food easily.

On the other hand, a blunt knife has a thicker tip, so the pressing surface is also larger. The greater the surface area, the smaller the pressure received. That is why, a dull knife is more difficult to use to cut food.

Types of Stress

1. Pressure of Solids

A solid always has a length and a width which you often use to measure its area. As previously mentioned, pressure is affected by the surface area of ​​the press. The greater the surface area, the smaller the pressure received.

To understand this, let’s use the shape of a duck’s leg and a chicken’s leg as an example. Chickens and ducks have different habitats. Chickens are more likely to walk on solid ground, while ducks are more comfortable with soft ground. That is why the shape of chicken and duck feet is different.

The surface of the chicken’s feet is smaller than that of ducks, the goal is that the chickens can walk nimbly on solid ground. With a small size, the pressure exerted on the ground is greater, so that it can support its larger body.

Meanwhile, ducks need bigger legs so they can walk on mud. The big feet make the pressure received by the mud or soil smaller, so the ducks don’t sink easily.

2. Liquid Pressure

Liquids and gases have many special properties, one of which is the ability to flow. That is why, both are classified as fluids. Well, this fluid will flow when there is a pressure difference. Like air flowing from a place of high pressure to a place of low pressure.

However, liquids at rest also have pressure, Sinaumed’s. This pressure is often referred to as hydrostatic pressure. Hydrostatic pressure is the pressure caused by the force that exists in the liquid on the area of ​​the compressive field. The amount of pressure on a liquid depends on its depth.

So, anything that is a liquid will exert a pressure whose magnitude depends on its depth. Therefore, divers must always wear wetsuits and breathing apparatus.

This equipment can protect them from hydrostatic pressure in the deep sea. Otherwise, the hydrostatic pressure will cause the diver to feel chest tightness or damage the eardrums. This is the reason why many traditional divers who do not use diving equipment experience hearing loss.

a. Pascal’s law

According to Pascal’s law, if you apply pressure to one part of the liquid, then the pressure will be transmitted equally in all directions. To prove it, you can prepare a plastic bottle filled with water. Then, tightly close the bottle so that the water does not leak.

After that, make several small holes on the surface of the bottle, then press the bottle firmly. Water will automatically come out through the small hole, right? So, let’s look at the water that comes out and that’s the proof of Pascal’s law.

Now, try to close some of the holes in the bottle, then fill it again with water. After that, press the bottle firmly and see that the water coming out of the hole will get farther away, why is that?

The reason is because the amount of pressure on a flowing liquid depends on the surface area over which the liquid flows. By closing some of the holes, the surface area of ​​the bottle is getting smaller, so the pressure received by the water is greater. Therefore, water can reach far places.

b. Archimedes’ law

A Greek mathematician named Archimedes said that when an object is immersed in a liquid, the object will experience a buoyant force equal to the liquid it displaces. In physics, this is known as Archimedes’ law.

To understand this, try to remember whether you ever carried your friend while swimming or not. If you have, surely you know that your friend feels lighter than when carried on land. Is not it? It’s like the water in a swimming pool helping to lift your friend’s weight.

So in short, because there is buoyancy, your friend’s weight can be reduced, so it becomes lighter than when he was lifted on land.

Archimedes’ law also states that there are three possibilities for objects that are in liquids, namely floating, floating, and sinking. What’s the difference between the three? Let’s discuss them one by one!

1) Floats

An object will float when placed in water if the mass of the water is greater than the mass of the object. This floating state is a state in which some objects are immersed in water and some are above the water.

Therefore, people who cannot swim must use aids such as floats to float on the water. Because, the density of the buoy is smaller than the density of water.

2) Drift

In contrast to floating, an object is said to float when all of its parts are submerged in the water, but not touching the bottom of the water. This situation can occur because the object’s density is the same as the fluid’s density. For example, like an egg dipped in water with a little salt added.

3) Drown

Drowning is a condition in which an object immersed in a fluid enters completely until all of its parts touch the bottom. This condition is caused because the density of the object is greater than the density of the fluid. some of those things, like iron or metal dipped in water.

3. Gas Substance Pressure

The oxygen that you breathe freely on this earth is one of the air particles that is suspended on earth by the force of gravity. The gravitational force itself is a strong force that is invisible and pushes the air down, so the air molecules have weight.

The molecular weight of the air then exerts a force on the earth’s surface, including everything on it. This is what is then referred to as air pressure or atmospheric pressure.

In principle, atmospheric pressure is the total weight of air above the surface at each atmospheric level. This pressure is inversely proportional to altitude. That is, the higher the atmosphere, the fewer air molecules pressing down so that the air pressure decreases.

That is why, the lowlands (coastal areas) have high air pressure and it decreases at higher altitudes (mountain areas). If at the same altitude there is a difference in air pressure, strong winds will appear.

To prove the presence of pressure on gaseous substances, Sinaumed’s can do a simple experiment using a glass filled with water and hvs paper. The trick, first fill the glass with water until it is full then cover the top using hvs paper.

After it is completely closed, turn the glass upside down while holding the hvs paper by hand. Wait a moment, then release the hand holding the paper. The result is that the water in the glass will not spill because the air pressure received by the paper is greater than the water pressure in the glass.

A brief explanation of the types of pressure above is a brief introduction for you. If Sinaumed’s wants to learn more, in the Smart Pocket Book of Physics: Collection of Formulas and Applications for Class 10, 11, 12 SMA / MA compiled by the Scholar Partners Team there is a very complete explanation of pressure.

Application of Pressure in Human Life

After knowing the factors that affect the amount of pressure, then we also need to know what are the benefits of pressure on equipment or things in everyday life. Pressure is widely used as the working principle of various objects and equipment that help human life. Here are some examples and a brief explanation:

1. Hydraulic jack

A hydraulic jack is a tool used to lift a car while changing a flat tire or repairing damaged parts. Inside this tool, there are two tubes. One large and one smaller size.

The large tube is connected to a lever and serves to support the weight of the car. Meanwhile, the small tube serves to drain the fluid into the larger tube.

In principle, the smaller the surface area of ​​the tube, the greater the pressure generated. So, in a hydraulic jack, air is pumped into a small tube and then forwarded to a larger tube. As a result, the pressure on the large tube is strong enough to lift large loads such as cars.

2. Hydraulic lifting machine

Have you ever accompanied your father to a car wash and seen a device that lifts a car so that the underside can be thoroughly cleaned?

The lifting equipment is called a hydraulic lifting machine. The working principle of this tool is quite similar to that of a hydraulic jack. It’s just that, this machine uses oil (liquid fluid).

So, initially air will be pumped into a small tube, as in a hydraulic jack, then the resulting air pressure will be transmitted to a larger tube. Then, this pressure then pushes the oil in the large tube, so that the jack can move up and down.

3. Automatic faucet in water reservoir

If you have a water storage tank in your house, take a close look, surely the tank is placed in a high place, right? What is the reason? Yes, the goal is for the tank to get a lot of pressure, so it can drain water.

The water storage tank does use Archimedes’ law as its working principle. So, inside the tank is actually a float that becomes an automatic faucet, so the float is designed to float in the water.

That way, the float will move up along with the height of the water. If the water is empty, the float will open the faucet to allow water to flow and if the water is full, the float will close the faucet.

4. Submarine

In a submarine, there is a tank whose job is to regulate entry and exit of water, so that the submarine can go up or dive whenever needed. When the tank is filled with air, the submarine will float and surface.

However, if the tanks were filled with water, the submarine would sink into the water. Therefore, when the submarine is about to surface, the water in the tank must be removed and replaced with air.

5. Hot air balloon

A hot air balloon can float in the air because its density is less than the density of the air around it. The density of the hot air balloon itself can be controlled using the air temperature in the balloon.

So in principle, to make a hot air balloon fly high, the density of air in the balloon must be reduced by increasing its temperature. Remember, hot air is lighter than cold air.

Conversely, if you want to go down, the density of air inside the balloon is increased by turning off the combustion engine so that the temperature drops. As explained in the book Basic Physics 7th Edition written by Halliday, Resnick, Walker.

That’s the discussion about the factors that affect the amount of pressure, Sinaumed’s. It turns out that if studied seriously, physics is very close to everyday life, yes. Hopefully the information you get in this article will be useful in the future. See you next time, Sinaumed’s!

If you want to find more books about physics, you can find them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

 

Factors Affecting Gas Pressure – When talking about the pressure of matter, be it liquids, solids, or gases, it must be included in the discipline of physics. Yep, physics is a science that prioritizes experiments and formulas to measure the results.

In everyday life, we often encounter various kinds of substances, such as solids, liquids, and gases. If we describe each of these substances, liquids are substances that have a liquid form such as oil, water, oil, syrup, and others. Then, there are also solid substances that have a hard and solid shape, for example a table. While gaseous substances are substances whose form is gas or air, for example a balloon being blown.

Each substance that has a different shape when subjected to pressure from several factors, the results will be different. This is because basically, both liquids, solids, and gases have different characteristics from one another.

Then, what are the factors that influence gas pressure? What is the most basic difference of the three substances?

So that You can understand this, let’s look at the following review!

Factors Affecting Gas Substance Pressure

Please note, pressure is a force acting perpendicularly on a plane divided by the area of ​​that plane. Well, here are the factors that affect the presence of pressure on gaseous substances, namely:

1. gas volumes
2. Changes in the magnitude of the temperature around it

Gas/Air Pressure

As with solids and liquids, gases, of course, also have pressure. Gas/air pressure is a pressure that moves air masses within a certain unit area. An instrument that can be used to measure air pressure is called a barometer.

The unit for air pressure is millibars (mb). So, the amount of air pressure will be inversely proportional to the height from a place. The higher the place, the lower the air pressure. The opposite is true.

There is an experiment to see if there is pressure in gaseous substances, namely by using a glass filled with water and HVS paper.

The trick is to invert the glass filled with water on the HVS paper. When the glass is turned over, we can see that the HVS paper will hold the water in the glass.

This can happen because the HVS paper gets pressure from the outside air which is greater than the pressure of the water in the glass.

Take a look at the illustration of the following gas pressure!

Look at the following illustration!

If you put an Erlenmeyer filled with hot water and it has been tightly closed with a rubber balloon into cold water, the rubber balloon will be pressed into the Erlenmeyer. This is due to the presence of heat in the gas particles in the Erlenmeyer which propagates towards the cold water.

The movement of the gas particles will be slower until they finally shrink. This shrinkage causes the gas pressure in the Erlenmeyer to be lower than the gas pressure outside. As a result, the rubber balloon will enter the Erlenmeyer due to the gas pressure from outside.

This principle can also be used to inflate a hot air balloon. Yep, the large air balloon can fly because the total density of the air balloon is lower than the density of the air around it.

The density of this hot air balloon will be controlled by changes in temperature in the air in the balloon. Later, there is a pilot whose job is to control the air temperature in the balloon using the combustion engine located under the balloon hole.

When the embers from the combustion engine heat the air in the balloon, the weight of the balloon will become smaller than the upward force, so the balloon can move upwards. Keep in mind that hot air is lighter than cold air. Meanwhile, the upward force on the balloon is equal to the weight of the cold air displaced by the balloon.

If the hot air balloon wants to go down, the combustion engine will reduce or stop heating the air inside the balloon, so that the air temperature inside the balloon can decrease.

Differences in the Properties of Solids, Liquids, and Gases

Solid	Liquid	Gases
Has a fixed shape and volume	Has a certain volume, but the shape is not fixed, depending on the media or place used	Does not have a certain volume and shape
The distance between the particles is very tight and regular	The distance between the particles is more tenuous and the arrangement is not regular	The distance between the particles is very tenuous and the arrangement is not regular
The particles cannot move freely	The particles can move, but are limited	The particles can move very freely
The attractive forces between the particles are strong	The attractive forces between the particles are not very strong	The attractive force between the particles is very weak

Expansion of Gases

All substances, whether solid, liquid or gas, will experience expansion. Expansion is the process of increasing the size (volume) of a material that has a fixed mass.

Well, an example of the expansion of a gas is a balloon that suddenly explodes. Why does a balloon that has been inflated suddenly explode?

The answer is because there is expansion of the gas in the balloon as a result of increasing temperature.

Apart from balloons, there are also other examples of gas expansion, namely a vehicle tire that suddenly explodes. As with a balloon, a vehicle tire that is filled with air too full will experience an increase in temperature, so that the gas in the tire will expand and cause the tire to explode.

Understanding Fact Sentences – Does Sinaumed’s still have difficulty identifying fact sentences? Both in form or example sentences? Exactly, there are still many people who often interpret or determine which sentences are facts and which are not. Ordinary people will find it difficult to distinguish it from opinion sentences because these two types of sentences are often juxtaposed in one particular discourse context. 

Even though fact sentences and opinion sentences have very different application concepts, especially in terms of the intent and purpose of these sentences appearing in someone’s communication. Both verbal and written communication. Sinaumed’s certainly needs to understand and master what fact sentences are because we will often encounter and use these sentences in everyday communication. 

So, if Sinaumed’s is still wrong in defining facts, then there may be a possibility of misunderstandings in communication, for example, we are consumed by hoax news or fake news that sends sentences of facts and opinions in news texts. The following is an explanation of fact sentences, starting from the meaning, characteristics, types, examples, to how to determine fact sentences: 

Definition of Fact Sentences

Talking about fact sentences, it will not be separated from discussing the meaning of sentences and facts themselves. The definition of a sentence in Indonesian is a unit of language consisting of several words that have a certain main idea with the composition of the SPOK or subject, predicate, object, and description. In forming a sentence, you don’t have to have a complete SPOK arrangement, but the most important thing is to have a certain main idea whose SPOK arrangement can be random or reduced and added.   

The definition of fact in a sentence then becomes a trait that shows the form of the sentence or statement in a real situation or event, problem, and discourse context that actually happened. The truth in the fact then creates the characteristics or characteristics of the sentence so that it can display the truth itself linguistically. So facts demand truth to be shown because it has been tested and proven. 

Sentences of fact can then be interpreted as an arrangement of language that is real or actually occurs without the interference of the author’s opinion, opinion, or perspective about the event or phenomenon that is being discussed in the context of the sentence. So it can be concluded that fact sentences can be identified because there are no specific opinion or subjective sentences in the context of the sentence. 

Sentences of Facts in the context of written communication will be found in many news texts from various media. Starting from print media such as newspapers, magazines, bulletins, brochures, and so on, and online or online media such as online news on websites or in the form of videos and graphic illustrations. In practice, news must indeed contain sentences that really happened because it aims to provide information to the public or a large audience. That’s why we can only trust the facts in the news so we don’t get false information. Instead of getting correct information, if we can’t identify facts properly in sentences, we will be misled by the information itself. 

Features of Fact Sentences

To understand the meaning of a fact sentence and determine the sentence, Sinaumed’s can look at the features or characteristics of the facts in the sentence. There are several things that Sinaumed’s can pay attention to in determining whether or not the sentence is factual, such as the following: 

1. There is Accurate Data

The first feature that fact sentences have is the presence of clear data about an event to support the context or intent in the sentence. The form of the data then has various types according to the needs of the sentence. For example, it could be statistics, date and time of incident, statements or confessions, and other things that have been verified. The following is an example sentence that displays accurate data: Based on the 2021 government census, Indonesia’s population will reach more than 2500 million people. 

2. Be objective

A fact can be detected in a sentence if it is objective which states a neutral or impartial statement of one of the objects being discussed. Rather, it provides a general context that has been recognized as true by many parties. Objectivity in a sentence can be determined from the consideration of existing data in an incident context in order to speak according to the facts without giving an impartial judgement. The following is an example of an objective sentence: Based on Komnas Anak records, the number of violence against children in 2019 increased by 10 percent compared to 2018. 

3. Has Really Happened

The easiest thing to identify whether the sentence is a fact or not is to see the sentence showing a situation that really happened. The context of what really happened in the sentence can then be displayed logically or logically thinking that the incident really happened and many pairs of eyes saw and heard the incident. That is why in determining a sentence of fact there are many elements that need to be involved, one of which is the source of the fact that can appear. 

TYPES OF SENTENCES OF FACTS

In practice, Sinaumed’s can find sentences of fact in various forms with specific purposes and contexts. The following are types of fact sentences that Sinaumed’s can find in the use of language in everyday life: 

1. Data Sentences

Data sentence is a form of sentence that contains data to indicate a certain fact in the context of the sentence showing events. The involvement of data in a sentence can be an indicator that the sentence contains facts. The data displayed in the sentence must also have a clear source and legitimacy in order to prove the truth of an incident. Examples of data sentences as follows: 

” The Sangihe Islands region has indicated mineral resources of 3.16 million tons with a gold grade of 1.13 grams per ton (g/t) which can be extracted and is estimated to reach 114,700 troy ounces.”–News source from Tirto.id 2. Sentence Statement Or Acknowledgment

Sentences of statements or confessions of a person enter as sentences that are facts because they provide evidence or legitimacy of certain events that these things really happened. In practice a person’s response can become a fact if presented as the response itself. An article of a sentence displays someone’s clear statement with the symptoms or context of the language they have for a truth. 

For example statements from doctors, experts, practitioners, and so on which can prove that the phenomenon really happened or is a fact. The following is an example of an acknowledgment sentence or statement that becomes a fact: 

” Based on a study by experts at the Mine Advocacy Network (JATAM) states that gold mining is one of the most voracious in consuming water to extract minerals.”— Tirtto.id news source 3. News Sentence

News sentences become sentences that display facts because they are carried over from the nature of the news itself which must provide factual information. The news sentence in question is containing information that proves a phenomenon that actually occurs from news elements, namely sentences containing 5W 1 H ( what, where, when, who, why, How ). The following are examples of news sentences that show facts:  

” Several community groups visited the State Secretariat on Wednesday (29/9/2021) to deliver a letter requesting President Joko Widodo to take action on the removal of 56 KPK employees who did not pass the TWK.”- Tirtto.id news source

Fact Sentence Examples

Here are some examples of fact sentences from various sources that have been proven true: 

1. The government has officially resumed the project for the State Capital (IKN) or stone capital in East Kalimantan-Kumparan.com news source
2. The Institute for Research and Community Service (LPPM) from the Faculty of Social and Political Sciences (Fisip) Halu Oleo University has released voting rights data for the 2019 elections. The data shows that as many as 60-70 percent of persons with disabilities in Kendari City do not cast their voting rights—a source News Kumparan.com
3. The Polish government has sent over 100,000 doses of the AstraZeneca vaccine to Egypt – news source  Kumparan.com
4. Two motorcycle gang members were arrested by the Bojongpicung Sector Police, Cianjur Regency , West Java, Wednesday (29/9) evening for committing robbery—news source Kumparan.com
5. The Head of the South Sumatra High Prosecutor’s Office named three suspects in the alleged corruption case in the distribution of grants from the South Sumatra Province Regional Revenue and Expenditure Budget (APBD) funds on September 22, 2021—news source Tirto.id
6. Muhammad Furqon, a resident of Kampung Bayam, routinely chops vegetable waste to feed his chickens and ducks—news source Tirto.id
7. The Ahmadiyya congregation has lived in Sintang District since 2004 and there are already 76 people from 20 heads of families-news source Tirto.id
8. The riot that occurred in an Ecuadorian  prison on Tuesday, September 28 2021, left at least 100 people dead—news source Tempo.co
9. The Indonesian badminton team managed to qualify for the quarter-finals at  this year’s Sudirman Cup as Group C winners—news source Tempo.co
10. Semarang Tawang Station now has  a statue of Soekarno located in the polder area—news source Tempo.co
11. West Nusa Tenggara Governor Zulkieflimansyah provided free tickets for students, students and vaccinators to watch the Asia Challenge junior motorbike racing championship at the  Mandalika Circuit —source Tempo.co
12.  The Indonesian Fishermen’s Alliance rejects PP No. 75 of 2015 to PP No. 85 of 2021 concerning Types and Tariffs of PNBP in the Marine Fisheries Sector on the grounds that it will be even more burdensome for fishermen during the Covid-19 pandemic—news source Suaramerdeka.com
13. Minister of Social Affairs Tri Rismaharini confirmed that athletes with disabilities at the 2021 National Paralympics Week had undergone vaccinations—news source Suaramerdeka.com 
14. Central Java Kick Boxing   succeeded in becoming the overall champion by winning three gold medals and two bronze medals in the  XX PON exhibition  at the Waringin Sports Hall, Jayapura City, Papua—news source Suaramerdeka.com
15. The Directorate General of Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Law and Human Rights stated that Warkop has the potential to infringe on the intellectual property rights owned by Warkop DKI—news source Assum.co
16. The Ministry of Health issues Circular Letter HK.02.01/I/2529/2021 concerning COVID-19 Vaccination for Survivors dated 29 September 2021—News source Antara
17. President Jokowi has officially signed a Presidential Regulation concerning the obligation of state administrators in carrying out public services to keep the data on the National Identity Number and Taxpayer Identification Number—antara news source

How to Determine Fact Sentences

After knowing the definition, characteristics, types, and examples, Sinaumed’s needs to know how to determine fact sentences. There are several things that Sinaumed’s can observe and do in order to define and determine whether a sentence is a fact or not. The following are things that need to be considered by Sinaumed’s to determine fact sentences: 

1. Understanding the characteristics of the fact itself in a sentence

Sinaumed’s certainly has to understand the characteristics of the fact itself in order to be able to determine that the sentence, both written and written, is a fact. As explained above, the characteristics of a sentence can be said to be a fact if it has accurate data, is objective, and contains events that actually happened with various evidences. 

To determine the proof, Sinaumed’s can use the 5W 1 H formula in the sentence, whether it has been answered clearly and completely or not. If the context of the sentence can logically answer the formula, then it can be determined or said that the sentence is a fact.  

2. Look at the composition or structure of sentences

Sinaumed’s can determine if the sentence is a fact or not by paying attention to the structure of the sentence. Is it complete and clear in providing certain information, namely through the SPOK sentence structure whether it is filled with clear wording or not. If a sentence is even more confusing, in this case it is convoluted in presenting something, you need to be aware that the sentence may contain opinions, not facts. 

Sinaumed’s needs to underline that fact sentences must be clear and to the point in presenting the main idea. So if the sentence structure alone is not correct then it cannot be determined as a fact sentence. 

3. Seeing the Source Who Conveys the Sentence

The sentence becomes a fact if said or stated by the right person. For example, in a fire incident, the statements of sources that are valid are the victims or people who witnessed the incident. So in determining whether a sentence is a fact or not, it can be seen from the source or the person who stated or the author of the sentence. 

4. See the media or platform that contains the sentence

In determining facts, Sinaumed’s needs to trust who produced or those who made the sentence. This shows the credibility of a person, organization, group, and so on in conveying information that really happened. So to determine whether or not the information is true, Sinaumed’s needs to know who produced the facts. 

5. Be Skeptical And Critical In Consuming Information

Determining facts in a phenomenon or problem certainly requires criticality or skepticism to find out the truth. Sinaumed’s needs to be curious so they don’t easily believe and fall for information that isn’t clear. So to determine whether or not a Sinaumed’s information is a fact, it is necessary to verify the data.  

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Well, that’s an explanation of fact sentences, starting from the definition, characteristics, types, examples, to how to determine the sentence. Has Sinaumed’s been able to define and define fact sentences? Apart from being studied in Indonesian subject matter at school, understanding the fact sentence itself is important for someone in communicating and consuming information. In the midst of technological advances like now, it is easier for us to access and control information. 

That is why understanding the concept of sentences in the context of discourse is also necessary so that we can consume correct information and facts. If Sinaumed’s feels that he is still having trouble determining fact sentences or needs a reference for learning Indonesian, then you can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com . Sinaumed’s can find references for Indonesian language textbooks that are in accordance with the curriculum in schools as well as books with a broader perspective on the language, such as the following: Enjoy learning. #Friends Without Limits 

Material for Expressing Intention, Dialogue, & Example Questions – In speaking or interacting, of course, we will find many phrases or expressions. Starting from getting acquainted, offering something to others, inviting other people and conveying a wish.

Not only in Indonesian, all languages ​​certainly have expressions in conveying a wish. In English, this is called expressing intention. To understand what expressing intention is and how to use it in everyday conversation, see the text below.

What is Expressing Intention

Intention is a goal or vision that guides activities, thoughts, attitudes and choices.

Means, expressing intention has the meaning of expressing intentions, hopes or intentions.

This expression includes an expression that has never happened because this expression is still in the form of a plan or hope. To express an intention, the simple future tense is usually used.

1. He will
2. I am going to
3. I am planning to
4. I am thinking of (I am thinking about)
5. I fully intended to
6. Maybe I will
7. I would like to

The following is an example of expressing intention to ask someone about a plan or intention.

1. Will you go fishing with me in the lake? (Will you go fishing with me on the lake?)
2. We are going to practice tennis this afternoon
3. What would you like to do? (What do you want to do?)
4. What are you doing tonight? (What are you doing tonight?)
5. What will you do in the summer? (What will you do in summer?)

Forms of Expressing Intention and Examples

BE + going to + simple verb 

Consider the examples of expressing intention as follows:

1. I am going to my friend’s house tonight
2. The United State Circus is going to be perform in New York tomorrow
3. Are you going to join me in a music contest? (Are you going to join me in the music contest?)
4. What are you going to do this weekend? (What are you going to do this weekend?)

BE + planning to + simple verb 

Consider the examples of expressing intention as follows:

1. She is planning to go swimming in the public pool next week
2. I am planning to knit a sweater for my boyfriend
3. Are you planning to run away from here? (Are you planning to escape from here?)
4. Are you planning to date him? (Are you planning to date him?)

BE + planning on + Ving

Consider the examples of expressing intention as follows:

1. She is planning on translating the Japanese textbook tonight
2. I am planning on fixing my dad’s old car tomorrow
3. Are you planning on playing video games this weekend? (Are you planning on playing video games on the weekends?)
4. Are you planning on running to the hill tomorrow morning? (Are you planning to run for the hills tomorrow morning?)

Would like to + simple verb

Consider the examples of expressing intention as follows:

1. I would like to present my science project at this moment
2. I would like to get a ticket for tomorrow
3. Would you like to discuss the recycling project tomorrow at 7 pm? (Would you like to discuss the recycling project tomorrow at 7pm?)
4. Would you like to come with me? (Do you want to come with me?)

Will + simple verb

Consider the examples of expressing intention as follows:

1. I will make my birthday cake at home
2. We will celebrate our first anniversary by going to the beach
3. Will you attend his birthday party tonight? (Are you going to her birthday party tonight?)
4. Will you marry me? (Will you marry me?)

Would rather + simple verb + than + simple verb

Consider the following examples of expressing intention:

1. I would rather bring my own food than buy food in the restaurant
2. She would rather stay in the house than go out with their family
3. Would you rather buy a new book or buy the old one? (Would you rather buy a new book or buy an old one?)
4. Would you rather live in a country side or live in the middle of town?

Would prefer + Ving + to + Ving

Consider the following examples of expressing intention:

1. I would prefer buying instant food to making a food at home
2. My sister prefers watching tv to playing with her friends (My sister prefers watching tv to playing with her friends)
3. Do you prefer cooking in the kitchen or cooking in the yard? (Do you prefer to cook in the kitchen or in the yard?)
4. Do you prefer swimming in the ocean or in the lake? (Would you rather swim in the ocean or in a lake?)

Intend to + simple verb

Consider the following examples:

1. I intend to visit my grandmother this week
2. He does not intend to continue his studies
3. Do you intend to return home next year? (Do you intend to return home next year?)
4. Do you intend to transfer the property to your daughter? (Do you intend to transfer the property to your daughter?)

Hope to + simple verb

Consider the examples of expressing intention as follows:

1. We hope to see you again soon
2. She hopes to go to college this year
3. Does he hope to repair his car in your garage? (Is he hoping to fix his car in your garage?)
4. Do you hope to have a bigger store this year? Do you hope to have a bigger store this year?

Want to + simple verb

Consider the examples of expressing intention as follows:

1. Me and my sister want to bake a cake for my mom’s birthday
2. I just want to wish you a happy birthday and wish you all the best! (I just want to wish you a happy birthday and wish you all the best)
3. Do you want to talk about it tomorrow? (Do you want to talk about that tomorrow?)
4. Do you want to make a trip schedule for this year? (Would you like to make a travel itinerary for this year?)

Those are several forms of expressing intention, each of which can be further developed. Therefore, in order for you to become proficient at having expressing intention conversations, you should continue to practice every day.

Example of Expressing Intention Conversation

So that you better understand expressing intention, you can listen to some examples of expressing intention below.

Example 1

• A: Could you buy me some meat and vegetables? (Could you buy some meat and vegetables?)
• B: Sure. What are you going to do with them? (Of course. What are you going to do with the ingredients?)
• A: I’m planning to cook vegetables and meat stir fry
• B: what is that for? (What for?)
• A: I want to give it to my mom. She really likes meat and vegetables. So, I intend to cook for her. (I want to give it to my mother. She really likes meat and vegetables. So, I intend to cook it for her)
• B: Wow, that’s cool. OK, I’ll buy them for you. (wow, that’s cool. ok. i’ll buy those ingredients for you)
• A: thanks a lot! (Thank you very much!) 

Example 2

• A: Hey, B. What are you going to do this Sunday? (Hey, B. what are you going to do this week?)
• B: Hey A. I’m going to visit my grandfather in Bandung. How about you? (Hey A. I’m going to visit my grandfather in Bandung. How about you?)
• A: Hmm, I still do not have a plan for this Sunday.
• B: Why don’t you go to the movie theater and watch some cool movies? (Why don’t you go to the theater and watch some cool movies?)
• A: Well, actually that’s a good idea. But, i have to do my homework first. Have you done your homework? (Well, it’s actually a great idea. But I have to finish my homework first. Have you finished your homework yet?
• B: Nope. i want to do my homework tonight. (Not yet. I want to do it tonight)
• A: Shall we do our homework together? (Should we do it together?)
• B: yeah sure, why not. (Yeah, of course, why not)
• A: Okay, awesome! I will go to your house at 6 PM is that cool? (Okay, awesome! I’ll be over to your house at 6pm. Do you mind?)
• B: Yeah cool, see you soon. (Yeah, alright. see you later)
• A: see ya! (See you later)

The book “Smart Strategies for Mastering English Conversation” is easy to understand and practical. This book is very suitable to be used as a reference when you want to practice English conversation because it contains discussions about tenses, structure or vocabulary.

Examples of Expressing Intention Practice Questions

Dialogue 1 

• A: What would you like to do after you graduate from school?
• B: I would like to take an undergraduate program on law education
• A: Are you going to prepare yourself as a lawyer?
• B: Yes, I love studying law. I would like to become a good lawyer.
• A: What’s a nice goal you have
• B: Thank you. What About you?
• A: Well I am going to apply for the English program. I want to be a teacher
• B: wow that’s cool.

Dialogue Question 1

1. What is the expression of asking for intention found in the dialogue?
2. What is the expression of telling intent found in the dialogue?

Dialogue 2

• A: What would you like to do this weekend?
• B: I have no idea about it. What are you going to do?
• A: I am going on vacation with my family.
• B: That’s awesome. I hope i can go with you.
• A: Well, Would you like to come with me and my family?
• B: Are you sure?
• A: Yes, the more the merrier, right?
• B: I think I would enjoy the vacation.

Dialogue Question 2

1. What is the expression of asking for intention found in the dialogue?
2. What is the expression of telling intent found in the dialogue?

Answers to Expressing Intention Practice Questions

Dialogue 1

• A: What would you like to do after you graduate from school? (What are you going to do after graduating from school?)
• B: I would like to take undergraduate program on law education
• A: Are you going to prepare yourself as a lawyer? (Do you want to be a lawyer?)
• B: Yes, I love studying law. I would like to become a good lawyer. (Yes, I like studying law. I want to be a great lawyer)
• A: What a nice goal you have
• B: Thank you. What About you? (Thank you. How about you?)
• A: Well I am going to apply for the English program. I want to be a teacher (yes, I want to take an English program. I want to be a teacher)
• B: wow that’s cool. (Wow that’s so cool!)

Question 1 Dialogue 1

• What is the expression of asking for intention found in the dialogue? (What expressions of asking for intent are found in dialogue?)

Answers to Question 1 Dialogue 1

1. What would you like to do after you graduate from school? (What are you going to do after graduating from school?)
2. Are you going to prepare yourself as a lawyer? (Do you want to be a lawyer?

Question 2 Dialogue 1

• What is the expression of telling intent found in the dialogue? (Does the expression express an intention found in the dialogue?)

Answers to Question 2 Dialogue 1

1. I would like to take undergraduate program on law education
2. Yes, I love studying law. I would like to become a good lawyer. (Yes, I like studying law. I want to be a great lawyer)
3. Well I am going to apply for the English program. I want to be a teacher (yes, I want to take an English program. I want to be a teacher)

Dialogue 2

• A: What would you like to do this weekend? (What are you going to do this weekend?)
• B: I have no idea about it. What are you going to do? (I don’t have any idea about that yet. What are you going to do?)
• A: I am going on vacation with my family. (I’m going on vacation with my family)
• B: That’s awesome. I hope i can go with you. (how awesome! I wish I could come with you)
• A: Well, Would you like to come with me and my family? (Yes, will you come with me and my family?)
• B: Are you sure? (Are you sure?)
• A: Yes, the more the merrier, right? (Yeah, the more the busier right?)
• B: I think I would enjoy the vacation. (I think I will really enjoy my vacation later)

Problem 1 Dialogue 2

• What is the expression of asking for intention found in the dialogue? (What expressions of asking for intent are found in dialogue?)

Answers to Question 1 Dialogue 2

1. What would you like to do this weekend? (What are you going to do this weekend?)
2. What are you going to do? (What would you do?)
3. Well, Would you like to come with me and my family? (Yes, will you come with me and my family?)

Question 2 Dialogue 2

• What is the expression of telling intent found in the dialogue? (Does the expression express an intention found in the dialogue?)

Answers to Question 2 Dialogue 2

• I am going on vacation with my family. (I’m going on vacation with my family)

 

Exploitation is – The term exploitation is now not a foreign thing in society. The word exploitation itself refers to the description of an excessive use of something. An example is the environment, this environmental exploitation refers to the utilization of natural resources without carrying out various repairs for the benefit of restoring the surrounding environment.

Then what is exploitation? What are some examples? And how is it different from exploration? Check out the more detailed explanation below:

Definition of Exploitation

In general, exploitation is an action or activity carried out in order to take advantage and take advantage of something excessively and full of arbitrariness without any responsibility. Generally, this action will then cause harm to other parties, be it humans, animals, and various surrounding environments.

The word exploitation itself is taken from the English language exploitation which means political attempts to use certain objects arbitrarily. The use of this word is also often used in various fields, both in terms of politics, the environment, in social matters and various other things. Simply put, exploitation is an activity that tends to be negative because it will cause harm to many people.

Definition of Exploitation According to Experts

In order to better understand the notion of exploitation, we must be able to refer to some of the income of experts and experts in their fields. Some experts also reveal the notion of exploitation. Some definitions of exploitation based on experts include the following:

1. Definition of Exploitation According to Martaja

Martaja explained that exploitation is an activity of using it in an unethical way for the benefit or good of an individual.

2. Definition of Exploitation According to Joni

Joni believes that exploitation is an act of using other people for personal gain.

3. Definition of Exploitation According to Suharto

Suharto explained that exploitation is a discriminatory attitude or treatment which is then carried out arbitrarily.

4. Definition of Exploitation According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI)

Based on the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), Exploitation is an act of exploitation carried out for personal gain, exploitation, extortion of other people which is basically a form of action that is not commendable and cannot be justified.

Examples of Exploits

Based on the understanding of exploitation that has been discussed previously, it can be concluded that this action is an action that can cause harm, both for the environment and for humans. The following below are some examples of exploitation, among others:

1. Child Exploitation

Exploitation of children is an activity that takes advantage of children full of arbitrariness that can be carried out by the family and society by forcing the child to do something without regard to his physical and mental development. Usually, this action can then be found easily when someone uses a child to gain an economic advantage.

Below are some examples of child exploitation.

• Using children to become beggars or scavengers.
• Utilizing children to then become buskers on the side of the road or at red lights.
• Utilizing children to be able to sell newspapers at red lights.
• Forcing minors to become commercial sex workers (PSK).
• Utilizing children to do various things with the aim of pursuing economic gain or for the mere pursuit of popularity.

2. Animal Exploitation

Animal exploitation is an act that takes advantage of animals to obtain various personal benefits without thinking about the various impacts that will occur on these animals. Currently, there are many people who do not realize that what they are doing can be considered as an act of animal exploitation and this has been happening for decades. Below are some examples of unconscious animal exploitation:

• Monkey Mask, although its purpose is to entertain, in reality this action is a form of exploitation of animals.
• Animal attractions or circuses, this activity is clearly a form of animal exploitation which is then carried out by humans in order to gain as much profit as possible.

3. Exploitation of Women

Exploitation of women is an act that is carried out by taking advantage of women for the benefit of a certain group. For now, the level of equal rights between men and women has indeed been proclaimed. However, in practice, women often experience acts of discrimination and exploitation. Some examples are as follows.

• Become a commercial sex worker. Even though there are some women who think that this profession is then a job, in reality most of them still don’t like this job.
• Exploitation of women in mass media, such as TV, the Internet, as well as print media. This advertisement is intended to increase public attention to a media and product. Even so there are many of us who are not aware of this, but these examples of exploitation are very damaging.

4. Forest Exploitation

For land clearing for forest fires, most of the incidents of forest fires then occur due to deliberate factors. Some irresponsible parties deliberately set fire to the forest to then turn it into plantation land, residential land, livestock land, and so on. Fires can also result in the loss of these habitats, thus causing species extinction.

In addition, there are several examples of forest exploitation, including:

• Conversion of land functions that change functions by changing the function of part or all of the land area from its original function to another function which then has problems or adverse impacts on the environment and the potential of the land itself.
• In the opening of mining land in the forest for mining, there is an activity of taking mineral deposits (ie valuable minerals) from the earth’s crust, whether excavation is carried out on the surface or below the earth’s surface. While the mine is a place to dig (take) as well as results from the earth’s crust in the form of minerals (valuable minerals). The mining system is also a way or technique that is carried out in freeing or taking mineral deposits that have economic meaning from the parent rock for further processing so that it can then provide large profits.
• Illegal logging, this logging activity itself occurs in a forest area which is carried out illegally, thereby reducing or changing the original function of the forest. Even though there has been a strict prohibition from the Government to do so, most people still carry out these activities. If there are many people who still carry out this action on a large scale, regardless of the after effects, it will be easier for the negative impacts to occur.

Difference between Exploration and Exploitation

Although they are often used together, these two words actually have very basic differences. Well, the difference between exploitation and exploration is as follows:

1. Understanding

Exploration is the beginning of all exploitation activities and is carried out over a long period of time because it requires an in-depth and detailed process.

Exploitation is a follow-up activity from various exploitation processes that have previously been carried out. This activity will depend on the results after exploration is carried out, it can be in a long or short period of time.

2. Purpose

If exploration is more likely to be a process of searching for in-depth information by exploring new areas or foreign objects, then exploitation refers more to seeking benefits from previously known potentials through exploration activities.

3. Processing Time

Exploration is a process that takes a long time and is full of risks and uncertainties. Conversely, exploitation has a short-term nature and the benefits can be directly utilized with certain results that are more relative.

4. Goals and Outcomes

Exploitation is carried out in order to obtain as much as possible from what is obtained through exploration activities, be it agricultural products or natural resources contained in an area that has been explored. Whether the goal is positive or negative, it will all depend on the perpetrator of the activity itself.

5. Application

Exploration activities require very complex tactics and strategies and cannot be carried out at random. Of course, this is different from exploitation activities that rely on various technical equipment. The more sophisticated the technology used in this activity, the greater the results can be obtained.

6. Impact

Exploration activities do not or even rarely cause harmful direct effects on an object, because they are only researching and also exploring potential profits.

Meanwhile, exploitation can be considered as an activity that often causes negative and detrimental effects, including on the surrounding environment, as well as social and other problems related to the activity itself.

Impact of Forest Exploitation

The following are some of the impacts of forest exploitation that you need to know.

1. Human and Animal Conflict

Conflicts between wild animals and humans sometimes occur due to human activities themselves. Animals, such as elephants, monkeys, for example, descend into village areas, then damage the plants.

As a result of the conflict, it can swallow many victims both from the human side, gardens and also from the animals. Because of the conflict, there was a reaction from part of the community, especially for those who had experienced disturbances.

2. Disturbed Ecosystem

The forest is a habitat for various types of animal and plant species. That means that the forest is one of the biological natural resources that exist on this earth. Forest exploitation activities can cause damage.

Forest damage that occurs will result in flooding and erosion which can transport soil particles to the sea which will later undergo a process of sedimentation or deposition there.

3. Economic Losses

Forest areas are a source of natural wealth, some people depend on forest products for their lives. If the forest is damaged, their source of income will also disappear. Forest destruction can cause land to become barren, making it difficult to use it for farming.

In addition, forest destruction can trigger various kinds of disasters which will eventually cause losses, be it losses, especially economic losses. Many people lost their land, homes, and family members due to disasters such as floods and landslides.

From the discussion above, it can be said that exploration is an activity that can damage nature. Thus the discussion about exploitation. We hope that after reading this article to the end, you can participate in protecting the environment.

Recommended Books Related to Exploitation

1. Water Resources Management Reform

Reform in the field of water resources is urgently needed considering there is a paradigm shift in the management of water resources along with climate change, hydrometeorology and people’s behavior. Let’s look at the required reforms one by one so that we don’t make mistakes in the management of water resources in the future.

2. Natural Resource Economics

This book explains in detail the aforementioned issues with a rather mathematical micro-approach. This book is designed to provide a complete understanding of the economics of natural resources and is equipped with a graphical and mathematical approach as well as detailed explanations to help the reader understand it. Although not suitable for beginners, this book can be understood while studying microeconomics. The breadth of the discussion and the depth of the material are the hallmarks of this book. Happy reading.

3. Management of Marine & Forest Resources: Perspectives, Policy

Indonesia has abundant marine and forest resources, but they have not been used optimally to improve people’s welfare. The management also pays less attention to the sustainability aspect. As a result, the sustainability of natural resources is also threatened, including the provision of the necessities of life for future generations.

Through good management, natural resources can actually be used optimally to improve people’s welfare. However, many fishing communities and those who live around forests are still trapped in poverty due to the use of natural resources that often only prioritizes economic aspects, while social and ecological aspects are not given priority.

In the concept of sustainable development, these three aspects must receive balanced attention so that the benefits are felt by the community, both present and future generations. This book reveals issues surrounding marine and forest resource management from perspectives, policies, and resource management issues that occur in several regions.

4. Management of Resources & Environment

“This book is a translation and adaptation of “Resource and Environmental Management” by Bruce Mitchell, professor of Geography at the University of Waterloo, Canada. This book presents the latest and innovative concepts, methods and strategies in resource and environmental management, which are linked to four fundamental themes, namely change, complexity, uncertainty and conflict.

Attention is paid to the role of sustainable development in providing a vision for management, using ecosystems as a vehicle for realizing this vision. Key features of this book include: the combination of conceptual and practical management approaches; the use of boxes with text items which constitute the core of the description; the presentation of case studies which include examples from several corners of the world with special attention to developed and developing countries.

In addition to theoretical approaches, this book also presents examples from Indonesia to make them more contextual. Thus, this book is very useful from the point of view of understanding the concepts of resource and environmental management and their implementation practices, both in other countries and in Indonesia.”

5. Strategic Environmental Assessment

Strategic Environmental Assessment (KLHS) or Strategic Environmental Assessment (SEA) is an instrument supporting sustainable development planning through efforts to internalize environmental interests (LH) and the principles of sustainable development into the development plan. Efforts to mainstream environmental interests and the principles of sustainable development are important because development implementation so far has not only increased economic benefits, but also resulted in a decline in environmental quality and social problems.

If you want to find books about natural resources, then you can get them at sinaumedia.com . To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

 

Experiment report text structure – In conducting a correct research, of course, you have to follow the right steps and instructions so that everything is in accordance with what is being done. Usually someone who has finished making observations in research must make a text of an experimental report as a result of the research that has been made.

The text of the test report consists of a title and includes two important parts that make up the framework, namely a general statement and a description. Each of these sections consists of excerpts and explanations that support the experiments carried out.

The general statement section contains a description or classification whose contents are generally related to the test object. This section consists of background, objectives and theoretical basis. The descriptive section consists of tools and materials, test steps, test results and conclusions. Some simple reports have a shorter structure, namely the title, objectives, tools and materials, steps, test results and conclusions. Meanwhile, more complex reports may include other sections such as data analysis/discussion, experimental variables and others.

For this reason, in order to make it easier for Sinaumed’s friends to understand how the correct experimental report text structure is used as additional knowledge, in this discussion we will try to describe the correct experimental report text structure complete with its features and functions.

Further discussion of the structure of the trial report can be seen below!

Definition of Test Report Text

Reports are a form of observation and serve to inform the public about the results obtained. Based on this understanding, report text is a form of writing that describes the observed phenomenon to the reader.

Report text (report text) is also often referred to as classification text. Because in this text objects are classified according to certain criteria. This text is almost the same as descriptive text, but has a different style. If the descriptive text discusses a particular topic, the report text discusses a broader phenomenon or general topic.

The test report text is a text that explains the purpose, procedure and results of the test. Experimental report text is a text that reports about the experiment conducted by the researcher. Test report text is usually used to report test results, scientific work or practicum reports. The text of the test results report is intended to provide information to the reader about the test results. The text of the test results is general or universal.

Experiment Report Text Structure

The structure of the research report text is divided into two parts, namely general statements and descriptions. The difference is that general statements involve a general description or classification of the subject. Meanwhile, the description contains aspects of the report that are arranged according to certain classifications.

In general, the text of the test report consists of five structures. Before heading to the sample test report, please pay attention to the structure of the test report in the form of a description below, Sinaumed’s friends!

• Objective

In this section you need to provide the background why this experiment needs to be done.

• Materials and tools

Write down the tools used during the experiment. The materials used were in fact written according to what was used in the experiment.

• Trial Period

State and explain in detail the process or systematic steps you did in the experiment process. Also convey the steps of the experiment or how it works by using active clauses, not imperative sentences, so that it tells what was done during the experiment.

• Experimental Results

This section allows you to explain your observations using experimental results. Describe the test results in detail.

• Conclusion

Finally, make conclusions about the results you get from all the experimental processes that you do. The conclusion is the answer to the proposed hypothesis.

While the following is the structure of a trial report arranged in the form of a general statement:

• Title

As a form of scientific work, the text of the experimental report also has a title. The title of the test report text generally describes the type of test to be made.

• Introduction

Introduction The next experimental report text structure is the introduction. The introduction has three elements, namely the background of the problem, the formulation of the problem and the purpose of the experiment.

• Materials and tools

Of course in conducting experiments or research requires materials and tools.

• Try the process steps

The test report text must clearly explain the stages of the exam activities. In this text structure, it is usually described in detail step by step. However, in the example of the experimental report text above, the steps for the experimental activities are written in the form of a simple bullet point.

• Conclusion

The final text structure of the experimental report is the conclusion. The conclusion is a brief description of the entire test suite.

Test Report Text Features

After understanding the examples and knowing the structure of the test report text, the next step is to understand the characteristics of the test report text.

Below are some features of the experimental results report text as follows:

• Report test results.
• Science experiments are conducted to prove something.
• The text of the test report begins with an explanation of the purpose of the test.
• Name the materials and tools needed to carry out the experiment!
• Describe the procedure for conducting experiments and observations. Presents test results.
• At the end of the report, the conclusions of the experimental results are presented based on the results of the analysis of observational data.
• must contain facts.
• Be objective.
• Must write completely and perfectly.
• Does not contain discriminatory, prejudiced or partial matters.
• Presented in an engaging way, and consistent with clear grammar, heavy content, and logical organization.

Language Rules of Experiment Report Text

The linguistic rules of the experimental report text are as follows:

• Use of synonyms and antonyms

The test report text usually contains synonyms or even antonyms. Usually these words are found in the Experiment Steps section.

• Use of Number Words

In the text of the test report you will find word numbers indicating the amount of material used in the test.

• Use of Command Statements

In the experiment report text there are commands such as preferably, avoid, mix, unite, stir, wrap, and others.

• Use of Conjunctions

Purpose of Experiment Report Text

The text of this test report aims to understand the material based on a written exam. Experiments were carried out using observation to identify causal relationships between symptoms. The contents of the experimental report text thus begins with a description of the objectives, procedures, and tests carried out systematically.

How to make Test Report Text?

After completing an observation, you must, of course, record the results in the experimental text report text. So how do you make it? Check out the explanation below, Sinaumed’s friends!

• Make an outline based on the test report text structure

First, make an outline according to the structure of the test report text. Starting from the purpose of the experiment, the tools and materials used during the experiment, as well as the steps from the beginning to the end of the experiment. Then write down the test results in the form of tables, graphs, graphs or pictures to make it easier for the reader to see the results. After that, write down the final results of the test.

• Let’s expand the terms of reference into a full text

Once you’ve created an outline, you need to develop it into a full text. Remember to pay attention to the rules of the language used, so that the results of the test report text are easy to understand.

Sample Test Report Text

Title:

Make a rainbow at the glass party

Objective:

Know the rainbow process with simple tools

Tools and materials used:

• enough water
• glass,
• scissors,
• glass (size that fits in the glass),
• Lantern.

Trial phase:

• Pour water into a glass cup and then place the glass on the table.
• Place the glass on the glass diagonally or diagonally.
• Darken the room by turning off the lights, closing the curtains, etc.
• Turn on the flashlight and then point the flashlight at the glass inside the glass. Look at the rainbow visible from the corner of the glass.
• Adjust the glass angle for different results.

Test results:

If the flashlight is turned on and then pointed at a glass in a glass filled with water, a rainbow will appear from the corner of the glass. This can happen because the light from the flashlight is refracted by the water in the glass.

Because light has wave properties, i.e. light propagates straight then it can be refracted. So, a flashlight can also be used to make a rainbow as long as there is an environment that can bend it.

Conclusion:

From the experiment of making rainbows on glass, it can be concluded that rainbows can arise due to refraction. The incoming and outgoing light is directly deflected by the water so that rainbow rays are created across the surface of the glass.

Example of another Test Report Text:

Title:

Make slime without borax

Objective:

You can make your own slime at home from safe ingredients and it’s cheaper than buying it outside. This activity can make you more creative and innovative.

Tools and materials:

• Povinal glue to taste
• washing powder to taste
• Adequate floor cleaning
• Mixer (can be with a mixer, spoon or hand)
• enough water
• Liquid detergent to taste
• Slime container (in the form of a basin or the like)

Steps:

• Mix Povinal glue, floor cleaner, liquid detergent, powdered detergent and enough water into the slime container, this mixture is usually called activator.
• Then, stir the mixture until it is evenly mixed.
• Add Povinal glue to the activation mixture.
• Then stir until thick texture or shape. 5. Put it in the freezer.
• Then take it out after 5-10 minutes.
• Mix until just about playable.
• Slime is ready to use.

Results:

It’s time for you to get slime that is safe to play without borax. Nowadays slime is very popular among kids.

Conclusion:

By making your own slime, your knowledge and creativity will increase. On the other hand, you can also save money and buy slime which is safer if it gets on your skin because it doesn’t contain borax.

Examples of other Trial Report Text:

Title:

The salted egg experiment

Objective:

Salted eggs are eggs made from duck eggs that have gone through the salting process first. Salted eggs contain lots of vitamins and nutrients, so consuming salted eggs can be beneficial for the body. One of the benefits of eating salted eggs is to maintain endurance and improve vision. The process of making salted eggs is very simple and done in the traditional way.

Tools and materials:

• duck egg
• Abu Rub
• Clay
• Salt
• Sandpaper

Steps to make the experiment:

• Wash the duck eggs carefully and then grind the egg shells thinly.
• Mix ash, clay and salt until evenly distributed.
• Grease the previously ground egg with the dough. 4. Leave the eggs at room temperature for a maximum of 20 days or 3 weeks.

Conclusion:

Based on the trial results, making salted eggs provides a fairly complete nutritional content and is suitable for all ages except those with high blood pressure. This is due to the high salt content in salted eggs. Even though salted eggs have complete nutritional content, it is not recommended to consume them in large quantities.

Example of Other Trial Report Text:

Title:

Make Tempe Mendoan Original Banyumas

Objective:

Tempe mendoan is a very popular processed food in Indonesia. The purpose of making Tempe Mendoan is to try the original Banyumas Tempe Mendoan recipe which is very delicious and interesting to try.

Tools and Materials:

• 10 pieces of tempe mendoan ready to use
• 250 grams of medium protein flour
• 50 grams of rice flour
• 2 scallions (use only the green part and thinly slice)
• 400 ml of water
• The oil for frying
• Knife
• Other cooking tools

Ground spices :

• 1 cm kencur
• 2 cloves of garlic
• ¾ tsp coriander
• Salt to taste

Ingredients for soy sauce tempe mendoan:

• 5 tbsp sweet soy sauce
• 1 clove garlic, puree
• 4 red bird’s eye chilies or according to taste
• 2 shallots (you can remove it if you don’t like it)
• Salt to taste

How to make:

• Mix flour and rice flour until evenly distributed.
• Add the thinly sliced ​​green onions and the ground spices. Add water little by little until all the ingredients are mixed and the dough is not lumpy. Make sure the mixture is not too thick or too runny because it will damage the texture of the tempe mendoan.
• Heat a large amount of oil.
• After the oil is hot, add the mendoan tempeh which has been covered with flour. Cook briefly until it changes color then remove and drain. Do this until all the tempe mendoan mixture is used up.
• How to make tempe mendoan sauce: mix the sliced ​​bird’s eye chilies, finely chopped garlic and sliced ​​shallots. Combine all ingredients with soy sauce and stir until smooth.
• Serve tempe mendoan with dipping sauce while warm.

Experiment Conclusion:

Conclusion

This is a brief discussion of the meaning of the structure of the experimental report text. The discussion this time does not only discuss the definition of the experimental report text structure but also discusses the characteristics, types, purposes, benefits and examples of an experimental report text structure itself.

Understanding the structure of the experimental report text makes us better understand the results of our research through experimental text reports and makes it easier to make them.

Thus a review of the notion of the structure of the experimental report text. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn everything about understanding the structure of experimental report texts and knowledge related to other languages, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you. To support Sinaumed’s in adding insight, sinaumedia always provides quality and original books so that Sinaumed’s has #MoreWithReading information.

Author: Pandu Akram
Related articles:

Persuasive Text Structure and Its Definition, Characteristics, and Examples!

Understanding the Definition, Types, and Structure of Review Text

Persuasion Text: Definition, Structure, Types, and Characteristics

Understanding the Definition to the Structure of Narrative Text

Fantasy Text: Definition, Characteristics, Structure, Types, and Examples

Experimental Research – When discussing experimental research for the first time, did Sinaumed’s ever think about the activities carried out by researchers who had gray hair and were in the laboratory with beakers? Yep, if you look at animated films, experimental research will definitely be described that way. When in fact, experimental research does not have to be in the laboratory with beakers and create sophisticated discoveries, you know…

In this day and age, various research methods have been developed and can be carried out in all fields of science. Not only in science and technology, but also in the fields of literature, education, linguistics, law, sociology, and history. Even students who are completing their undergraduate and postgraduate assignments often use this research method.

Then actually, what is experimental research? If it doesn’t have to be done in the laboratory with beakers, can it be done using literature based on books or journal articles?

So, so that Sinaumed’s isn’t confused about what experimental research is, let’s look at the following review!

Definition of Experimental Research

If you look at KBBI (Big Indonesian Dictionary), an experiment means an experiment that is systematic and plans to prove the truth of a theory or so on. It should be noted that the term ” experimental ” is the equivalent of a foreign language (English), namely ” experiment “, which also in Latin is ” experimental ” which means to try out.

According to Sugiyono (2012), revealed that experimental research is a research method used to look for the effect of certain treatments on others under controlled conditions. Then, according to Arikunto (2006), defines that this experimental research is a way to look for a causal relationship (causal) between two factors that are deliberately raised by researchers by eliminating or setting aside other disturbing factors.

Then there is also Solso & MacLin (2002) who also argue that this experimental research is a study in which at least one manipulation variable will be found to study cause-and-effect relationships. Therefore, experimental research will definitely be closely related to the activity of testing a hypothesis. This is done to look for influences, relationships, or differences in changes to the group or variable being studied.

So, based on the opinions of these experts, we can conclude that this experimental research is a research method that is carried out by first manipulating data through certain treatments so that in the next step data can be observed in the future. 

An example of the application of experimental research in the field of education is to examine student understanding in a subject using certain learning media.

Knowing Variables in Experimental Research

In conducting any research, this experimental research is no exception, Sinaumed’s must have often come across the term variable. Actually, what is that variable?

Variables are anything related to conditions, circumstances, factors, treatments, or actions that are expected to affect research results. It can be said that the variable is something that we want to examine. When viewed in experimental research, there are two variables, namely experimental variables ( treatment variables ) and non-experimental variables.

Experimental variables ( treatment variables ) are variables that are directly related and applied to determine a certain situation; which is expected to get the impact or result of the experiment. This experimental variable becomes a condition that the researcher wants to examine regarding how it affects a symptom. Then, non-experimental variables are variables that are not intentionally carried out but can still have an impact on the results. So, to find out the effect on these variables, these two groups must be subject to different controls.

Characteristics of Experimental Research

As with other research methods, experimental research also has special characteristics, one of which is manipulation. This is because basically, this research method requires data manipulation beforehand but in a planned manner. Well, here are some of its characteristics according to Sukardi (2009), namely:

1. Manipulate Variables

The first characteristic that is not owned by other research methods is the act of manipulating variables. In this action, it is not done haphazardly, but must still be planned by the researcher. Maybe Sinaumed’s thinks that manipulation is an effort that has a negative sense of value, but in the context of this study that is not necessarily so …

The act of manipulation in question is the action or treatment carried out by the researcher on the basis of scientific considerations that can be accounted for openly, in order to obtain different effects on the variable concerned. For example, in an experimental research process carried out in the laboratory, there are two groups, namely the treatment group and the control group, which are given a temperature level in the room in the form of cold, medium and hot. Now, during the manipulation process, there will be differences in room conditions that have been planned beforehand so that researchers can obtain results that may be different for the two groups. From the differences that arise, it can be calculated as a result of the manipulation of variables for the two groups.

2. Controlling Variables

Controlling is an act of shifting the influence of other variables on the dependent variable which might affect the appearance of that variable. The activity of controlling a variable or subject in this study certainly has an important role. This is because without systematic control measures, the researcher cannot carry out an evaluation by making careful measurements, especially on the dependent variable.

The purpose of this action is to regulate the situation that occurs in experimental research, so that the effects of these variables can be studied.

3. Make Observations

When the experimental research process was in progress, the researchers would observe two groups. The aim is to be able to see and record what phenomena arise and to allow for differences between the two groups due to the control and manipulation of variables that have been carried out previously.

In the process of this experimental research, there will usually be two groups of variables, namely the independent variables and the dependent variables. Well, researchers are advised to make further observations of the dependent variable, because these variables will later receive the consequences of systematic changes in the independent variables.

Experiment Research Objectives

In general, the purpose of conducting experimental research is to examine the effect of a particular treatment on the symptoms of a particular group and compared with other groups that receive different treatment. So, here is a description of the purpose of conducting experimental research:

• To build a relationship that has a causal-effect relationship
• To study the effect of changing factors on a controlled situation.
• To find the effect of certain treatments on others under controlled conditions.
• To find out the consequences of giving a behavior intentionally by researchers.
• To test the hypothesis proposed in the study.

Requirements for Conducting Experimental Research

All of these research methods can work well and provide accurate results if researchers carry them out in accordance with the rules or guidelines. This experimental research is no exception, which also has certain requirements and must be fulfilled by the researcher so that the research process can run well, namely:

• The researcher must be able to determine deliberately about the time and location where he will conduct the research.
• Research on the same thing must be repeated under the same conditions.
• Researchers must be able to manipulate the variables (change and control) studied according to what they want.
• A comparison group ( control group ) is needed in addition to the group that will be given a certain treatment ( experimental group ).

Common Mistakes that Often Occur in Experimental Research

• Unable to control other variables outside the research variables.
• The cases studied are too few.
• Not able to divide the group into sub-groups.
• The variables used as the basis for grouping are too many.
• The variables used as the basis for grouping do not have a strong correlation or relationship with the dependent variable.
• Give several treatments.

Experimental Research Subjects

In this experimental research, the research subject is an aspect that refers to the respondent or informant who wants to be asked for information as the data. Determining the right subject will actually be the main key because it has a big influence when it comes to drawing conclusions. In the process in the field, especially when you want to determine who or which group to give treatment , you will usually use a sampling technique that is adapted to the conditions of the subject as well as being representative of the population you want to generalize.

To conduct this research, a relatively homogeneous population is needed, aka population homogeneity. If this homogeneity effort can be achieved optimally, then later the process of conducting experimental research will run smoothly, especially in increasing research validity. Well, subject homogeneity in this experimental research can be achieved by limiting population characteristics, including:

• Aspects of place or geography, where the subject lives. It can be a province, district, village, or school.
• Aspects of the subject itself, ranging from gender, education, age, and others.
• Social aspect, which includes social class and social environment.

Since this experimental research is usually carried out on samples, that is, part of the total population, the research subjects must also be representative. The representativeness of this sample is influenced by several factors, namely the number of samples, the size of the sample members, and the sampling technique.

Experimental Research Procedures

The procedure or steps for conducting this experimental research are basically the same as those of other research methods. According to Emzir (2010), the procedures in this study include:

1. Select and formulate a problem.
2. Choose a subject and measurement instrument.
3. Choosing a research design.
4. Carry out the procedure.
5. Analyze data.
6. Formulate conclusions.

In experimental research, it must be guided by at least one hypothesis which states that there is an expected causal relationship between the two groups.

Then, according to Darmadi (2013) who both stated that the procedure for carrying out this research was not much different from other research procedures, explicitly namely:

1. Conduct an inductive study that is closely related to the problem to be solved.
2. Identify existing problems.
3. Using literature studies from several relevant sources (usually books and journal articles), formulating research hypotheses, determining operational definitions and variables.
4. Make plans related to the implementation of research, which includes activities:

• Identify external variables that are not needed, but allow contamination during implementation.
• Determine how to control the prepared groups.
• Choose the right research design.
• Determine the population and sample that will represent a number of research subjects.
• Divide the subjects into the control group and the experimental group.
• Compile appropriate instruments, validate instruments, and conduct pilot studies in order to obtain instruments that meet the requirements for data collection.
• Identify data collection procedures and define hypotheses.

5. Conduct experiments.

6. Collect raw data from the experimental process.

7. Organize and describe the data according to the variables that have been determined.

9. Analyze data with relevant statistical techniques.

10. Prepare experimental research reports based on existing guidelines.

Experimental Research Validity

Please note, Sinaumed’s, that the implementation of this experimental research can be said to be valid if the results are caused by the manipulated independent variables and if the results of the research can be generalized to situations outside the experimental setting. Basically, validity is the degree of accuracy of the research measuring instrument to the actual content being measured. In this case, there are two conditions that must be accepted and referred to as internal and external validity.

• Internal Validity

According to Hadjar (1996), this internal validity is an assessment made regarding the belief that alternative hypotheses can be removed from the possibility as an explanation of the research results. Therefore, researchers need to identify what variables might appear in the alternative hypothesis for experimental variables.

There are 8 types of foreign variables that can threaten this validity and need to be considered when carrying out experimental research, namely: history, maturity, instrumentation, testing, regression, statistics, different selection, and morality.

• External Validity

In this validity there are 2 kinds, namely population validity related to the sample subject population, and ecological validity related to experimental conditions to other environmental conditions.

Determination of Research Titles and Variables

In the process of determining the title of experimental research and its variables, you must also pay attention ! For example, Sinaumed’s wants to conduct this experimental research to examine in the field of education, namely the influence of parental background on the level of student discipline at school. Well, Sinaumed’s can use the title “The Influence of Parental Background and Parenting Patterns on Student Discipline in Schools”.

This research will later investigate background factors and parenting patterns from parents that turn out to influence student discipline. So that there are three factors, namely background, parenting, and student discipline that relate to one another. In this study later, the application of the variables is as follows:

• Parents’ background and upbringing = independent variables
• Student discipline = dependent variable.

In practice, you can use analytical techniques in the form of regression analysis and calculate the effective contribution of the three variables along with the relative contribution of each variable.

Strengths and Weaknesses of Experimental Research

No.	Excess	Lack
1.	Minimizing the risk of unrelated variables and the existence of confounding in the research results.	Experimental research design is difficult to represent a particular population.
2.	Being the only research design that makes a causal relationship (causal) from its variables.	Difficulties in selecting ‘controlling’ variables to exclude all confounding variables.
3.	Able to control threats related to time to validity, especially when doing pre and post testing.	Not being able to isolate one variable because when the hypothesis cannot be controlled, a large number of variables are not related to each other.
4.	Allows for flexible, efficient, and statistical manipulation efforts.	It is often not possible to create the ‘natural place’ desired by the researcher as a research field.

So, that’s a review of what experimental research is and its advantages and disadvantages. If Sinaumed’s is studying in his final semester and wants to write a thesis using this research method, the thing that must be considered carefully is the validity of the data.

Expectations Are – Today, the term “expectations” is often used by many people, especially when talking about expectations for life that must be balanced with reality. Yep, expectations are basically the same as expectations, which are things or ideas that we want in the future. What’s more, if the expectations that arise from within are further strengthened by supporting factors, one of which is self-esteem.

Even though the existence of this expectation is natural for an individual, it should not be excessive, especially if you are reluctant to look at the existing reality. As Sinaumed’s gets older, he must realize that an expectation within us, regarding whatever it is, must be balanced with the course of reality in everyday life. So, what are those expectations?

Is the discussion about expectations included in the study of psychology? What are the factors that influence the emergence of expectations in humans? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the discussion below!

What is Expectation?

If Sinaumed’s looks at the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the word “expectation” means ‘expectation’. Yep, expectation is the same as hope, which is something we want to happen or materialize in the real world. An expectation or hope, does not only apply to an individual, but also in a group which will certainly have a positive impact. In psychological studies, there are several experts who have put forward the definition of this expectation. Reporting from education.co.id , here are some expert opinions about expectations.

`1. According to Fleming and Levie (1981)

Expectations are all the desires, hopes and aspirations regarding something to be achieved with real behavior and actions.

2. According to Sutisna (2001)

Expectation is a belief or belief from an individual about things that should happen in a certain situation.

3. Farmer (2005)

Expectation is a pleasure that occurs inconstantly, which arises from having an idea about something in the future or the past, especially about the problem that is being worried about.

So, since this time we are going to discuss expectations in psychological studies, there is nothing wrong with looking at the definition of “expectation” according to the psychological dictionary. Based on the psychology dictionary, expectations can be a learned tendency, where an organism can predict how a certain situation will appear by responding to a stimulus (Kartono, 1987).

Meanwhile, according to Riggio (1990), “expectancy is the perceived relationship between the individual’s effort and performance of the behavior” . That is, this expectation becomes the relationship felt by an individual between effort and reality that occurs in everyday life. Expectations will be considered as estimates from an individual to another individual or group (and vice versa), so that it will have a positive impact on the individual himself.

It is different from Snyder’s opinion, who argues that expectations can be defined as expectations that are driven by only one goal. According to him, these expectations or expectations are “the process of thinking about one’s goals, along with the motivation to move toward those goals (agency), and the ways to achieve those goals (pathway)”. That is, the process of thinking about a goal with the motivation to get these goals, accompanied by ways to achieve these goals. The concept of expectations also emphasizes 3 components, namely motivation ( agency ), strategy ( pathways ), and goals ( goals). So, if an individual cannot fulfill these 3 components, then his ideas cannot be called expectations. So, it can be concluded that,

“Expectation is the expectation of something that an individual wants to achieve so that it will happen in a certain situation, especially regarding the problem that is being worried about.”

Even though expectations within yourself are excessive, they can lead to disappointment and feelings of sadness, but for some people, their very existence determines success, you know… That’s why having expectations and optimism, especially in living life, must really be well related. If you only have high expectations, without carrying out a clear strategy, goals, and sense of optimism, then all of these expectations will be in vain.

Understanding Expectation Theory in Psychological Studies

Previously, it has been briefly explained that expectations have been developed in the form of theory, especially in psychological studies. In general, this theory of expectation has been developed by several psychologists, but the most popular are those of Victor Vroom, Edward Lawyer, and Lyman Porter.

Victor Vroom put forward this expectation theory or theory of hope as Expectancy Theory and written in his book, it reads “expectancy theory is a theory about work motivation that focuses on how employees make choices among alternative behaviors and levels of effort” . That is, this expectation theory is a theory of work motivation that focuses on how a person can make a choice between the chosen behavior and the level of effort that will be carried out later.

Not only that, Victor Vroom also argues about his systematic theory of expectations in a book entitled Work and Motivation (1964). In his theory it states that expectations become a strong tendency to be able to act in a certain way, depending on how strong the hope is, with certain actions must be followed by certain consequences for the individual.

The existence of Expectancy-Value Theory which is in the psychological dictionary also defines it as “a theory of motivation in humans, which explains how human behavior is viewed in terms of the norms of individual expectations in achieving a goal, with a a situation where the motives can be aroused, as well as related to the incentive value of the goals of the target.

Meanwhile, according to Siagian (2004), argues that the essence of the theory of existing expectations will relate to the strength of an individual’s tendency to act, in a certain way, depending on how strong the expectation is, but must still be followed by realistic and rational actions. . That is why, the existence of the theory of expectations will always focus on things that are realistic and rational.

In a theory of expectations it also explains that all individuals in this world must have a certain way to achieve something or expectations that are indeed different, so they can be motivated especially if they believe that:

• There is a positive relationship between efforts and the results to be achieved.
• Positive results will definitely produce a return that is in accordance with expectations.
• The results to be achieved can satisfy individual needs.
• A strong desire to satisfy these needs can make his business more meaningful.

Actually, the existence of expectations from within an individual will always be there, especially because of the desire to achieve goals. Expectations are also one of the drivers that underlies a person to carry out an action. Yep, not infrequently, someone can achieve success after expectations are carried out logically first. After that, he began to think of ways or strategies that were appropriate and suitable for achieving these goals.

According to Tosi (1990), this expectation theory can be divided into 2, namely:

1. Effort-performance Expectancy (E-P)

In this expectation theory model, presenting the possibility of a given level of effort in order to produce a successful goal from the effort. Example: a sales worker who is trying to work (business) to be able to sell his goods and thinks how many items he can sell if he works hard (expectations).

2. Performance Outcome-expectancy (P-O)

In this second expectation theory model, it is possible that the display results will affect the results obtained, so that they are related to the achievement of their needs.

Actually, this expectation theory will always be related to motivation. Motivation can be something that ‘if someone really wants something and there is an open way of opportunity to get it, then that person will really try to get that desire’. Still in the opinion of Victor Vroom, the existence of motivation certainly leads to decisions about how much effort is expended in certain situations. However, the motivation itself is also based on a sequence of expectations in 2 stages, namely effort-achievement; and achievements.

Factors Influencing the Emergence of Expectations Within

Discussion about the factors that influence the emergence of expectations in a person is put forward by several experts.

According to Kreitner

According to Kreitner (2001), there are several factors that influence the emergence of expectations in a person, namely self-esteem, one’s degree, success from the past, help from others, information, and materials. Well, here is the description.

a. Pride

Actually, the expectations that exist in a person will definitely be influenced by that person’s self-esteem. A little trivia, self-esteem is a person’s impression of how good he is. Therefore, if someone has a high sense of self-esteem, then they will also tend to have high expectations, especially to raise their self-esteem in their surroundings.

b. Self Degree

The degree of self in a person will be recognized by the environment if that person can indeed get maximum results, especially when doing a job. Not infrequently, the degree of self can also affect a person’s expectations for doing his job.

c. Past Success

Usually, someone who has had success in the past, their expectations will increase. However, all of this must also be accompanied by harder efforts (strategies) so that these expectations can be realized. What’s more, if you have had success in the past, then that person has experience that can be used to meet their higher expectations.

d. Help From Others

Through the help of others, one’s expectations of what one wants can also be realized. Yep, with the help of other people, expectations for maximum results will be easy to achieve.

e. Clear Information

Information is very useful for influencing expectations in a person, especially to get maximum results.

According to Jewel

According to Jewel (1998), there are 4 factors that influence expectations from within a person, namely.

a. Ability, Experience, Knowledge, and Expertise

The ability, experience, knowledge, and expertise possessed by a person also greatly influences the expectations that arise. Yep, someone will see and interpret something based on what they know, so it greatly influences expectations of what is expected.

b. Learning Process

An individual can form an expectation about the things he has learned, especially in the surrounding environment.

c. Physical Conditions of the Environment, Human Resources, and Others

An expectation turns out to be heavily influenced by the physical conditions and human resources around it. The environment must be seen whether it really supports expectations or not.

d. Other People’s Ratings

In this case, expectations are strongly influenced by other people’s evaluations. Because, the results they want also “want” to be seen by others.

Aspects of Existence of Expectations

The expectations or expectations embedded in the individual have several aspects contained in the expectation theory itself. According to Snyder (2000), the component aspects of this expectation theory are:

1. Goals _

Goals or goals are the goals of the stages of mental action that produce a cognitive component. According to Averill et al (in Snyder, 2000), suggests that these goals or objectives are the end point of the stages of individual mental behavior regarding expectations. This goal or goal must of course be valuable enough so that it can be achieved logically and can be in the short term or long term.

2. Pathway Thinking

According to Snyder (2003), pathway thinking is when a person’s way of thinking is in order to achieve a goal or goal, then he must also view himself as an individual who has the ability to develop a “path” to achieve it. Pathway thinking is marked as a message statement internally to convince oneself about what it is like to find ways to solve problems.

3. Agency Thinking

The existence of agency thinking is so important, especially for goal-oriented and facing obstacles. Agency reflects more on how a person perceives how to be able to achieve his goals, especially with the paths he has thought of. Usually, people who have high expectations often do self-talk, for example “Can I do this?”, “I can definitely do this,” and “I’m not going to stop here.” Well, when a person faces obstacles, then indirectly, his mind will motivate him to find the best alternative path.

4. Combination Between Pathway Thinking and Agency Thinking

Based on the expectation theory, the components of pathway thinking and agency thinking are 2 important components. Although in reality, if one of these components cannot be achieved, then the ability to maintain the achievement of goals will also not be sufficient. That is why, the components of pathway thinking and agency thinking must complement each other, have a positive correlation, and be reciprocal.

Unfortunately, not everyone has these components of pathway thinking and agency thinking . In fact, if a person has both of these components, the expectations are very high. According to Snyder, there are 4 categories in the pathway thinking and agency thinking components , namely:

1. The components of pathway thinking and agency thinking are low

Such a person has little faith that he can achieve his goals. Not infrequently, someone with low pathway thinking and agency thinking components , lives life without any purpose at all and feels depressed. The feeling of depression arises because he does not have the ability to achieve his goals.

2. The components of pathway thinking are low and agency thinking is high

Such a person becomes an individual who does not have enough mental energy to realize his goals. In fact, not infrequently, he feels burnout because he does something just to impress other people.

3. Components of high thinking pathways and low agency thinking

Such a person is more confident in achieving the desired goal. However, he often encounters problems in the process of achieving his goals, such as anger and frustration.

4. The components of pathway thinking and high agency thinking

Such a person can actually arrange clear goals and ways to achieve these goals in their minds. This person is even easy to interact with other people, and often will take advantage of opportunities to achieve their goals. Because his expectations are so high, his mind is active and has the belief that there are various options to achieve that goal.

 

Expansive and Contractive Fiscal Policy – ​​Does You know how the government will build the country’s infrastructure such as roads, terminals, station stops and others? These various facilities were built using the taxes that we pay as citizens, you know !

Yes, the tax goes into state revenue and later this income will be managed and reissued for various community needs such as building roads, stations, terminals and so on. It is this management, which is then regulated in a fiscal policy.

Of course, with the potential for large tax revenues, tax management requires a strategy so that the management is effective and has a positive impact on people who tax well. Therefore, tax management is based on fiscal policy.

Come on, in this article we will learn in full about fiscal policy starting from its types, understanding, objectives, instruments!

Types of Fiscal Policy

First, we will discuss the types of fiscal policy. For more details, fiscal policy is classified into two types, namely:

1. Expansionary Fiscal Policy

Expansionary fiscal policy is carried out by increasing state spending while simultaneously lowering the tax rate. Well, this type of fiscal policy is enforced when the economy of a country experiences a decline in people’s purchasing power and/or is accompanied by a high unemployment rate. The goal is to encourage healthy economic growth.

An example of an expansionary fiscal policy is what happened last year, where the Fiscal Policy Agency (BKF) of the Indonesian Ministry of Finance throughout 2020-2021 implemented an expansionary fiscal policy. Expansion itself means that the government spending deficit remains large in order to maintain economic growth during the COVID-19 pandemic.

2. Contractionary Fiscal Policy

Contractionary fiscal policy is a policy whose procedure is to reduce state spending and increase tax rates. This policy aims to reduce people’s purchasing power and overcome the problem of inflation. The trick is to make your income bigger than your expenses. This type of policy is issued when the country’s economy is in an expansionary condition and begins to heat up ( overheating ) to reduce demand pressure.

Fiscal Definition

Next, we discuss the meaning of fiscal. So far, what did You know?

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, fiscal is related to state income and tax matters. The word fiscal itself comes from the Latin word fiscus which is the name of someone who had or held power over finances in ancient Rome.

Meanwhile, in English, fiscal is referred to as fisc , which means the arrangement or treasury of the incoming and outgoing money in the kingdom.

So, this fiscal is used to explain the form of state and royal income that is collected from the community, then the royal government or state government is considered as income and used as expenditure for various programs with the aim of achieving national income, economy, production, and also used as balance device in the country’s economy.

Definition of Fiscal Policy

In terms of definition, fiscal policy is a policy or strategy implemented by the government with the aim of maintaining state financial expenditure and income. In more detail, fiscal policy is a policy originating from the government to influence the economy through changes in government revenues and spending.

The main regulated income is from the tax sector while the expenditure is in the form of a budget issued with the aim of supporting government programs. Fiscal policy has a close relationship with policies to achieve certain economic objectives through instruments of revenue, taxation, accounts payable, and government spending. In Indonesia, fiscal policy authority is held by the Fiscal Policy Agency (BKF) of the Ministry of Finance of the Republic of Indonesia.

Fiscal Policy Objectives

The main objective of implementing fiscal policy is to determine the direction, goals, targets and priorities of national development and the nation’s economic growth. However, it is not only that, because it turns out that there are several other objectives of implementing fiscal policy, namely:

1. Increase the potential of human resources and reduce unemployment

Did you know, You , that one of the biggest problems in the Indonesian economy is the high number of unemployed who are in the productive age category. Fiscal policy can deal with this problem through programs to improve the quality of Community Resources (HR). By improving the quality of human resources, it is hoped that workers of productive age will have adequate competence and expertise and be able to compete in the world of work both domestically and internationally. This indirectly raises the level of the country’s economy.

2. Maintain price stability

You must have seen or heard news about rising commodity prices, starting from essential commodities such as fuel prices, to various things that are close to us such as the price of cooking ingredients. Rising and falling commodity prices can occur due to various factors, starting from the level of market demand, to various ways that are not justified such as hoarding stock and monopoly which can cause scarcity.

3. Stimulating the country’s economic growth

In its main objective, in addition to maintaining the balance of the country’s economy, fiscal policy also functions to increase economic growth. Fiscal policy is expected to spawn many new innovations in the economic sector as a solution to boost the economy and also play a role as a policy maker

4. Encouraging the rate of investment

One of the biggest transactions in the economy is the value of investment coming into the country. Through fiscal policy, the rate of investment can be encouraged to improve the economy and investors’ confidence in the stability of a country’s economy. With a good investment climate, investors will be interested in disbursing investment funds, so that the state can also attract more tax values.

5. Realizing social justice

Fiscal policy also has a role in programs to increase social protection and welfare. A clear example of this is the existence of the National Economic Recovery Program initiated by the Ministry of Finance so that people with a lower and vulnerable economy are able to survive all the impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic. Thus, economic stability will be maintained and the community can feel the positive impact directly.

Fiscal Policy Instruments

Then to find out more about fiscal policy, we also have to get to know some of the instruments. Fiscal policy instruments are sectors in the economy that are used by the government to maintain macroeconomic stability. These sectors include:

1. Taxes

An important sector in fiscal policy instruments is taxes from both the domestic and foreign sectors. In order to achieve economic goals, the government can increase or decrease people’s purchasing power through taxes.

For example, if taxes are reduced, the amount of output of goods and services will also increase so that it will affect and increase people’s purchasing power. However, the opposite also applies if taxes are increased, it will reduce the output of goods and services and can reduce people’s purchasing power.

2. Expenditures

The fiscal policy instrument that You needs to understand next is state spending. This is the same as the basic concept of whatever happens, even in You’ own life. For example, if the family income decreases, of course, You will try to save money and reduce expenses so that there is a balance between income and expenses.

In the context of the state, the value of state spending can be increased or decreased according to needs. If the country’s balance of payments is in deficit, the government can reduce spending on certain sectors, for example delaying the payment of holiday allowances for civil servants.

3. Public Bonds

The last fiscal policy instrument is regarding the issuance of bonds for citizens or bonds. These debt securities are quite well known in the field of investment, where people who have funds are offered to buy debt securities from the state, and the state will repay the debt accompanied by interest on the loan.

One of the bond products is Government Securities which are traded or Retail SBN. This letter is traded as one of the investment products. If You decides to buy Retail SBN, besides getting returns through interest, You will also play a direct role in financing the country’s development budget, you know !

Differences between Monetary Policy and Fiscal Policy

In order to maintain the stability of the country’s economy, the government can implement two policies, namely monetary policy and fiscal policy. These two economic policies are equally important for increasing economic growth and maintaining the stability of the country.

In practice, monetary policy and fiscal policy can be applied simultaneously or just one of them. All of this hinges on the country’s need to stabilize its economy. However, these two policies have their differences.

The second difference can be seen from the objectives of implementing monetary policy and fiscal policy. The objective of monetary policy is to maintain the amount of money circulating in society. While the purpose of implementing fiscal policy is to maintain state revenues and expenditures in order to create economic stability.

Examples of Fiscal Policy Applicable in Indonesia

There are several examples of fiscal policies that have been implemented by the Indonesian government. Among them:

The first fiscal policy was when President Joko Widodo announced the Tax Amnesty program in 2017. This program was launched because there were many cases of tax arrears reports and many people did not report the amount of wealth they owned. Therefore, finally President Joko Widodo decided to implement the Tax Amnesty program.

The Tax Amnesty Program is a program for the elimination of taxes owed as well as countless criminal sanctions in the field of tax administration sanctions. With this amnesty, many political parties are competing to immediately settle tax arrears as well as many individuals who immediately report the amount of their wealth to the authorities. This program can increase Indonesia’s national income against rupiah and it is proven that national income can increase up to 15.22 trillion rupiah.

The second is the tax relaxation that will take place from 2020 to early 2021. This tax relaxation program aims to increase people’s purchasing power.

An example of the last fiscal policy is gas and fuel subsidies. The purpose of this fiscal policy in the fuel sector is to facilitate mobility and economic transactions in society.

So, that was an explanation of fiscal policy. You understand, right? Now we know that fiscal policy plays a key role in maintaining a country’s economic stability.

Exhibitionism Meaning – When watching movies, has Sinaumed’s ever seen a scene where a man suddenly appears and then shows off his genitals to a woman who is passing by? Or even Sinaumed’s was a victim of this obscene act? If so, the case of exhibitionism, aka exhibitionism, is indeed very troubling for many people, because the victims can feel disgusted and end up traumatized. In the case of exhibitionism, the perpetrators are usually men who target women as victims, by showing off their genitals suddenly, both in quiet and crowded places. Although in fact, there are also women who are involved in this exhibitionism case.

Some people may think that the perpetrators of exhibitionism are crazy people. Even though that’s not necessarily the case, because the act of exhibitionism and the disturbance of exhibitionism are in fact different, even though both of them show their vital tools suddenly in a public space. Yep, exhibitionism is included in mental disorders that are classified as paraphilias, aka obsessions to perform strange sexual activities. So, what is exhibitionism? What are the levels in this exhibitionism mental disorder? Are there attempts to treat exhibitionism? How do we deal with this act of exhibitionism? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands these things, let’s look at the following review!

What Is Exhibitionism?

Basically, exhibitionism is an act of obscenity as well as a mental illness. According to Simon, obscenity is an act related to life, especially in the sexual field, which is carried out with the intention of obtaining pleasure in a way that is very contrary to the norms of decency. This obscene act was not only carried out by adults on adults, but also by adults on young children, so it was strongly opposed by religion and the state. Even the definition of obscenity has been included in The National Center on Child Abuse and Neglect US, which is included in the category of “sexual assault” namely‘Contact or interaction between a child and an adult where the child is used for sexual stimulation by the perpetrator or another person who is in a position to have power or control over the victim’.

There are lots of examples of obscenity, ranging from physical contact, making a person or child view pornography, using a person or child to make pornography, to showing an adult’s genitals to a person or child. The last obscene act is called exhibitionism. Previously, it was explained that this act of obscenity was strongly opposed by the state, as stipulated in the Criminal Code Articles 289 to 296. Yep, the perpetrators of sexual abuse will actually get the sanctions that have been set, namely imprisonment for a maximum of 15 years. Unfortunately, in the field, this crime is still considered trivial and often occurs anywhere.

This act of exhibitionism has actually been included in the category of obscenity, which is interpreted as a deviant sexual fantasy and is characterized by the act of showing one’s genitals to other people. In the field, most of the perpetrators of exhibitionism incidents are men, but it is possible that female perpetrators can too.

For male offenders, they tend to find satisfaction, especially when they see the victim (usually a woman) shocked after seeing their genitals. That’s why many people often warn us to stay normal when we become victims of this exhibitionism. Meanwhile, for female perpetrators, they will find satisfaction when they see their victims feel aroused after watching their genitals, breasts, or buttocks, which are intentionally shown just like that. Yep, someone who suffers from exhibitionism will later get sexual pleasure when he shows his genitals in front of other people, then the other person shows a reaction, ranging from shock to fear.

This act of exhibitionism has actually entered into a psychological disorder, you know… In fact, the incident was not only in a quiet place, but also a crowded place with random victims. In some cases of exhibitionism where the perpetrators are men, it is not uncommon to be followed by acts of masturbation. Due to the large number of victims who feel harassed to form lasting trauma from this action, exhibitionism is categorized as a sexual crime which is then categorized as a violation of criminal law.

Just a little trivia , the act of exhibitionism which has clearly violated the norms of decency by showing off their genitals to other people is included in the category of violations of criminal law. The criminal law is stated in article 281 of the Criminal Code which reads:

“Threatened with imprisonment for a maximum of 2 (two) years and 8 (eight) months or a maximum fine of Rp. 4500.00 (four thousand five hundred rupiah): 

• Whoever deliberately and openly violates morality. 

• Anyone who deliberately and in front of others who is there against their will violates morality.”

Exhibitionism, which is included in the category of paraphilic disorders, aka sexual deviation, is generally limited to showing the genitals. While sexual contact with the victim is very rare. Reporting from hellosehat , as many as 2-4% of exhibitionists are male. Although it is also possible that women can also be the perpetrators. One example of a case where women are perpetrators of exhibitionism is the arrest of the owner of the Siskaeee account who deliberately exposed his genitals at the airport in December 2021.

Diagnosis Pelaku Exhibitionism

In fact, someone who has this sexual disorder can be diagnosed medically, you know… at least has the following conditions.

• Strong sexual arousal appears in the form of sexual fantasies, intentions or actions to show genitals repeatedly, for about 6 months.
• The emergence of sexual urges and actions to show intimate organs and sexual activity without the consent of the person concerned.
• The existence of this exhibitionism behavior causes problems that can interfere with, to hinder daily activities.

Level of Exhibitionism

An exhibitionist must always want to show off his vital organs to certain people, even the targets are random. They are not afraid of social sanctions, because for them the most important thing is that sexual stimulation can be conveyed.

Based on Targets

Based on the target, this exhibitionism action has several levels, namely:

1. To Children Before Puberty

Exhibitionists at this level will usually be sexually aroused when they succeed in showing their genitals to children who haven’t even reached puberty yet. They think that if they do this to children, there will be no problem. In fact, this level of exhibitionism has been included in a criminal offense, to be precise in Law No. 23 of 2002 Article 82 concerning Child Protection, which reads:

“Anyone who intentionally commits violence or threatens violence, forces, commits deception, series of lies, or induces a child to commit or permits obscene acts to be carried out, shall be punished with imprisonment for a maximum of 15 (fifteen) years and a minimum of 3 (three) ) years and a maximum fine of Rp. 300,000,000.00 (three hundred million rupiahs) and a minimum of Rp. 60,000,000.00 (sixty million rupiahs).”

2. To Adults

The next level is that exhibitionists will feel aroused after showing their genitals to adults. This action is usually carried out in random places, ranging from narrow alleys to crowded places. Target victims are also random, usually people who are passing by.

3. To Pre-Puberty Children and Adults

The third level is that the perpetrators of exhibitionism will not discriminate against the age of their victims. Because, they will feel aroused if the victims are pre-pubertal children and adults. The reaction of the victim, be it shock or fear, will also make his sexual fantasy more aroused.

Based on How

The perpetrators of this exhibitionism not only show their vital parts, but also their sexual activity to other people at random.

1. Anasyrma

Exhibitionism actors will carry out their actions by lifting their skirts when they are not wearing underwear.

2. Martymachlia

The perpetrators of exhibitionism will show their sexual activity to others. For example the activity of masturbation to have sex.

3. Candaulism

The perpetrators of exhibitionism will deliberately expose their partner’s body so that others can see it and are aroused by the reactions of these other people.

4. Telephone Scatology

The perpetrators of exhibitionism tend to have phone sex without the consent of the victim.

Factors Causing Exhibitionism

Many things are the causal factors of an exhibitionism actor which is certainly related to how their social and psychological environment is. The following are the causative factors that encourage a person to experience sexual exhibitionism disorder.

1. Psychological Disorders

Someone who experiences psychological disorders can occur because their psychological development during childhood is not perfect. Especially if you have a mother who is always dominant and protective, this can be the reason for this act of exhibitionism, because sufferers cannot interact with the opposite sex.

Those who experience exhibitionism are also suitable to be categorized as narcissistic disorders, because they feel that they are the center of attention so that their appearance will be considered “different” and invites attention. Meanwhile, there are several psychological problems that can cause a person to become an exhibitionist, namely:

• Sex addiction
• Tend to be antisocial
• Sexually attracted to children or teenagers (pedophilia)
• Alcohol addiction

2. Social Environment

The environment where you live and school certainly plays an important role in a person’s psychological development. Therefore, the social environment is very influential in this deviation of sexual exhibitionism. An exhibitionism usually grows without getting a sense of empathy from the people around him.

Not only having parents who are protective, but also those who often insult, act harshly, often criticize, often embarrass them, can also cause childhood trauma. Due to this trauma, excessive narcissism emerged so that when he grew up, he wanted to be noticed and admired by others.

Treatment of an Exhibitionism

So, can a person with exhibitionism be cured? Of course you can, but it requires a long treatment time. In addition, there are many ways to treat exhibitionism, ranging from psychotherapy to taking certain drugs.

1. Psychotherapy

Psychotherapy that will be given to an exhibitionist is a type of Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT) to find out what are the roots of the problems that can trigger the emergence of this exhibitionism sexual deviation. This therapy will later solve the problem into 5 aspects, namely:

•  Situation
• Thought
• Feelings
• Physical Sensation
• Action

2. Group Counseling

The next treatment that can be done is group counseling consisting of 5-15 people with exhibitionism. Yep, later they will meet for a few hours every week to provide support to one another in an effort to control their sexual behavior.

For ordinary people, this treatment does seem strange because it brings exhibitionism actors together. But for them, communication from the point of view of fellow exhibitionism sufferers will provide new perspectives for each other. Through this, it can make it easier to control their deviant sexual behavior.

3. Consuming certain drugs

If an exhibitionism sufferer is aware that he has a sexual disorder, then of course he will come to a psychiatrist. So, the psychiatrist will give you a Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitor (SSRI) antidepressant. These antidepressant drugs are very useful for reducing libido and reducing orgasms. Usually, the effectiveness of the drug reaches 60-70 percent.

The psychiatrist may also prescribe the drugs leuprolide and medroxyprogesterone acetate to lower testosterone. Little information, the hormone testosterone is very instrumental in controlling sexual desire in a person.

How to Cope with Exhibitionism

When dealing with exhibitionists, our reactions are sure to be shocked, disgusted, scared, to tears. After the perpetrator left, we just felt a very deep trauma from the action. So, how do we deal with this act of exhibitionism when walking in a public place? Reporting from Sehatq , there are several ways to deal with this act of exhibitionism, namely:

• Try to stay calm and not give any reaction. This is because the perpetrators of exhibitionism tend to want a reaction from the attention they have done.
• Express indifference or annoyance.
• Position your body as if avoiding or turning your back to the perpetrator of exhibitionism. Give the impression that you don’t care about his actions.
• After moving away from the location where the exhibitionism occurred, immediately call the police.
• Don’t stay silent, approach, or even attack exhibitionism actors.
• If caught by exhibitionists, act as if they have a seizure because it can make them feel scared.
• For children and adolescents, teach them to shout “fire” if they are sexually assaulted.

Criminal Law Enforcement Against Exhibitionism Perpetrators

As previously explained, this act of exhibitionism has received great attention from the legal system in Indonesia. There are quite a number of statutory laws that stipulate that exhibitionism is a criminal offence. What’s more, the act of exhibitionism is already included in the category of obscenity which seriously violates the norms of decency.

Criminal sanctions for this exhibitionism crime can be seen in Article 36 of Law no. 44 of 2008 concerning Pornography, reads:

“Anyone who shows himself or another person in a show or in public that depicts nudity, sexual exploitation, intercourse, or other pornographic contents as referred to in Article 10 shall be punished with imprisonment for a maximum of 10 (ten) years and/or a fine. 5,000,000,000.00 (five billion rupiah) at most.”

Not only that, this act of exhibitionism is also regulated in Law Number 35 of 2014 Article 82 (previously Law No.23 of 2002) concerning Child Protection. Yep, this act of exhibitionism will receive legal scrutiny if it makes children the victims, which reads:

“Anyone who deliberately commits violence or threatens violence, forces, commits deception, a series of lies, or induces a child to commit or permits obscene acts to be carried out, shall be punished with imprisonment for a maximum of 15 (fifteen) years and a minimum of 3 (three) ) years and a maximum fine of Rp. 300,000,000.00 (three hundred million rupiahs) and a minimum of Rp. 60,000,000.00 (sixty million rupiahs).”

So, that’s a review of what exhibitionism is and its levels, causative factors, treatment, ways to deal with it, and the views of Indonesian law on it. If Sinaumed’s feels that he has been a victim of this exhibitionism action, we hope that the trauma you are feeling will heal soon…

•  

Causes of Sexual Disorders Exhibitionism – Viral cases related to exhibitionism have occurred several times. An abnormality that makes sufferers feel happy when other people see their genital area is certainly troubling residents. However, what actually happens to someone with the disorder?

Exhibitionism is a condition that can harm other people, even causing trauma. This disorder needs to get immediate treatment before it becomes a crime. The vast majority of exhibitionists are male, although women can experience this sexual disorder as well.

Definition of Exhibitionism

Exhibitionism disorder is a condition that causes a person to compulsively expose his vital parts and genitals, both male and female, to other people in public places. This can lead to stimulation and sexual pleasure while doing it.

This condition is classified as a paraphilic disorder, namely sexual interest that is dysfunctional, so that it has the potential to harm oneself or others. The sufferer has the main desire to find a feeling of surprise, impression, and fear of the victim.

Psychological Aspects of Exhibitionism

Exhibitionism was first described as a mental illness in the scientific journal published in 1877 by the French physician and psychologist Charles Lasègue (1809–1883). Exhibitionism behavior can interfere with a person’s normal quality of life. The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual, 4th Edition (class 302.4) calls this behavior that is considered a psychological disorder “paraphilia”.

The general definition of exhibitionism is sexual deviation which is characterized by the behavior of showing one’s genitals to strangers. This behavior is motivated by sexual fantasies and strong sexual urges.

Just like other mental disorders, this condition can occur due to the interaction of biological (such as genes), psychological (psychological condition of the person), and social (such as parenting and environmental) factors. However, this theory of exhibitionism can be traced from a person’s childhood, including from his own sexual development, whether it was well formed in the upbringing of his parents.

A research team conducted research by taking a sample of respondents from 185 exhibitionists with the question: “How do you react when you show your genitals to other people?” The most common responses were “want to have sex” (35.1%), followed by “no reaction required at all” (19.5%), “to show their dick too” (15.1%), “admiration” (14.1%), and “any reaction” (11.9%). Only a few respondents chose “anger and disgust” (3.8%) or “fear” (0.5%).

Exhibitionism perpetrators in several countries can be caught in lawsuits, in the form of a violation of the law which is called indecent exposure. Several types of behavior can be included as a form of exhibitionism, including:

• Anasirma, namely lifting the skirt when not wearing underwear with the aim of showing off the genitals.
• Flashing, namely temporarily opening a limb that is normally closed. In women, for example, showing off their bare breasts briefly by lifting and lowering clothing and/or bras briefly. Or also briefly showing off male or female genitalia.
• Martimaklia, which is a type of paraphilia that involves sexual attraction so that other people watch the sexual act he is doing.
• Mooning, namely showing naked buttocks by pushing pants and underwear. This behavior tends to become a gendered double standard: when performed by a male, it is more likely to be seen as a joke, humor, insult or ridicule, and has nothing to do with sexual arousal; whereas if it is done by a woman, the opposite happens, which is considered sexual stimulation (or at least sexual attention) to the target person shown.
• Streaking, namely the act of running completely naked across a public place. The goal is usually not sexual, but tension and “surprise” value that can be done by a boy or a girl.
• Candaulism, namely someone who exposes his sexual partner in an explicit way.
• Reflectoporn, namely the act of stripping oneself naked and taking pictures (photos or videos) using a reflective surface, for example taking pictures from a mirror and then uploading them to the internet or public forums. Another example of this behavior is the reflection of a man’s or woman’s genitals on the surfaces of kettles, televisions, toasters, knives, spoons and forks. Some examples of this started when a man was selling kettles at an auction in Australia and posted a photo of the kettle with his naked body reflected in the kettle. The specific term “reflektoporn” was first popularized by Chris Stevens in Internet Magazine.
• Telephone schatology, namely exhibitionism variant behavior, even though there is no direct physical interaction component.

Exhibitionism Classification

In general, there are two main groups of exhibitionism. Harmless exhibitionism and dangerous exhibitionism. However, in a scientific paper entitled Forensics and Medical-Legal Aspects of Sexual Crimes and Unusual Sexual Practices (2009) it is stated that exhibitionism can be classified as follows.

Class I: Fantasy Exhibitionists

These people fantasize about showing off their genitals to unsuspecting people, but are too scared to actually carry out the fantasy. They tend to stay happy only with their exhibitionist fantasies. Some of them may turn to zoophilic exhibitionism to fulfill their fantasies, as it seems a safer activity.

Class II: Pure Exhibitionist

These people are content to just show off their genitals from a distance and masturbate. They don’t touch their victims or actually hurt them in any way.

Class III: Criminal Exhibitionists

This type of offender is the most numerous exhibitionist group. They are also involved in other sexual crimes, notably pedophilia and child abuse. After discovering a child as a victim, their sexual behavior may begin as exhibitionism, but may develop into crimes of sexual abuse and child abuse. This is considered very dangerous for society and requires more attention.

Class IV: Exclusive Exhibitionists

These offenders are unable to form normal romantic relationships with persons of their gender preference group, and are unable to engage in normal sexual relationships. For them, exhibitionism is the only outlet for sexual gratification. Such exhibitionists do not appear to have been reported in the literature so far, but on the basis of paraphilia equivalence theory it can be predicted that such types do exist in society and that they will be reported sometime in the future. Their behavior lies at the extreme ends of the paraphilic continuum because they are unable to form normal romantic relationships with other people.

Common Examples of Exhibitionism

Incidents of someone showing off his genitals in a public place can happen to one or more people. The victim is unsuspecting, or even happens from a distance. Some places that are often the scene of this condition, namely:

• Window.
• In the car.
• At the threshold or entrance of a building.
• City bus.
• In the locker room or bathroom, and more.

Victims of the act of showing off genitals are likely to be people who do not know. This can be a source of sexual stimulation for people with exhibitionism.

Is Exhibitionism a Crime?

This depends on the level of the offense to be considered a crime. A person who has this condition can be prosecuted and even punished for:

• Doing indecent acts.
• Committing sexual harassment.
• Doing indecent things in public.
• Other crimes depend on the severity and circumstances that occurred.

Someone who commits these actions can become a serious accusation, even get a legal punishment that applies to social sanctions. Of course this also causes a psychological impact on the victims.

People with this condition also need to be offered mental health care, so they know if what they are doing is wrong. That way, the right action can make this disturbance that harms others better.

Causes of Sexual Disorders Exhibitionism

The exact cause of exhibitionism is not known. However, several factors are thought to cause or increase a person’s risk of experiencing this disorder. However, these factors are still being debated and need further investigation.

The factors in question are:

• Genetic and neuropsychological factors.
• Exhibitionism sexual disorder is thought to be caused by disruption of fetal brain development since in the womb.
• Childhood trauma factor. Some events that cause trauma in childhood, such as sexual abuse, emotional suffering, and lack of attention and affection from parents, can also increase a person’s risk of experiencing exhibitionism. Deviant sexual fantasies can be a form of mechanism to overcome the childhood trauma ( coping mechanism ).
• Several other factors can also increase the risk of exhibitionism, such as antisocial personality, alcohol abuse, and lack of self-confidence.

What Are the Characteristics of Exhibitionism Sexual Disorder Sufferers?

Symptoms of exhibitionism sexual disorder usually begin to appear at the age of 15-25 years and begin to decrease with age. The following are characteristics of people with exhibitionism sexual disorders:

• Feeling satisfied when showing genitals to strangers in public places. Some people with exhibitionism like to show off their genitals only to certain groups of people, such as young children or the opposite sex.
• Sexual arousal arises when you see the victim feeling shocked, scared, or amazed, followed by masturbation. However, there is no intention to make further physical contact or sexual intercourse with the victim.
• It tends to be difficult to start or maintain a relationship, both romantic and friendship.
• It is not uncommon for people with exhibitionism to also show symptoms of other paraphilic disorders and are considered to be hypersexual.

How to Overcome Exhibitionism Disorders

Most people who have this condition do not seek treatment until they are caught and forced to do so. If your loved one is suspected of having this disorder, immediate treatment is highly recommended. Actions that are commonly performed are psychotherapy and drug consumption.

Psychotherapy can help a person control their impulses and find ways to overcome the urge to show off their genitals. There are several approaches taken to make it better, namely relaxation training, empathy training, to cognitive restructuring.

Consumption of drugs can also be done to help inhibit sex hormones, so that sexual desire can be suppressed. Some drugs to treat depression and mood disorders may also be needed to get these benefits.

Not many sufferers of exhibitionism sexual disorder go to a psychiatrist or psychologist. They tend to hide their disorder because they feel guilty, ashamed, or have financial and legal problems.

In fact, sufferers of this disorder are advised to immediately get treatment, both medically and psychologically. This needs to be done before he endangers himself and others, or even commits a crime.

Exhibitionism therapy is carried out by psychiatrists with a choice of methods that vary, according to the severity of the disorder experienced by the patient. Some of the therapeutic methods that can be done are:

1. Psychotherapy

Through psychotherapy, sufferers will undergo individual or group counseling sessions. Some of the topics in counseling are specific, such as the topic of marriage or family. Psychotherapy is expected to help sufferers to improve behavior and ability to interact socially.

2. Drug Therapy

The types of drugs given can be hormone suppressants, antidepressants, or mood controllers. These drugs generally work by reducing sex drive, so that deviant sexual behavior can be suppressed.

Treatment for exhibitionism disorder is long-term and the success of treatment depends on the individual. If the sufferer has the desire to recover and become a better person, then the chances of successful therapy will be even greater.

Exhibitionism sexual harassment can have an impact on personal, social and work life, up to legal consequences. Even though exhibitionism sufferers do not aim to make further physical contact with the victim, this should not be taken lightly because it can cause fear or psychological trauma to victims, especially children.

If you witness exhibitionism, the action that needs to be taken is to immediately leave the scene and ask for help from other people or security officers who are around. Thus, exhibitionism sufferers can be immediately secured and treated.

Conclusion

Exhibitionism is part of the paraphilic sexual disorder. Paraphilias are deviant sexual urges, passions, fantasies, or behaviors involving objects, activities, or situations that generally do not arouse sexual desire.

Someone will be diagnosed as having exhibitionism sexual disorder if this behavior has been going on for at least 6 months and causes suffering, disturbance, or loss, both for the sufferer himself and for others.

Reference

• ” Exhibitionism, Desire to Show Off Private Areas in the Public Audience “. Halodoc . Retrieved 18 January 2023.
• ” Exhibitionism Sexual Disturbance, Likes to Show Genitals “. HealthReplies.com Retrieved 18 January 2023.

 

 

The Example of Prophet Sulaiman – As a Muslim in general, you will certainly know about the stories of the prophet who are always told when hearing religious lectures, be it in mosques, schools, or other places that are holding religious events.

As is well known, the stories of the prophets are true stories that have occurred centuries ago as part of the history of the development of the Islamic religion to this day. Faith in the prophets and apostles is the fourth pillar of faith. For Muslims, the pillars of faith are things that must be practiced. Before cultivating faith in the prophets and apostles, one must first understand and study the stories, miracles, history, and journeys of all 25 prophets and apostles.

The lesson to be learned from believing in the Prophets and Messengers is that we can motivate ourselves to be more active in worshiping Allah Ta’ala, stay away from all the prohibitions of Allah Ta’ala, follow and emulate the attitudes of the prophets and apostles. and have good behavior according to God’s commands. Prophets and apostles who have good morals with honest and true faith.

Prophet Sulaiman AS was no exception, who was also a king in his time but still had a generous nature and did not forget Allah SWT who had given him wealth and power, but he still did not become arrogant or become a cruel ruler. Even though he was hit by various obstacles while carrying out the task of conveying God’s commands, he remained patient and determined to be able to get through it.

Therefore, it is very good for us Muslims to emulate the qualities of Prophet Sulaiman AS as our guide to live life in this world so that we always do good and believe in God’s power.

For this reason, as a guide in living this life, we also have to know what role models the Prophet Sulaiman AS did and in this discussion we have summarized the example of Prophet Sulaiman AS for Sinaumed’s friends to learn and practice in everyday life.

Furthermore, we have presented the discussion below!

History of Prophet Sulayman AS

Solomon was a prophet endowed with special brilliance, intelligence and power. Prophet Solomon is known among the Jews as Solomon or Solomon, which means Prince of Peace. The name Solomon was given by his father, the Prophet David. He was born in Palestine around the 10th century (989-931) BC.

His father was Prophet Daud bin Yahuda bin Ya’qub bin Ishaq bin Ibrahim Al-Khalil. Prophet Sulaiman was the second child born to one of the wives of Prophet David named Bathsheba bint Eliem. Prophet Sulaiman was a very wise Jewish king and his people were called the children of Israel. The Al-Quran and al-Kitab mention that Prophet Sulaiman was chosen as the crown prince, who was deliberately prepared by Prophet David from the age of 11 to become king.

Then Prophet Sulaiman became king at a very young age, Prophet Sulayman became king from the age of 13. It was not without reason that Prophet David As appointed Prophet Sulaiman as his successor at a very young age because Prophet David As saw advantages and privileges in Prophet Sulaiman that his other children did not have.

Prophet Sulaiman was a smart, clever, wise and calculating child. Prophet Sulaiman inherited all the advantages and majesty of Prophet David and because Allah gave Prophet Sulaiman AS wisdom and understanding in making decisions.

The Qur’an mentions that Sulaiman (Solomon) understood the language of animals such as birds and ants. It is said that the ants warned the herd to return to their nest because Solomon (Solomon) and his army would trample them. Sulaiman (Solomon), who heard and understood the words of the ants, smiled and laughed and gave thanks to Allah. Sulaiman (Solomon) can also chat with hud-hud birds and talk with genies.

Sulaiman (Solomon) is also said to have gathered his army consisting of humans, jinn and birds, ordered the hud-hud to convey messages and eavesdrop on people’s conversations, caught demons and ordered them to build and dive, melted copper, ordered the jinn to make things wanted Solomon (Solomon) to build it, what he wanted, such as tall buildings, statues and tiles the size of a pond.

The Qur’an mentions that no one knew about Solomon’s (Solomon) death until termites damaged the supports and caused Solomon’s (Solomon) body to fall. The scholars reported that Solomon (Solomon) died while in the house of worship, while the jinn who worked for him went in and out of the house of worship.

When Solomon’s body fell, they immediately came out and told the people that Solomon was dead. Another statement says that the jinn immediately ran away from his duties. Some scholars say Sulaiman (Solomon) died when he was over 50 years old, some scholars say he was 52 years old. The Bible says that Solomon (Solomon) ruled for forty years.

Exemplifying the Wisdom from the Story of Prophet Sulayman AS

The exemplary nature of Prophet Sulayman AS teaches us so many lessons about the true purpose of life. Imitating the practice of Prophet Sulaiman can make us pious Muslims.

Prophet Sulaiman AS was a prophet sent by Allah SWT to the Children of Israel. He was given a grand mandate to lead the kingdom of Israel. Previously under the guidance of his father the Prophet David AS. At that time he was known as one of the four great kings of the world who once ruled part of the world.

1. Trusted, Fair and Wise Leader

Prophet Sulayman was truly a legendary king as a leader. His name and majesty are known throughout the world

He was very good at organizing and managing his empire. Even Prophet Sulayman was famous for his wisdom and justice in finding solutions to the problem.

He also has the ability to organize his entire large army. Consists of humans, jinn and animals.

This huge army possessed enormous strength. Because of his trustworthiness, fairness and wisdom, Prophet Sulayman AS led his government for 40 years.

Some even claim that Prophet Sulayman AS led the Israelites to the pinnacle of glory through peaceful means. Prophet Solomon’s example is truly extraordinary.

2. Always Humble and Ashamed of God

Even though he was given enormous and unlimited power, this did not make Prophet Sulayman AS completely arrogant. On the contrary, he felt humiliated in front of other creatures of God.

Prophet Sulaiman was the only prophet and king who was privileged by Allah SWT to understand the language of animals, to be able to speak with hud-hud birds and also to understand the language of ants. Prophet Sulayman who had full power over the vast and expanding kingdom of the Children of Israel and Allah subjected him to other creatures, namely jinn, winds and birds, all of which were under his command. what he wants and obeys all his orders.

God also gave a gift of liquid copper flowing from the earth to be used in building work. The various features possessed by the prophet Sulaiman are: First, understanding the language of animals. Second, to be the richest Prophet of humanity in the history of civilization. Third, has the strongest army in human history, namely a team of humans and jinn working under his command. Fourth, He also directs the winds according to His commands.

However, with his great and unlimited strength, Prophet Sulaiman felt humbled before his fellow creatures, including a sense of shame before Allah SWT, Prophet Sulayman saw God’s grace so great, but he felt that his worship was still lacking.

He was ashamed to look at the sky because he was ashamed of Allah, Prophet Sulayman liked to have dialogue with the little people and he liked to communicate with his people, even if only with a few ants. Prophet Sulayman also liked to work in gratitude. And the solemnity of Prophet Sulaiman’s prayer was so great that he died while praying in a standing position.

3. Enjoying Work as Gratitude

Prophet Sulaiman was one of the prophets who enjoyed work as a form of gratitude and love for Allah. This later became one of the examples of Prophet Sulaiman.

His ability to be grateful is described in the Holy Qur’an. It is said that he once questioned God.

He asked God for guidance to show him someone who would make him intelligent and grateful. Then Allah told Prophet Sulayman to meet two people who were working hard.

One of them was working hard with the intention of stabbing his stomach out of hunger. Then the others worked hard with the intention of giving thanks to Allah.

He was not one of those who were said to be idle. After seeing the two men, Prophet Sulaiman AS also prayed to Allah to give him a job, which made him always grateful.

Then God taught the knowledge of iron with gold with gold. Thus, he became the first person to coat iron with gold. We must follow the example of Prophet Sulaiman in our daily lives.

4. Always keep the prayer

To the extent that he died in a standing position praying. Have you prayed humbly? Allah said in QS. As Saba’ (34): 14:

فَلَمَّا قَضَيْنَا عَلَيْهِ الْمَوْتَ مَا دَلَّهُمْ عَلَىٰ مَوْتِهِ إِلَّا دَابَّةُ الْأَرْضِ تَأْكُلُ مِنْسَأَتَهُ ۖ فَلَمَّا خَرَّ تَبَيَّنَتِ الْجِنُّ أَنْ لَوْ كَانُوا يَعْلَمُونَ الْغَيْبَ مَا لَبِثُوا فِي الْعَذَابِ الْمُهِينِ

Meaning: “So when We determined the death of Solomon, nothing showed them his death except for the termites that ate his staff. So when he had fallen down, the genie knew that if they had known the unseen they would not have remained in humiliating torment (becoming hard-working servants for Prophet Sulaiman). (QS. As Saba: 14)

Some interpretations state that Prophet Sulaiman died while praying while standing. While standing, Allah SWT took his soul and he stood with his hands leaning on his stick, he stood in a dead position for one year and his army which also consisted of jinns and demons, did not know that Prophet Sulaiman had died, even though he had been dead for one year. So the termites ate the stick used for prostration until it was fragile, then Prophet Sulaiman fell and the genie realized that it was Prophet Sulaiman who had died.

5. Has a High Level of Intelligence

One day there was an event that showed his intelligence and spirit of mind, which occurred at the court he attended. During the trial, two men came to complain and asked the Prophet David to hear their case, namely that one of the two men said that a herd of goats entered his plantation area at night, causing damage to the garden he had tended for so long that approaching harvest time.

The friend who complained testified that his friend’s complaint was true and that his livestock damaged his friend’s garden and yard.

In this case, the father of Prophet Sulayman, namely Prophet David, decided that as compensation to the owner of the garden due to the consequences of his friend’s pet goat, the owner of the goat must surrender his pets to the owner of the garden as compensation for his mistakes.

But things were different with his father, according to the prophet Sulaiman who heard his father’s decision, but felt that it was not right, he said to his father: “O father, in my opinion, the decision should be like this, to the owner of the yard, whose crops were destroyed; he has to give his friend to take care of his pet goat for breeding, take the produce and use it for your needs. While the damaged yard was given to his friend to be repaired and cared for until it returned to its original state, each of them got back what was his, so that neither party who gains or loses in this way is better than he should be.

Sulaiman’s proposed decision was well received by the plaintiffs and all witnesses, received with admiration for Sulaiman’s intelligence and wisdom by those present at the trial. Despite her young age, she shows maturity and courage to speak her mind, even if it doesn’t agree with her father.

This event is the beginning of the history of Prophet Sulayman As, which is full of prophetic miracles and God’s grace shown to him and his father Prophet David.

6. A compassionate prophet to others

Allah SWT gave Prophet Sulaiman a miracle in the form of understanding the language of animals. One day, a large group of Prophet Sulayman went to Asgal Valley and the group included Prophet Sulaiman and his people, angels, jinns and animals. On the way, he ordered his entourage to stop.

“Wait a minute, we are giving God’s creatures time to save themselves,” said Prophet Sulaiman.

“O Nabiyullah, why did we suddenly stop in the middle of the road?” asked one of the group.

“Ahead is an ant valley with millions of ants in it. I will order them to cover them so that our group does not trample them,” answered Prophet Sulaiman.

Prophet Sulayman seemed to hear from afar the conversation of the ant king who told the ants to hide. This is a very big miracle, you will again hear about the beast from afar, he is Nabiyullah Sulaiman, the king of all kings living in this world and there has never been a king in this world who was as big as him.

When Solomon heard what the ants were saying, he smiled. What did the little ant imagine? Even though Solomon gained power and had a large army, he showed mercy to the ants.

He heard her whisper and saw an ant in front of him. Therefore, it was impossible for him to step on it. Sulaiman thanked Allah SWT. who gave him the favors, namely the favors of mercy and the favors of love.

This story is an excerpt from the verse of AI-Qur’an surah An-Naml verse 18 which means, “Until when they arrive at the Valley of the Ants say an ant, enter into your nests so that you are not stepped on by Sulaiman As. and his army, while they are not aware.”

Conclusion

That’s all for a brief discussion of examples from the story of Prophet Sulaiman AS.

From the story of the Prophet Sulaiman AS mentioned above, there are many examples that we can learn and lessons that we can learn to live our daily lives. Reading and emulating the story and character of Prophet Sulaiman AS teaches us to always be grateful and not arrogant with everything we have because it is all entrusted and will return to Him, the Almighty.

This is a review of the exemplary story of the Prophet Sulaiman AS. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the story of the example of Prophet Sulaiman AS and science related to other religions, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books. As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you.

Author: Pandu Akram

Related article:

The Prayers of Prophet Sulayman AS and His Wisdom

This Prayer of the Prophet Khidir When You Have a Desire or Hajat

Sekaten is the Commemoration Ceremony of the Birth of the Prophet Muhammad SAW

Prophet Saleh’s Miracles and Stories with the Thamud

Differences between the Book and the Shuf and the Recipients of the Prophets

The example of the Prophet Ismail – If we recall the history of one of the most memorable prophetic events and the beginning of the Eid al-Adha worship which is synonymous with cutting sacrificial animals as a form of gratitude to Allah SWT who has given us life, this is an important event for a prophet and his father namely the prophet Ismail AS and the prophet Abraham AS.

This historical event, especially for Muslims around the world, regarding the fortitude of a child, namely the prophet Ismail who, because of Allah SWT’s orders, was willing to sacrifice himself to be slaughtered by his own father, namely the Prophet Ibrahim AS as a form of obedience to Allah SWT, but at the last moment Allah replaced the position of Prophet Ismail The US brought a fat lamb from heaven in exchange for its slaughter and the position of the prophet Ismail was saved and the prophet Abraham passed the test of Allah SWT regarding his obedience to carrying out God’s commands.

This event became very historical because it contained a very deep message about the fortitude of a child and the obedience of a father in carrying out God’s commands and at the same time it was a touching event because in the end they were able to live together again as a family after passing a test from Allah SWT.

As Muslims in the present era, we should be grateful for this incident because in the future there will no longer be stories of a father having to sacrifice his beloved son to be slaughtered but instead replaced with other livestock such as cows, camels and sheep. From this story, we can learn many things about the story of father and son, the obedience of a servant, and the fortitude of a child to his father and God.

For this reason, it is very interesting if in this discussion we will summarize the exemplary story of the prophet Ismail AS and it is very good for us Muslims to emulate the qualities of the prophet Ismail AS as our guide to live life in this world so that we always do good and believe in the power of God. 

History of the Prophet Ismail

Isma’il or Ismail (Arabic: إسماعيل, translate. Ismā’īl‎; Hebrew: יִשְׁמָעֵאל, Modern Yishmael Tiberias Yišmāʻēl) is a character in the Qur’an, Bible and Tanakh. In Islam, he is seen as a prophet and messenger.[1] Isma’il is also associated with Makkah and the construction of the Kaaba. Isma’il was the first child of Abraham and the ancestor of Muhammad. His descendants were called `Arab al-Musta’ribah (“Arabized Arabs”), because they were not native Arabs and learned Arabic from the local natives. The verse that states about the story of the prophet Ismail AS is the following:

“And tell (Muhammad) the story of Ishmael in the Book. He is truly a true promise, an apostle and prophet. And he ordered his family to (carry out) prayers and (pay) zakat, and he is a person who is pleased with his Lord.” (QS) Maryam (19): 54–55

Follow the story of the Prophet Ismail AS

1. The Birth of Prophet Ismail is the Fruit of Patience from a Father (Prophet Ibrahim)

It is said that Prophet Ibrahim and his wife Siti Sarah have not been blessed with a child. Prophet Ibrahim also continued to pray to Allah so that he would be blessed with pious and obedient children. For once, Sarah knew what her husband was waiting for. However, she could not fulfill her husband’s wishes because she had an infertile uterus. Then Siti Sarah came up with a plan to bring Prophet Ibrahim closer to his slave named Siti Hajar and planned to get married.

Siti Sarah also hopes that through this marriage Prophet Ibrahim can have pious children from his marriage to Siti Hajar. Then at one point, Siti Sarah revealed a plan to her husband. Then Prophet Ibrahim said: “First we have to ask Siti Hajar whether she agrees or not.” Then Siti Sarah and Prophet Ibrahim asked Siti Hajar directly and Siti Hajar agreed. Long story short, Prophet Ibrahim and Siti Hajar got married and then Siti Hajar was successfully impregnated by her husband (Prophet Ibrahim).

Then, when Siti Hajar was 9 months pregnant, she gave birth to a child who later became Prophet Ismail. It is said that the birth of the Prophet Ismail was the answer to the prayer that the Prophet Abraham always prayed to Allah. Not in vain, decades of waiting from a father, namely the Prophet Abraham, resulted in the giving of a child as an answer to his prayers so far to Allah SWT.

2. Believing that all decisions of Allah SWT are the best and contain wisdom behind them

Some time after Ishmael’s birth, Allah told Prophet Ibrahim to go to Mecca with Hajar and his son. Without thinking, Prophet Ibrahim obeyed Allah’s command, took Hajar and Ismail along through the desert and stopped near where the Kaaba building now stands. Shortly after arriving there, Prophet Ibrahim left Hajar and Ismail there to return to Sham.

Hajar immediately grabbed Ibrahim’s clothes and said: “O Ibrahim, where are you going? Are you going to leave us in a valley where there is no one and nothing here?” Hajar repeated her question, but no words came out of Ibrahim’s mouth. Ibrahim did not even turn his head to answer his wife’s words. Finally Hajar said: “Did God command you before all this?” Then suddenly Ibrahim answered “Yes”. And Hajar accepted that, saying: “Then God will not leave us.”

Prophet Ibrahim AS traveled to Mecca at the behest of Allah. He moved in with his second wife Siti Hajar and son Nabi Ismail AS. This command from Allah happened because Prophet Ibrahim AS made a decision after seeing his first wife jealous of the happiness of Prophet Ibrahim AS and Siti Hajar. This migration to Mecca occurred by riding a camel and after reaching Mecca they started looking for a place of refuge. We found a tree to use for shelter, it was a dauhah tree and they immediately got off the camels.

Prophet Ibrahim AS began leaving his wife and children under the dauha tree. Actually Prophet Ibrahim AS did not dare to leave his wife and children in this very quiet and lonely place, but it was all because of Allah’s order, so Prophet Ibrahim AS did not want to violate it. Before Prophet Abraham left his wife and children, he said to his wife: “Fear God who has decided His will. Trust in His power and grace.

He ordered me to bring you (Hajar) here.” It was he who provided security to this abandoned place. Without Allah’s orders and revelations, I can’t bear to leave you with my beloved son. Believe, O Hajar, that Allah will not leave you both without His protection. His mercy and blessings always descend forever, God willing.”

Siti Hajar only brought a bottle of drinking water and some dates. Siti Hajar’s heart felt peaceful after the message of Prophet Ibrahim AS. In this lonely place, Siti Hajar began to pray to God to always provide protection so that she could survive in this dry and lonely place.

3. Obedient and obedient to both parents

Once Prophet Ibrahim AS really wanted to meet Siti Hajar and Ismail and asked Siti Sarah for permission to go meet Siti Hajar and Ismail. After getting permission from Siti Sarah, Prophet Ibrahim AS started going to the place where he left his wife and children in a deserted and quiet place. Arriving at their destination, Prophet Ibrahim AS was surprised because the place that used to be peaceful is now bustling and inhabited and the life of his wife and son is improving and thriving.

Siti Hajar, who saw the arrival of Prophet Ibrahim AS, was very happy and very happy, because she had not seen him for a long time. Likewise Prophet Ibrahim AS was very happy for the meeting of his son and wife and immediately apologized for having to leave his wife and son: “O my wife and children, forgive me. Until now I have never seen your situation of having to preach to spread the truth to the people there.”

Prophet Ibrahim, who was too tired after a long journey, began to rest at Masy’aril Haram (now Musdalifah). Prophet Ibrahim AS, who was sleeping soundly, saw in a dream an order to slaughter his son Ismail, as a sacrifice to Allah. After seeing this dream, Prophet Ibrahim AS immediately woke up from his sleep and kept thinking.

Interpreting the meaning of the dream of slaughtering his son for a long time, until the morning Prophet Ibrahim AS could not close his eyes and was still trying to interpret his dream, he wanted to tell his wife and son, but was afraid of adding to the worries and anxieties of his wife and children. AS went straight to bed to rest his body. During this break, Prophet Ibrahim AS started to dream that he was ordered to slaughter his son: “O Ibrahim. slaughter Ismail as a sacrifice to Allah SWT “

The order to slaughter made Prophet Ibrahim AS confused so that sweat dripped down his forehead. The heart of Prophet Ibrahim AS began to feel restless and restless, so he took ablution water and prayed. After seeing two dreams in the form of orders to slaughter, Prophet Ibrahim AS was convinced to slaughter his son for the third time. In the third dream, Prophet Ibrahim AS began to believe that the command to slaughter was an order from Allah.

After going through much consideration and full of faith, Prophet Ibrahim AS still slaughtered his son Ismail, even though Satan tempted him with the wrong order. Prophet Ibrahim also called his son and began to speak: “My son Ismail, I really want you to always be patient and firm in accepting God’s commands.” Ismail was very sincere and patient in accepting all orders: “Father, what Allah commands, just say! I remained patient and steadfast, and as a servant of God, all his commands had to be obeyed.

Explain the order and I will be patient to listen to it.” After hearing all of his father’s explanations, Ismail continued to show patience and strength. However, his wife Siti Hajar was very surprised to hear all of Allah’s commands narrated in the dream of Prophet Ibrahim AS. Siti Hajar also started crying, tears streaming down her cheeks and could only hug her beloved son before being slaughtered. Siti Hajar could only cry because if that was God’s command, she could not refuse it and would still fulfill all of God’s commands. The next day, Siti Hajar had to release her son from Prophet Ibrahim AS to bring him to fulfill Allah’s command.

On the way to their destination, Prophet Ibrahim AS and Ismail received many temptations from Satan to disobey God’s commands. Even so, with full confidence, the two of them continued their journey to Ismail’s slaughter place. After arriving at his destination, Prophet Ibrahim could not bear to kill his son on a hill, so he covered Ismail’s face. When Prophet Ibrahim AS wanted to fulfill Allah’s order, the angel Gabriel came, who was sent by Allah to prevent slaughter.

The angel Gabriel then replaced Ismail with a goat and told Prophet Ibrahim AS “make that day a day of celebration for the two of you and give goat meat to the poor”. He recounts the incident precisely in the following verse:

“So when the child reached (the age of being able to) try with Ibrahim, Ibrahim said: O my son, I actually saw in a dream that I was slaughtering you. Then think about what you think! He answered, O my father, do what you are commanded; God willing, you will find me among those who are patient.” 

“When both of them had surrendered and Ibrahim laid his son on (his) temple, (the patience of the two of them was evident). And We called him: O Ibrahim, indeed you have justified the dream, verily thus We reward those who do good. In fact, this is really a real test. And We ransomed the child with a large sacrifice.”

Conclusion

That’s all for a brief discussion of the example from the story of the prophet Ismail AS.

From the story of the Prophet Ismail AS mentioned above, there are many examples that we can learn and lessons that we can learn to live our daily lives. Reading and emulating the story and character of Prophet Ismail AS teaches us to always obey and be patient with every test given by Allah SWT.

Thus a review of the exemplary story of the prophet Ismail AS. For Sinaumed’s who want to learn all about the exemplary story of the prophet Ismail AS and other religious-related knowledge, you can visit sinaumedia.com to get related books.

As #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides the best products, so you have the best and latest information for you.

Author: Pandu Akram

Articles related to the example of the Prophet Ismail AS:

Definition of Suhuf and 5 Prophets Who Received It

This Prayer of the Prophet Khidir When You Have a Desire or Hajat

Sekaten is the Commemoration Ceremony of the Birth of the Prophet Muhammad SAW

The Prayers of Prophet Sulayman AS and His Wisdom

 

Examples of Vertebrate Animals  – Vertebrates are a group of animals that have a backbone. In the classification system, vertebrates are a subphylum of the phylum Chordata. Phylum Chordata consists of three subphyla, namely Urochordata, Cephalochordata, and vertebrates. Check out more about the explanation of vertebrates below, Sinaumed’s!

1. DEFINITIONS OF VERTEBRATES

Vertebrate animals are a group of animals that have a backbone. The spine originates from the development of the primary body support axis or notochord (dorsal chord). Vertebrate notochord exists only in the embryonic period, after adulthood it will experience reinforcement to become a secondary body support system, namely the spine (vertebrae).

In the classification system, vertebrates are a subphylum of the phylum Chordata. Chordata includes animals that have the following characteristics:

• It has a notochord, which is a hard but flexible rod-shaped skeleton. The notochord lies between the alimentary canal and the nerve cord, extending the length of the body to form the axis of the skeleton.
• It has a single, perforated nerve cord located dorsal to the notochord, and has an enlarged anterior end in the form of a brain.
• It has a tail that extends posteriorly to the anus.
• Has pharyngeal slits.

2. CHARACTERISTICS OF VERTEBRATES

Some vertebrate animal skins are covered with fur and some are covered with hair. Internal organs, such as the digestive, heart, and respiratory organs are contained within a body cavity or coelom. In addition, vertebrate animals have complete organs, which make up their organ systems including the digestive system that extends from the mouth to the anus, a closed circulatory system (blood flows in the blood vessels), excretory organs in the form of kidneys, respiratory organs in the form of lungs. or gills, a pair of reproductive organs (right and left) and the endocrine system which functions to produce hormones. The following are other characteristics of vertebrate animals:

• Has nerves consisting of the brain and spinal cord
• Respire with skin and gill lungs.
• Has round and endoxin glands that produce controlling hormones.
• Having a hot and steady body temperature (homoiternal) or a cold body temperature according to environmental conditions (poikiloternal).
• The digestive tract extends from the mouth to the anus, which is located next to the vertran and behind.
• Epidermis (outer) and endodermis (inner) skin.
• Reproductive organs in pairs, except in birds.

3. CLASSIFICATION OF VERTEBRATES

a. PISCES

Pisces has a habitat in the water with gills for breathing. This animal has fins that function to determine the direction of motion in the water and has lateral lines to determine water pressure. Including cold-blooded animals (poikilothermic), namely body temperature adjusted to the environment. Pisces reproduce by laying eggs (ovipar). Based on the type of bones, fish are divided into 3 groups, namely:

• Agnatha (Jawless Fish): Order Agnatha, Examples of species Petromyzon, lampreys, Polistrotema (hag fish), Examples of species Polystrotema (hag fish)
• Chondrichthyes or cartilaginous fish, Examples of species: Bison-headed shark (Heterodontus sp), Hammerhead shark (Spyrna tudes), Dog-headed shark (Squalus acanthias), Stingray (Dasyatis sabina), Tiger shark (Sphyrna blochii)
• Osteichthyes or fish with hard bones, for example: carp, gourami, tuna. Pisces vertebrate

b. AMPHIBIA

Amphibians are animals that can live in two habitats, namely land and water, but not all types of Amphibians live in two places of life. Some types of frogs, salamanders, and caecilians exist only in water and exist only on land. However, their overall habitat is close to water and damp places such as swamps and tropical rainforests. These animals breathe with gills, lungs and have a poikilothermic body temperature, reproduce by laying eggs (ovipar) and fertilization occurs outside the body (external). Amphibians are divided into 3 orders, namely:

• Order Stegoephalia: An example of the species is Ichtyopsis
• Order Caudata: Examples of species are Cryptobranchus (river salamander), Hynobius (Salamander that lives on the plains of Asia), Megalobatrachus maximus (Salamander commonly eaten in Japan)
• Anura Order: An example of the species is Rana sp. (Frog), Polypedates leucomystax (Tree frog), Microhyla (Frog), Bufo Marinus (Big frog)

So that Sinaumed’s can understand more deeply about Amphibian animals, the book Why? The Reptiles and Amphibians by YeaRimDang contains various explanations and understandings packaged in picture form to make it easier and more interesting to read.

c. REPTILE

Reptiles (in Latin, reptiles = reptiles) have scaly skin made of horny substance (keratin). Scales function to prevent dryness. Other features shared by most reptiles are five-fingered limbs, breathing with lungs, three or four bear hearts, using environmental energy to regulate body temperature so they are classified as poikilothermic animals, internal fertilization, producing eggs so they are classified as oviparous with shelled eggs. . Reptilia is divided into 4 Orders:

• Chelonian Order
• Rhynchocephalia
• Squamata
• Crocodilia

If Sinaumed’s wants to know the various types of reptiles, the book Reptilpedia by Christina Wilsdon discusses each type of reptile in detail along with colorful photos and dancing facts about reptiles.

d. AVES

Aves have a homoiterm body temperature (body temperature is constant, not affected by ambient temperature). It has a hairy body that forms wings and is used for flying. The bones are hollow so they are light. Breed by laying eggs (ovipar) and fertilization in the body. Aves eggs are shelled and have a large yolk. These animals breathe with the lungs and have air sacs that help breathing while flying. Example: chicken, cassowary, penguin, duck, goose. Aves is divided into several Orders:

• Order Colombiforines
• Order Coracaiiformes
• Order Grana Cares
• Order of the Nato Torres
• Order of Rapaces

In understanding this type of aves, Sinaumed’s can read a book entitled Aves Invertebrata – Exploring the Animal World written by Genevieve De Becker which explains it easily and also interestingly.

e. MAMMALIA

A distinctive feature of mammals is the mammary glands. Milk is produced by glands (mammae) located in the stomach or chest area. Mammalia are also called mammals because they suckle their young.

Mammals’ bodies are covered with hair which functions as insulation which slows down heat exchange with the environment, as a sense of touch, among others, on the mustache, as protection from friction and sunlight, as a disguise or defense to protect against prey, and as a sex characteristic.

Mammalia reproduce by giving birth (viviparous). These animals have a homoiterm body temperature (fixed body temperature) and breathe with the lungs. Mammals have a more developed brain compared to other vertebrate animals. Various orders of mammals:

• Order Insectivora
• Order of the Phalidata
• Order Chiroptera
• Marsupial Order
• Order Prosboscidae
• Order Artidactea

4. Examples of Vertebrate Animals

Some examples of vertebrate animals, as follows:

1. Bison Headed Shark (Heterodontus sp)
2. Hammerhead shark (Spyrna tudes)
3. Goldfish
4. Gouramy
5. Mackarel tuna.
6. Tree frog (Polypedates leucomystax )
7.  Penguin
8. Duck
9. Swan

After discussing several examples of vertebrate animals, to make it easier for you to understand vertebrate animals, the next discussion is the morphology and anatomy of vertebrate animals.

5. MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF VERTEBRATES

The morphology and anatomy of vertebrate animals is divided based on the classification of vertebrate animals, namely fish, amphibians, reptiles, aves, and mammals.

MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF PISCES

Each type of fish or fish has a different anatomy in their body, such as sharks that never stop swimming, and many more are discussed in the book Animal Anatomy Series: Sharks and Other Fish by David West.

Pisces (fish) is an animal that lives in water, they can breathe underwater because they have gills. Pisces can be found in fresh water (lakes or rivers) or salt water (seas or oceans). Pisces are cold-blooded animals (poikilothermic), which means their body temperature changes according to the temperature of the water in which they live.

Fish are the most diverse group of vertebrates, with more than 27,000 species worldwide. Most of the body structure of fish is formed by the skeleton, the bones that make up the body are cartilage, and also true bones. The gills and tail they each have can help them to move quickly in the water.

Morphological Characteristics:

• It is covered with scales and has lateral lines to determine swimming direction and position
• The body consists of the Head
• The skeleton is composed of true bones
• No auricles

Anatomical Features:

• Have a liver, but the stomach is only an enlargement of the intestine. In the intestine there are spiral valves
• Have gills that have an operculum and gill slits. The swim bladder consists of oxygen, CO₂, N₂, and functions as a breathing apparatus. In dipnoi there are pneumatocysts which function as lungs when fish live in mud containing little water
• The heart bears two, the blood gets O₂ in the gill filaments
• Having pronephrons or kidneys. In aghata there is no renal portal system
• The brain consists of 5 sections of 10 cranial nerves
• Females have a pair of ovaries and a pair of oviducts, oviparous or viviparous

MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF AMPHIBIA

Each type of amphibian also has a different anatomy from one another, such as frogs that can live on land as well as water and salamander skin that is moist and also thin. The differences between frogs and toads are explained in a book entitled Animal Anatomy Series: Frogs and Other Amphibians. by David West.

Amphibians are animals with high humidity skin, not covered by hair and are able to live in water or on land. Amphibia comes from the Greek, namely Amphi which means two and Bios which means life. Therefore, amphibians are defined as animals that have two forms of life, namely on land and in water.

Amphibians are the smallest group of vertebrates, numbering only 3,000 species. Like fish and reptiles, amphibians are cold-blooded animals. This means that amphibians cannot regulate their own body temperature. For this reason, amphibians need the sun to warm their bodies. Initially, amphibians started life in waters and carried out respiration using gills. Along with the growth of the lungs and legs develop and amphibians can walk on land.

Morphological Characteristics:

• Can live in water and on land or damp places
• Also called animals that have a place to live (habitat) in two realms
• Animals breathe with lungs and skin.
• The skin consists of the dermis
• Has no ears

Anatomical Features:

• Digestion is perfect, the jaws are also cloaced.
• Tongue mouth
• Respiratory organs in the form of lungs, skin, and gills. Gas exchange occurs in the skin. The larvae breathe with gills
• Three bear heart, two atria and one chamber. Closed circulation includes the carotid, systemic, and pulmocutaneous arteries. It has 3 kinds of veins namely the kafa vein, portal vein, and pulmonary vein.
• Mesonephroid type kidney with urinary tract urine exits through the cloaca. The bladder is a thin bubble on the ventral side of the cloaca
• The brain is divided into five sections with 10 cranial nerves.
• Has endocrine glands and thyroid glands.
• Eggs encased in gelatin, placed in water, hatch into larvae and undergo metamorphosis into adult frogs.

REPTILE MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY

In reptile animals, we can also see how lizards can break their tails, chameleons can change their body color, and many more are described in the book Animal Anatomy Series: Crocodiles and Other Reptiles by David West.

The word Reptilia comes from the word reptum which means creeping. Reptiles are the first group of land animals to breathe with lungs throughout their lives. The common feature of this class that distinguishes it from other classes is that its entire body is covered with dry skin or scales.

This skin covers the entire surface of the body and in some members of certain orders or sub-orders it can peel or shed its skin either totally, namely in members of the Ophidia sub-order and partially exfoliating in members of the Lacertilia sub-order.

The skin of reptiles has very few skin glands. Reptiles are included in vertebrates which are generally tetrapods, but in some of them their limbs are reduced or completely lost as in serpentes and some lacertillas. Reptiles that do not experience limb reduction generally have 5 fingers or pentadactylus and each finger has a claw.

Morphological Characteristics:

• Dry scaly skin of horny substance due to a substance keritin
• Cold-blooded (porcholioconal), i.e. those whose body temperature is affected by ambient temperature
• Locomotion tools in the form of legs and tail Do not have ears

Anatomical Features:

• It has hearts, prankeas, teeth and tongues
• Pulmonary breathing apparatus with long, cartilaginous ringed trachea
• Has 2 aortic that turns left and right. The heart of a bear has 4, namely 2 atria and 2 chambers but the partition between the 2 chambers is not perfect. Has nucleated erythrocytes. In some reptiles the partition between the right ventricle and left ventricle is not perfect so that dirty blood and clean blood can still mix.
• Has a pair of flattened kidneys, there are ureters that empty into the cloaca, although they also have urinary contents
• The central nervous system is the brain with 12 pairs of cranial nerves. Shelled eggs.
• To regulate body temperature, reptiles carry out a basking mechanism, namely basking in the sun.
• The excretory duct of Class Reptilia ends in the cloaca. There are two types of cloaca that are specific to the reptilian orders. Cloacas with transverse slits are found in the Squamata Order, namely the Lacertilia Sub-order and the Ophidia Sub-order. The cloaca with longitudinal slits is found in the Chelonian Order and the Crocodilian Order.

MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF AVES

Why can penguins live in cold temperatures and why can owls see in the dark? All matters regarding the types of aves will be discussed in a book entitled Animal Anatomy Series: Penguins and Other Poultry.

Aves are vertebrate animals whose entire body is covered with hair. The fur originates from the epidermis of the skin and is a modification of the scales in reptiles. Feathers on birds can adapt to their environment to form wings so that some aves have the ability to fly.

As for birds that have wings but cannot fly, such as ostriches, chickens, kiwis, turkeys, etc. In addition, aves are homoiterm animals or warm-blooded animals and reproduce by laying eggs and then being incubated until they hatch (Ovipar). The science that studies birds is ornithology.

Morphological Characteristics:

• The visual, auditory and vocal organs are well developed
• Warm-blooded (homoioteral)
• Hairy skin
• Has no ears
• Have wings

Anatomical Features:

• Have salivary glands, pancreatic glands, and a liver that produces bile
• Breathe with the lungs which are connected with air sacs which are also connected with the pipe bones
• The heart is covered by a pericardial membrane, bears 4, namely 2 atria, 2 vertical, with perfect chamber partitions. One aortic arch on the right. Only has 1 port system
• Metanephron-type kidney. Has no bladder. The renal portal vein is not divided into renal capillaries
• The brain’s central nervous system with 12 pairs of cranial nerves
• Male animals do not have a penis, female animals only have one ovary

MORPHOLOGY AND ANATOMY OF MAMMALS

What makes whales able to shoot water from their heads and why are gorillas often considered intelligent animals? Check out all the information about mammals in the book Animal Anatomy Series: Whales and Other Mammals from David West.

Mammals are also called mammals, because mammals are animals that have mammary glands as a source of food for their children, their bodies are covered with hair, have vertebrates or are warm-blooded animals. These mammals have or have more than > 5000 species spread all over the world. Indonesia has approximately 165 endemic species of mammals. Morphological Characteristics:

• Generally live on land, but some live in water such as whales, dolphins
• hot-blooded
• On the skin there are sweat glands and oil glands Have auricles

Anatomical Features:

• Inside the mouth there is a hard upper palate and a soft back. The digestive glands are 4 pairs of salivary glands, liver and gallbladder and pancreas.
• With 2 lobes of the lung each in a separate pleural space. There is a larynx roofed by the epiglottis as a vocal organ.
• There are 2 pieces of anterior vena cava left and right. Bear heart 4 with perfect partition. Red blood cells are not nucleated
• A pair of metanephric-type kidneys, shaped like peas. The chambers of the kidney and bladder are connected by a pair of ureters. Urine exits through the urogenital opening.
• Central nervous system: relatively large cerebrum and cerebellum; There are 12 pairs of cranial nerves. The genital opening and anus are separate. Male animals have a copulation tool in the form of a penis. The testicles produce spermatozoids and are in the scrotal sac. Ovum is very small.

Summary of Vertebrate Animals

From all the discussion above, it can be concluded that vertebrate animals have 5 classifications, the first is pisches, the second is amphibians, reptiles, aves, and mammals. The five classifications have their own characteristics, so that the shape of each different classification of vertebrate animals is very different. Not only that, each classification of vertebrate animals already has their own habitat, for example, fish that live in water (Pisces) or frogs that can live in water and on land (amphibians).

Thus the definition, characteristics, classification and morphology and anatomy of vertebrate animals. Hopefully useful Sinaumed’s!

Examples of Using Alternative Energy – Does Sinaumed’s know what alternative energy means? Alternative energy is an energy source that is often used as a substitute for fossil fuels such as coal, oil and natural gas.

Then why should fossil fuels be replaced? This is because fossil fuels are non-renewable natural resources, so their quantity and availability can run out.

Therefore, we have to conserve non-renewable energies, for example in electrical energy that comes from a coal energy source. The amount of coal on earth is limited, so it must be used sparingly. If you can’t save electrical energy, then more and more coal energy will eventually be used.

Therefore, experts then began to use alternative energy to replace energy that was becoming less in number and available. What are examples of alternative uses and their benefits for life? Come on, find out more details by reading this review until the end.

Examples of Using Alternative Energy Sources

Fossil energy can become the main foundation for a number of countries in the world, including Indonesia. In fact, Indonesia can take advantage of several sources of renewable energy or alternative energy because it is endowed with abundant natural wealth, even though its management has not run optimally.

Even so, the Indonesian government has committed to switch from fossil energy to renewable energy. Energy derived from fossils such as oil and coal clearly has drawbacks in its various uses, one of which is non-renewable energy sources. This means that in the future we need an energy source that will not run out.

This inexhaustible energy source can be utilized and is referred to as an alternative energy source. Utilization of this alternative energy source must also be able to function as a power plant. Here are some examples

1. Use of Solar Alternative Energy

The sun is the main source of energy on earth. Sun is renewable and will not run out even if it is used repeatedly. In addition, the sun can also be used to generate electricity. This power plant is called a solar power plant (PLTS) which works by converting solar energy into electrical energy.

The tools or objects used for PLTS are also known as solar panels, which consist of towers, mirrors, towers, machines. The sun’s energy as a star is the rotation point of the planets in the solar system. The sun with its important role as a supporter of human life on earth.

The light is used as an alternative energy source, which is starting to be used by many people. Utilization of sunlight can then be used as an energy source by using a device called a solar panel.

According to researchers, the amount of solar energy that reaches the earth’s surface in one hour is more than the planet’s total energy needs for a full year. Indonesia itself is a country with great potential to use this alternative energy source. Apart from the weather factor, the amount of solar energy that can be used by humans also varies. Depends on season and time of year as well as geographic location.

It should be noted that solar energy can actually have a negative impact on the environment. This is due to the materials used in solar panel technology. To avoid this, don’t throw away damaged solar panels carelessly.

2. Use of Wind Alternative Energy

Wind as one of the renewable natural resources, with an amount that will never run out. Wind can then also be used as an alternative energy source, namely through hydropower or wind power plants.

The tool used to help the electricity generator work system itself is called a windmill. The windmill itself then rotates because of the wind that rotates the generator so that it finally produces electrical energy. Wind as the cleanest alternative energy source. This is because the wind blowing at the power plant itself does not cause emissions and pollution.

With all its advantages, compared to fossil energy, the use of wind energy is actually still not optimal. In Indonesia, the number of wind power plants can be counted on the fingers. One of them is the Sidrap Wind Power Plant (PLTB) in Sulawesi.

3. Use of Water Alternative Energy

Water is one of the renewable natural resources which can also be used as alternative energy. For example, in the use of waterwheels in their use in power plants. Hydropower or hydroelectric power plants can also be found in the reservoirs around your house.

This renewable water energy is considered to be more effective for use as a power generator than wind energy and solar panels. Therefore this energy can be used as an alternative in Indonesia. By building barriers or dams, large reservoirs can be used to create a controlled flow of water which is then capable of driving turbines.

The turbine will then generate electricity. Another concept of hydropower utilization is tidal energy. This alternative energy source also uses tidal currents to drive turbine generators. So that it can generate electricity.

4. Use of Geothermal/Geothermal Alternative Energy

The earth actually has heat energy that does not only come from sunlight, but also from the center of the earth. Geothermal as geothermal energy then comes from heat stored under the earth’s surface.

Please note that the center of the earth actually formed a layer of very hot rock. Therefore if you see a volcano then you can emit lava that comes from the center of the earth. Geothermal energy can also be used to generate electricity.

Use of Alternative Energy for Sea Waves

Sea waves can be used to generate electricity. This energy is also known as tidal energy which is assisted by the presence of tides. This tidal energy functions to generate electricity and is more environmentally friendly.

5. Use of Bio Fuel Alternative Energy

Biofuels come from plants or animals that are used as fuel. It converts solid fuel made from plant materials into electricity. For example, biodiesel is derived from seed plants and is then able to produce oil.

The use of biomass energy can be a solution for managing organic waste from industry, the agricultural sector and domestic. Biodiesel can usually be used as a substitute for diesel. While bio-fuel can come from animals, it is called biogas. Biogas also comes from livestock manure.

Biogas can be used as motor vehicle fuel. Biomass energy is then able to produce electricity that is environmentally friendly and at an economic cost.

Renewable energy sources will actually be able to replace the use of fossil energy which is not environmentally friendly. However, in order to achieve this, new breakthroughs and innovations are needed so that utilization as an alternative energy source can run optimally.

Advantages of Using Alternative Energy

Alternative energy is used to replace petroleum and energy which is processed from fossil fuels. This is because the energy source in the form of electricity generation from petroleum will continue to decrease in number as human needs continue to increase. This is why humans must then develop alternative energy. Alternative energy that is more environmentally friendly generally comes from nature.

The use of alternative energy can also reduce environmental damage caused by excessive use of petroleum. The use of alternative energy which generally utilizes renewable natural resources, so it cannot reduce the availability of natural resources on earth.

Energy sources that are environmentally friendly and cost-effective, because they then get energy sources from nature. Examples are wind and solar which are also used as an option in replacing non-renewable natural resources and providing electrical energy.

This alternative energy also does not run out quickly, this is because it comes from nature and is a renewable natural resource. Alternative energy can be used for various needs ranging from fuel to electricity generation.

Alternative energy also does not pollute the environment because it can be utilized from animal waste, for example, in biogas. Apart from being a source of renewable energy, the use of alternative energy can also be felt and beneficial for the Earth.

The following are some of the benefits that will be obtained if you replace fossil fuels with alternative fuels.

1. Reducing the Impact of Global Warming

Did you know that the use of fossil fuels will contribute to air pollution which is not good for the earth and living things. Air pollution itself can then have an impact on increasing the depletion of the ozone layer, sea level, global warming, and many more.

Utilization of alternative energy can also reduce the various factors that cause damage to nature. This then makes alternative energy a clean energy that relies on natural forces to produce electricity and so on.

2. Improving Public Health

Air pollution is one of the factors causing disease and the poor health condition of urban communities due to the use of fossil fuels which are widely used. By utilizing alternative energy, this pollution itself can be reduced or eliminated so that the air becomes cleaner. Because of this, people’s health conditions can improve because the air they breathe is much cleaner.

3. Never Ends

Fossil fuels that rely on coal and petroleum which can be used up at any time, are clearly different from various alternative energy sources that will never run out and come from nature.

4. More Environmentally Friendly

In contrast to fossil fuels, the use of alternative energy also does not require society to explore and destroy the environment. By using fossil fuels, people will make mines in search of petroleum or coal and gas which have the potential to damage the environment.

5. Saves Resources and Money

The use of alternative energy is considered to be more expensive and wasteful than fossil energy. This is due to the high price of solar panels. However, if we recalculate, even though the initial payment seems expensive, then the user does not need to depend on continuous electricity because the energy in the house can be filled thanks to sunlight during the day.

6. Creating New Job Opportunities

The use of alternative energy will then definitely require additional specialists. Apart from being beneficial to the environment, the use of alternative energy can also be felt by the community with the opening of new jobs as alternative energy specialists.

Books Related to the Use of Alternative Energy

1. Biogas Energy Solutions

Currently, news is widely heard again regarding the increase in the basic electricity rate due to the reduction in government subsidies. Apart from electricity, the price of fuel oil (BBM) always increases every year due to scarcity and rising world oil prices. Even though electricity and fuel have become basic needs for the community to facilitate everyday life.

Through this book, the author describes the concept of integrated agriculture which is the integration and system of biogas, animal husbandry, agriculture and fisheries that can be carried out together in an area or territory with a certain area. Thus, in addition to getting agricultural products, the community also gets free energy from biogas as a substitute for electricity, fuel and gas.

Through this book, the authors hope that more and more regions in this country can implement integrated farming systems and biogas, so that each region, especially rural areas, can have food and energy independence.”

2. Energy Business Direction

Departing from a deep awareness of the importance of understanding the intricacies of energy and the complexities of providing energy for human life needs, the book Directions for Energy Business written by Ibrahim Hasyim is here as input, especially for the government, in determining and guiding business directions for energy supply in the future. .

3. The Energy Transition: A Policy, Implementation, and Funding

At this time, energy demand is still dominated by fossil energy sourced from fuel oil and coal. However, the government continues to make efforts to reduce the use of fossil fuels and transition towards the use of renewable energy such as biomass, geothermal, wind and solar.

In addition to overcoming the increasingly limited fossil energy, energy transition policies are also carried out to overcome the impacts of climate change. The energy transition policy is prepared comprehensively with measurable goals, namely reducing Greenhouse Gas [GHG] emissions, producing cleaner energy, and increasing energy security by using renewable and efficient potential resources.

This energy transition is an integral part of the energy independence plan which is expected to have a positive impact on the national economy. It is hoped that this book will be a contribution to the Fiscal Policy Agency in providing information to the public regarding various efforts that have been and will be made by the government in achieving national energy security that is sustainable, environmentally friendly, and friendly to climate change.

It is hoped that this book will provide maximum benefits for readers to jointly improve the economy, build the nation, and improve the welfare of all Indonesian people so that we can achieve the goal of sustainable development that we have aspired to.

4. Wind Energy

Renewable energy is part of the effort as the answer to solving energy problems. Wind energy is an effective option for generating electricity, driving pumps, and for other applications. Several areas in Indonesia have the potential to set up wind turbines, such as on the South Coast of Java Island, NTB, NTT, and South Sulawesi which have wind speeds of 3 to 6 m/s. Besides being able to be built in the lowlands, wind turbines are also suitable to be built on the coast, mountains, even in the highlands.

In the utilization of energy sources, Indonesia has adhered to the use of the national energy mix. In this case, the use of wind energy is included in the New and Renewable Energy (EBT) program to save oil energy. In addition, wind energy is environmentally friendly thereby reducing the dangers of global warming.

In simple terms, the problem of power availability and location selection is presented, analysis of wind conditions based on the distribution of time, frequency and Weibull distribution and how to determine the form factor and scale factor on Weibull. There is also the determination of the diameter of the wheel rotor analytically and based on critical needs, the design of the wheel rotor, the determination of the size of the piston pump, and the characteristics of the combination of the wheel with the piston pump and generator. An example of calculating the combination of the windmill with the pump and the combination of the windmill with the generator is also described here.

Those are some examples of the use of alternative energy and its impacts and benefits for life. Sinaumed’s can also get all recommended books related to alternative energy at sinaumedia.com . As #Friends Without Limits, sinaumedia always provides the best products so that you have #MoreWithReading information.

Examples of United States – Union or federation according to the Latin language comes from the word feodus which means agreement or agreement. In a union state, there are two or more political units that have or do not have status as states and promise to unite in one political bond, where there is one region that represents the entire union state.

Union or federation is a country, where the members of the union are a federation that does not have sovereignty in the true sense. Members of the union or federation are referred to as states. Well, who are the countries that have a form of union? The following is an example of a union state. .

Example of the United States

A united state or what is often referred to as a federal state is one of the forms of government adopted by several countries. In the form of a union state, there are several other states within the state. An example of a well-known united states is the United States of America. Here is another example of a union state.

Examples of States of the United Republic or Federal Republic

The following are examples of union states that have the form of a republic, also known as a federal republic. A federal republic is part of a union state that has a republican system or form of government.

The federal or union form of government is adopted by the central government of the combined countries. An easy example is the United States which has several states. The states of the United States of America have a republican form of government.

1. Argentina

Argentina is the part of Latin America that has the second largest area, as well as the country that speaks the largest Spanish language in the world. Argentina is in the southern part of the South American continent.

Argentina is a federation unit located in the Province of Argentina with 23 major federation unit provinces and one minor federation unit or autonomous city.

2. Austria

Austria is the second federation of the republics. Officially, Austria has the name of the Austrian Republic which has several states. Austria is the first country to become a representative democracy by implementing a parliamentary system with a directly elected Federal President as head of state as well as chancellor. As a federal republic, Austria has nine states.

3. Bosnia and Herzegovina

Bosnia and Herzegovina is divided into the federation or union of Bosnia, Herzegovina and the Republic of Srpska. Herzegovina is a country located on the Balkan peninsula in southern Europe with a population of approximately four million people. As a federative republic, Bosnia and Herzegovina has two entities with one district.

4. Brazil

The Federative Republic of Brazil is a country that has the largest territorial size with a population of 204.5 million in 2017. Brazil is in South America and is the easternmost country on the continent.

Bordered by the Andes Mountains and the Atlantic Ocean, Brazil is one of the countries with extensive agricultural and tropical forests. As a federative republic, Brazil has 26 states with one district.

5. Comoros

The Comoros State is an island nation located in the Indian Ocean and has an official name, namely the Federal Islamic Republic of the Comoros. This country is the second smallest Arab country after Bahrain. As a federal republic, Comoros has three islands and four municipalities.

6. Ethiopia

Ethiopia or also called Habsyu is a federal democratic republic country located in Africa and borders with Eritrea in the northern part of Djibouti. Ethiopia is the oldest country in the world, as well as the country that has the most complete history in the area.

As a federal republic, Ethiopia has nine states and two regions that have their own self-governing administrative administration .

7. Germany

Officially, Germany is referred to as a federal republic of Germany located in Western Europe. Germany has an important position in the economy as well as politics in Europe as well as in the world.

With a country area of ​​357,021 square km, there are around 82 million people living in Germany. As a federative republic, Germany has 16 states.

8. India

India is a federated republic country with the second largest population in the world. The population itself reaches up to one billion people and is the seventh largest country when viewed from the size of the geographical area.

India is a federative republic consisting of 28 states and seven territorial units including its capital city. Each state that belongs to India, has its own installed government.

9. Iraq

Iraq is a country in the Middle East or southwest Asia. In the midst of civil war, Iraq is a developing country with a population of 36 thousand in 2014.

As a federative republic, Iraq is divided into 18 Arabic-speaking provinces and further subdivided into districts.

10. Mexico

Located in North America, Mexico is a federal republic that has 31 states with one district. Mexico is the third largest country in Latin America and is the country with the most Spanish speakers.

11. Federated States of Micronesia

Micronesia is an island nation that has sovereignty in the Pacific Ocean. In accordance with its official name, Micronesia is a federated republic with four states from west to east and spread throughout the western Pacific Ocean area.

12. Nepal

Nepal is a country in the form of a federative republic located in South Asia and is located between the Himalayan mountain ranges. Nepal is the only country that is a Hindu kingdom in the world. In 2008, Nepal declared that it was changing the form of its country from a kingdom to a republic.

As a federative republic, Nepal is divided into 14 zones with 75 districts grouped into five development zones. Each district in Nepal is headed by a district head who is responsible for maintaining law and order and for coordinating official work with the government.

13. Nigeria

Nigeria is a sovereign state in West Africa which has borders with Benin in the west, Chad and Kmerun in the east and Niger in the north.

As a federal republic, Nigeria has 36 states and one federal capital region which is the capital city of the state of Abuja. From one territorial area of ​​the federal capital of Nigeria, it is further divided into 774 local government areas or local government areas .

14. Pakistan

The Islamic Republic of Pakistan is a country in the South Asian region. Pakistan is a united or federal state that has a parliamentary system and consists of four provinces and four federal regions.

Pakistan has a population of more than 170 million people and is one of the most populous countries in the world, with the largest Muslim population after Indonesia.

15. United States

The United States of America is one of the best known federal republics. As a federal constitutional republic, America has fifty states with one federal district.

The United States of America is located in the middle of North America which is the location of 48 states and are next to each other including the capital of the United States, namely Washington DC.

Example of a Federal Monarchy

A country that has a federal monarchy form of government is a federation of several states that have a monarchical form of government and is headed by a King or Queen. The following are examples of countries with a federal monarchy form of government.

1.Australia

Australia is a federal monarchy with six states and two territories on the mainland. The six states are New South Wales, Queensland, South Australia, Tasmania, Victoria, Western Australia, the Northern Territory and the Australian Capital Territory.

Each state in Australia has its own territory and parliament on its land. The states in Australia, have their own sovereignty.

2. Belgium

Belgium is a kingdom in western Europe and has borders with the Netherlands to the east, Germany to the south and France and Lukesemburt to the west. Belgium is a federal government consisting of several states, namely Flanders, Wallonia and Brussels.

3. Canada

Canada is a country located in the northernmost region of North America. Canada is a country with a constitutional monarchy which is divided into 10 provinces and three territories which adhere to a decentralized system.

Canada is a constitutional monarchy with a federal parliamentary democratic form of government. Canada becomes Queen Elizabeth II as head of state and is a country that has ethnic and cultural diversity.

4. Malaysian

Malaysia is a federal monarchy with thirteen states and three federal territories. Located in Southeast Asia, Malaysia has an area of ​​330,803 square km. The capital city of Malaysia is Kuala Lumpur and the city of Putrajaya is the center of the Malaysian federal government.

5. Saint Kitts and Nevis

This country is a federation of two islands located in the Leeward Islands and the Caribbean Islands. Saint Kitts and Nevis is the smallest federal monarchy in America. As a federal monarchy, Saint Kitts and Nevis has 14 parishes.

6. United States Emirates

Located in the east of the Arabian Peninsula, the United Arab Emirates is an elected monarchy and is formed from a federation of seven emirates. The seven federations are Abu Dhabi, Ajman, Fujairah, Dubai, Ras Al-Khaimah, Sharjah and Umm Al Qaiwain.

Each state of the UAE, is governed by a Sykeh who has the duty to serve as president in the United Arab Emirates. In 2013, the UAE had a population of 9.2 million.

Those are some examples of union states, both states that have a republican or monarchical form of government. To be clearer, here is the definition of a union or federation.

Definition and Characteristics of the United State or Federal State

The union state is a country that has a plural composition and consists of several states, each of which does not have sovereignty. Although they do not have sovereignty, these states are allowed to have their own constitution, their own head of state to their respective parliaments and cabinets.

Union or union is also often referred to as federal, federation can be interpreted as a combination of many countries. The amalgamation of many of these countries, then brings unity within it and becomes a polycentric or multi-centered country.

Because part or a combination of many countries, state activities are carried out by way of division, internal activities are managed by each of the state leaders and each state leader has sufficient judicial and legislative bodies to regulate their own state.

According to KC Wheare, federal government is divided power, so that the federal government and the governments of each state in certain areas are independent from one another.

According to CF Strong, one of the characteristics of a federal state is that the state will try to adjust two concepts that are actually contradictory, the conflicting concepts are the sovereignty of the federal state as a whole and the sovereignty of the states.

AB Lapian explained that a country that has a federal or union form of government essentially has the following characteristics.

• Execution of sovereignty out of the state and submitted in full to the federal government, while sovereignty inward is limited.
• Several matters concerning the state as a whole are left to the powers of the federal government.
• The form of political unitary ties in a federal state is limited in nature.

Apart from the three characteristics of a united state mentioned by AB Lapian, there are also several other characteristics of a united or federal state. The following are the characteristics of a united state.

1. The union state consists of several states within it.
2. Each state, has original power from the territory of the state owned.
3. The existence of a constitution in each state and a source of law from the implementation of people’s sovereignty.
4. The head of state has the right of veto, namely the right to decide to cancel the formation of its own parliament consisting of a senate and congress. The veto right is a privilege possessed by the head of state.
5. The central government has authority, both abroad and domestically.
6. There is a division of power between the central government and the government in the states, this sixth feature occurs because the implementation of government functions in the union state is considered complicated.
7. The head of state is elected by the people, in a union state the people are the largest entity in a country and have the highest position, therefore the people can choose a head of state who is believed to be able to account for the powers imposed.

That is an explanation of examples of union states, both examples of federal republics and federal monarchies. Also accompanied by an explanation of the meaning and characteristics.

Have you ever been asked to say the name of a two-legged animal complete with a picture? If so, it might be a matter of science subjects or when it used to be called Natural Sciences (IPA). This problem is actually quite easy because we can find several animal names that have two legs in our surroundings, but sometimes we can get stuck with just 5 to 7 animal names.

Animals that have two legs are called Bipedalism , which means a form of movement of living things resting on both legs. The movement of the two legs is called bipedal/biped/ baɪpɛd (in Latin bis means double and pes means foot), so the word means two legs. Movements included as bipedal are walking, running, and jumping.

Unlike four-legged animals, two-legged animals support their body weight using two legs and their bodies are vertically upright as humans stand. Standing straight using two legs may provide many benefits such as wider vision when in grass, avoiding sun exposure on certain parts of the body and requiring a little energy to move around. As for some examples of two-legged animals including:

Bird

Various types of birds including bipeds, including lovebirds, rock magpies, green cucak birds, red anis, and canaries. Actually there are many other types of birds that include two-legged animals. Two bird legs were created to support the body and help activities that support the mobility of the bird moving from one place to another.

The types of birds vary greatly, from tiny hummingbirds that can flap their wings very quickly, penguins that dive with their wings, to ostriches, which are taller than humans. Most bird species in the world are able to fly using their wings (for example ducks, geese, sparrows, pelicans, owls, eagles, paradise, and many more), except for a few species of birds that are usually endemic to certain places, such as ostriches, moas. , cassowary, kiwi, penguin, and so on. It is estimated that there are about 8,800–10,200 bird species worldwide; about 1,500 species of which are found in Indonesia. These various types of birds are scientifically classified into the Aves class .

Today, birds are known to be descended from the group of feathered theropod dinosaurs and are the only living dinosaurs. The closest living relative of birds is the crocodile. Birds are descendants of the ancient aviala (members of which include Archeopteryx ) that first appeared about 160 million years ago in China.

Chicken

An example of the next two-legged name is chicken ( Gallus gallus domesticus ). Both male and female cocks have two legs. One example of a native chicken from Indonesia is the Bantenese chicken, which is a type of dwarf chicken that also has two legs. Kate is currently registered with the American Poultry Association under the name Bantam which is a native Indonesian chicken, especially Banten.

Chickens are poultry that are usually kept by people to be used as the necessities of life for their keepers. The chicken is a direct descendant of a subspecies of jungle fowl known as the red jungle fowl ( Gallus gallus ) or bangkiwa chicken ( bankiva fowl ). All chickens are theropods like tyrannosaurs.

Cross-breeding between chicken breeds has produced hundreds of superior lines or pure lines with various functions; the most common are broiler chickens (to be cut) and laying hens (to take the eggs). The common chicken can also be crossed with its close relative, the green jungle fowl, which produces a barren hybrid whose male is known as the bekisar chicken. Chicken supplies two sources of protein in food: chicken meat and eggs.

The traditional viewpoint of chicken farming on the domestication of this species is contained in the Encyclopædia Britannica (2007): “Humans first domesticated chickens of Indian origin for cockfighting purposes in Asia, Africa and Europe. No special attention was paid to egg or meat production.

The domestic chicken comes from the domestication of the red jungle fowl (bangkiwa chicken, Gallus gallus ) which lives in India. However, molecular testing showed the possibility of germplasm contribution from G. sonneratii , because the red jungle fowl does not have the characteristic yellow color of the skin which is one of the characteristics of domesticated chickens.

Hens show morphological differences between the sexes (sexual dimorphism). Roosters (jago) are more attractive, larger in size, have long spurs, have a bigger comb, and have long, dangling tail feathers. Hens (baboons) are relatively small, small in size, short or barely visible bristles, small comb, and short tail feathers.

Regarding sex, this is regulated by the hormonal system. If there is a disturbance in the body’s physiological function, the hen can change sex to become a male because adult chickens still have ovotestis which are dormant and can be active at any time.

Duck

Ducks or ducks are known as livestock commodities that are kept by many Indonesian people. There are also various uses for ducks, whether they are used from their eggs or from their meat. Duck care is also not that difficult, so it can increase the economic value of these animals. Ducks are known as two-legged animals with webbed feet that make it easier for them to swim in the water.

Overall, the body of a duck is broadly notched and has a relatively long neck, though not as long as that of geese and swans. Duck body shape varies and is generally rounded. The beak is wide and contains lamellae which are used as food filters.

In fishing species, the beak is longer and stronger. The scaled legs are strong and well developed, and generally set far back on the body, which is common in aquatic birds. The wings are very strong and generally short. Duck flight requires continuous flapping, so it requires strong wing muscles. Three species of steamer ducks cannot fly.

Male ducks of Northern Hemisphere species sometimes have attractive plumage colors. Species from the Southern Hemisphere show no sexual dimorphism except for the Paradise Shelduck in New Zealand where the female ducks are lighter in color than the males. The color of young ducks, whether male or female, is generally more like an adult female duck.

Penguin

Penguins are also bipedal animals that are quite cute. Even though he sometimes moves by sliding in the snow, penguins are still referred to as animals that have two legs. This is because penguins often use bipedal movements in every movement of themselves.

Worldwide there are 16 species of penguin depending on whether two species of Eudyptula are counted as species. Although all types of penguins originally came from the Southern Hemisphere, penguins are not only found in cold regions or in Antarctica. There are three species of penguin that live in the tropics. One of the species lives in the Galapagos Islands (Galapagos Penguin) and usually crosses the equator in search of food.

The largest penguin species is the Emperor Penguin ( Aptenodytes forsteri ) with a height of 1.1 meters and a weight of 35 kilograms or more. The smallest penguin species is the Fairy Penguin ( Eudyptula minor ) with a height of about 40 centimeters and a weight of 1 kilogram. In general, large penguins are better able to maintain their body temperature, so they can survive in cold areas, while smaller penguins are usually found in warmer areas and even tropical areas.

Generally penguins eat krill (a type of shrimp), fish, squid and other aquatic animals caught while swimming in the sea with their beaks. Penguins are able to drink seawater because the supraorbital glands in their bodies filter excess sea salt from the bloodstream. This salt is then excreted in liquid form through the penguin’s respiratory tract. The penguins seem unafraid of the presence of humans. They will approach the group of researchers who are studying them.

Swan

Goose is a type of waterfowl that belongs to the family Anatidae . Swans usually have a larger body compared to ducks. Swans also sometimes have longer necks than ducks. Another feature that exists in geese is that they do not have ears and reproduce by laying eggs. The similarity with ducks is that geese are two-legged animals whose feet are webbed.

The swans are the largest members of the waterfowl family Anatidae, and are among the largest flying birds. The largest species, including the mute swan, trumpeter swan, and whooper swan, can reach length of over 60 inches and weigh over 50 pounds. Their wingspan can reach up to three meters in length.

Compared to the closely related geese, they are much larger in size and have proportionally larger feet and necks. In adult geese, they have a marked patch of bare skin between the eyes and bill. Male and female swans are similar, showing no sexual dimorphism. However, the size of the male goose is generally larger and heavier.

Geese are generally found in temperate climates, rarely found in tropical areas. Five species occur in the Northern Hemisphere, one species is found in Australia and New Zealand, the rest are distributed in South America. Geese are absent in tropical Asia, Central America, northern South America, and all of Africa.

kangaroo

Kangaroos or often referred to as kangaroos are endemic to Australia. The name kangaroo itself comes from the word gangguru in the Aboriginal language (Australian native tribe). Kangaroos are two-legged animals that are included as mammals that have pouches ( marsupials ). Kangaroos have very strong hind legs, these feet have large soles for jumping.

The kangaroo has two strong hind legs, the large soles of which are designed for jumping. An ordinary kangaroo jumps at a speed of 20–25 km/hour. However, they can jump up to speeds of up to 70 km/hour. The life expectancy of a kangaroo is around 9–18 years, although occasional kangaroos can live up to 28 years. Kangaroos are known to have strong forelimb muscles (biceps), and it is now known that these muscles are used for fighting and attracting females.

Ostrich

The ostrich is up to 2.5 meters tall which makes it the largest living bird. Although included in the bird species, the ostrich does not have the ability to fly. However, his running ability was extraordinary. ostriches can run up to speeds of 70 km/hour. The leg strength makes the ostrich a two-legged animal that has high speed in running.

Artifacts found in South Africa, in the form of decorations and drinking vessels made from ostrich eggshells, indicate that at least humans have known ostriches since 60,000 years ago. In Ancient Roman times, ostriches were hunted by nobles for their meat and feathers as decoration. Hunting continued into the 19th century and brought the ostrich to near extinction.

The cultivation of ostriches for their feathers began in the 19th century and was first practiced in South Africa. Ostrich breeders capture baby ostriches from the wild, raise them, and harvest their feathers every seven or eight months. The skin of the ostrich is said to be the highest quality leather. The taste of ostrich meat is said to be similar to beef, but with lower levels of fat and cholesterol, as well as higher levels of calcium, protein and iron. Raw ostrich meat is dark red or cherry red.

Pelicans

Pelicans or also known as undans are water birds as bipedal animals that have a pouch under their beak. Pelicans are birds belonging to the Pelecanidae family which generally live in warm areas and cannot live in cold areas such as the poles, deep sea, oceanic islands and the South American continent.

The smallest flounder is the brown fleas ( Pelecanus occidentalis ) with a mass of only 2.75 kilograms, a body length of 106 centimeters and a maximum wingspan of 1.83 meters. The largest pelican today is the dalmasian undan ( Pelecanus crispus ) with a mass of 15 kilograms and a length of 183 centimeters, with a wingspan of up to 3.5 meters. The Australian Undan has the longest beak among other birds.

Pelicans usually eat fish, but they also eat amphibians, crustaceans and, in some cases, small birds. They catch their prey by enlarging their beak sacs. Then they have to dry the sac before swallowing. This takes a minute, and other seabirds can steal the fish at that critical time. Pelicans sometimes steal prey from other seabirds.

stork

The stork is known as a large-bodied species with long legs and necks. Stork is a bipedal animal that belongs to the Ciconiidae family which has a strong and large beak. Herons have a native habitat in warm and drier climates.

Stork can be found in warm climates. Habitat in drier areas than egrets and ibis. Its diet consists of frogs, fish, insects, worms, small birds and small mammals from wetlands and beaches. Herons do not have a syrinx organ, so they don’t make a sound. The beak that is pitted against its partner is a way of communicating to replace the sound of the call.

Herons are migratory shorebirds, flying away by gliding using hot air currents, so they can save energy. A photograph of a crane in flight by Ottomar Anschütz (1884) inspired Otto Lilienthal to build a glider for gliding in the late 19th century.

Well, that’s a brief explanation of two-legged animals along with examples. Sinaumed’s can visit sinaumedia’s book collection at www.sinaumedia.com to get references about other animals. The following is a recommendation for sinaumedia books that Sinaumed’s can read to learn about the most dangerous animals in the world so they can fully understand them. Happy reading.

Find other interesting things at www.sinaumedia.com . sinaumedia as #FriendsWithoutLimits will always present interesting articles and recommendations for the best books for Sinaumed’s.

• Characteristics of Animals and Their Habitats to Get Closer to Nature
• Examples of Invertebrates: Definition, General Characteristics, Classification, and Their Names
• Oviparous Animals: Definition, Types, and Examples
• Ovoviviparous Animals: Definition, Characteristics, and Examples
• Definition, Characteristics, and Examples of Carnivores (Meat Eaters)
• Definition of Reptiles: Characteristics and Examples

Example of an Attitude of Tolerance – Sinaumed’s must have known that Indonesian society is a multicultural society in which of course each individual has various types of differences, ranging from religion, race, ethnicity, educational background, economic background, to mindset. Even so, the nation’s warriors have recognized the existence of this diversity so that the Indonesian nation’s motto is also related to this, namely Bhinneka Tunggal Ika. Does Sinaumed’s still remember what the motto means?

The existence of the motto Bhinneka Tunggal Ika directly forms awareness in the community that the Indonesian nation has diverse cultural dynamics, aka multiculturalism. The existence of this diversity does not necessarily make the Indonesian nation divided, because from childhood we must have received teachings about tolerance, right ?

Then how is the application and example of tolerance? How are efforts to realize tolerance in this multicultural society? So, so that Sinaumed’s understands this, let’s take a look at the following review so that you don’t forget to apply and find examples of tolerance …

Examples of Tolerance in Everyday Life

Example of Religious Tolerance

• Allowing friends or other individuals to worship according to their religion.
• Don’t force others to convert.
• Do not discriminate especially against religious minorities.
• Do not interfere with the worship process of others.
• Do not criticize and degrade other people’s religions.
• Don’t make other people’s religion a joke.
• Not being a provocateur when other religions are celebrating their big day.
• Make friends with everyone, regardless of their religious background.
• Respect the celebration of religious holidays from other people.
• Keep in touch with neighbors, friends, and colleagues of different religions.
• Keep helping others who are in the middle of a disaster even though their religious background is different from ours.
• Do not destroy places of worship of other religions.
• Do not disturb the serenity of worship performed by people of other religions.
• There is no need to boast about your own religion in front of people of other religions, respect the differences that exist.

Example of Tolerance Between Tribes

• Do not discriminate against other people who have different ethnic backgrounds.
• Do not plunder the culture of other tribes.
• Keep helping each other to all people in need regardless of ethnic background.
• Respect the culture of other tribes.
• Do not make the culture of other tribes as a joke.
• Treat everyone the same regardless of ethnic background.
• Learn the traditions and culture of other tribes.

Examples of Tolerance in the School and Work Environment

• Remain friends with friends who have different religions and ethnicities.
• As a teacher, he does not discriminate against students who have different religious and ethnic backgrounds.
• Continue to help colleagues who are experiencing difficulties even though they have different religious and ethnic backgrounds.
• Do not create a special “gang” to discriminate against other religions and ethnic groups.
• Stay kind and friendly to everyone.

Re-understanding the Definition of Tolerance

Is Sinaumed’s still confused about what tolerance is? Actually, the notion of tolerance is simple, namely in the form of respecting the differences that exist within us and others. In the process of appreciating it, it is enough that you don’t need to make fun of or make the differences as jokes, because that will later make other people feel hurt.

The term “tolerance” actually comes from a foreign language, namely English in the form of “tolerance” and Arabic in the form of “tasamuh”. Etymologically, tolerance means patience, emotional resilience, and broad-mindedness. While in terms (terminology), tolerance has a definition in the form of respecting, allowing, allowing the views, opinions, beliefs, and habits that are different from it.

So, it can be concluded that the concept of this attitude of tolerance leads to an open attitude and willing to admit the existence of various kinds of differences. The differences that are owned by yourself and other people can vary, ranging from ethnicity, skin color, language, customs, culture, language, religion, to mindset. Since each individual has a destiny as well as a different background in life, it is only natural that differences in mindset will also be included in this diversity. Therefore, if you are conducting a meeting or polling activity related to an issue, don’t underestimate or laugh at other people’s opinions because that is also part of an attitude of tolerance which must actually be applied from an early age.

In fact, it is not uncommon for individuals to carry out this attitude of tolerance unconsciously or unknowingly, because it is related to the character of individuals or groups of people. Even so, tolerance can also be carried out consciously, especially if the individual is trying as much as possible to avoid a dispute.

The attitude of tolerance has also been discussed by UNESCO ( United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural Organization ) which defines tolerance as an attitude of “mutual respect, mutual acceptance, and mutual respect amidst cultural diversity, freedom of expression, and human character”. Based on this, this attitude of tolerance is equivalent to a positive attitude and respect for other people in order to use basic freedoms as human beings.

Does Sinaumed’s know that this attitude of tolerance has two models? Yep, the first model is a passive attitude, namely the attitude of accepting differences as something factual. Meanwhile, the second model is active tolerance, namely involving oneself with others in the midst of differences and diversity. This active tolerance has usually been taught to all religions, because all religions are indeed responsible for realizing justice and peace for their adherents.

The application of this attitude of tolerance will always be related to the religious and socio-cultural context which in its attitudes and actions strictly prohibits discrimination against different groups, especially minorities. There are often questions about whyWe must be tolerant, especially those who have different religions and beliefs? The answer is simple, that is, the absence of tolerance will actually make riots and peace difficult to achieve. Just imagine, if every adherent of that religion does not tolerate each other, then of course in real life discrimination will appear against minorities. The result can be bad things, including inter-religious wars that will trigger inter-countries and continents in this world. Even though all religions also teach that war is something that is sinful, especially if it kills consciously.

Religious Tolerance

In our country which has various adherents of religions, examples of religious tolerance are of course mandatory to be taught and practiced. Especially in Pancasila which is the foundation of our country, the first precept which reads “Belief in the One and Only God”, clearly indicates that this country is a country of God. The point is that the Indonesian state really wants every citizen to adhere to one religion or belief. Since there are 6 recognized religions in Indonesia, namely Islam, Christianity, Catholicism, Hinduism, Buddhism and Confucianism, every Indonesian citizen is “obliged” to adhere to one of the six religions.

Not only that, Article 29 Paragraph 2 of the 1945 Constitution reads ” The state guarantees each resident to embrace their own religion and worship according to their religion and beliefs “. In these laws it is clear that the state has regulated that every citizen embraces a religion and guarantees protection when carrying out worship processions.

Ethnic Diversity Tolerance

Sinaumed’s must have known that Indonesia has thousands of ethnic groups, approximately 1,340 (based on 2010 data) spread from Sabang to Merauke. The ethnic diversity does not necessarily make this country only side with one or two tribes, but all the existing tribes.

In fact, the true attitude of tolerance has been taught from an early age to respect the differences in culture and customs that exist in each tribe. Each tribe should not feel that their tribe is the most superior, because all tribes have the same degree in the eyes of the state.

Tolerance In Socio-Cultural

Apart from having thousands of ethnic groups, Indonesia is also known for its socio-cultural diversity, which of course is obliged to carry out this attitude of tolerance. This socio-cultural diversity can be seen from differences in economic background, educational background, to the background of the traditions applied in each region. Then how to apply tolerance in terms of social culture? Of course there are many ways, from loving local products made in Indonesia to trying to learn about the diversity of other cultures.

If you are reluctant to learn about other cultures, that’s also okay, as long as you don’t ridicule and use other cultures as jokes. Because it is not a reflection of tolerance. However, it is better if Sinaumed’s wants to learn about the processes and rules of other cultures. Aside from being an effort of tolerance, it can also add insight into the cultural diversity that exists in our country.

Tolerance in Bhinneka Tunggal Ika

As the motto of the Indonesian nation which has been written in the Garuda Indonesia symbol, the term Bhinneka Tunggal Ika is not merely a motto but also indicates concrete evidence of the attitude of tolerance that every Indonesian citizen must practice. The motto of Unity in Diversity has been regulated in the 1945 Constitution Article 36A, where the meaning of the motto is ” Different but still one “.

That is, the country of Indonesia clearly has a diversity of ethnicities, languages, religions, races and cultures. So that the existence of the motto Bhinneka Tunggal Ika acts as a unifier of this diversity. In short, even though Indonesia has a multicultural society, all of them are still in one “form” namely the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia. In addition, this motto also relates the attitude and behavior of tolerance which must be taught and applied from an early age.

Efforts to Realize Tolerance

All Indonesian citizens are actually obliged to create harmony between tribes and between religions, both at the regional, provincial and government levels. So, this attitude and behavior of tolerance is not only the responsibility of the government or religious leaders, but of all citizens. Starting from responsibilities related to peace, security and public order, that is the duty of every citizen. In this case, to create harmony, especially among religious people, can be done in the following ways.

• Mutual tolerance and respect for each other, even though they have different religious and ethnic backgrounds from ourselves.
• Carry out worship according to the religion that has been adopted.
• Comply with regulations related to religion and culture.

This attitude of tolerance, tolerance and respect for one another is actually included in the trilogy of harmony. Previously, it was always emphasized that the application of tolerance in the real world, one of which was not being able to force someone to embrace a certain religion. This is because it relates to Human Rights (HAM), which has been given the freedom to choose which belief is best for itself.

Not only that, the attitude of tolerance is considered capable of realizing harmony both among religious communities and other ethnic groups. So, in this case, it is necessary to pay attention to the efforts that encourage harmony, namely in the form of:

• Strengthen the foundations of internal harmony between communities as well as with the government.
• Building social harmony and social unity which is a form of implementation in an attitude of tolerance in everyday life.
• Creating a conducive atmosphere of religious life, from appreciation to religious practice.
• Carrying out deepening of spiritual values ​​that implement divine values. This is so that there are no deviations from social values ​​in carrying out social life.
• Putting love and compassion in life, one of which is by eliminating mutual suspicion of other individuals.
• Realizing that the differences in social life are a reality and can be used as a mosaic that can beautify the phenomena of social life.

Based on the previous description, it can be concluded that this tolerance is an attitude of accepting and respecting existing differences and not discriminating, especially towards minorities. These differences include differences in religion, race, ethnicity, nation, culture, language, appearance, and mindset so that it aims to achieve a peaceful social life.

Well, that’s a review of examples of tolerance that can be applied in this social life. Sinaumed’s, as the nation’s next generation, must carry out this tolerance attitude and even teach younger siblings, nephews and children to be tolerant from an early age, right? Because this attitude of tolerance is a real manifestation of our nation’s motto.

Also Read!

• Why Do We Have To Be Tolerant?
• The Origins and Meaning of the Indonesian Nation’s Motto
• Definition and Factors Causing Diversity in Indonesia
• Terminology and Background of the Crusades
• Examples of Obligations Everyone Should Understand
• How to Respect and Appreciate Teachers
• Definition and Types of Integration
• Definition and Examples of Basic Values ​​of Pancasila
• What is Socialization?
• Example of the Implementation of the 3rd Precepts of Pancasila
• Understanding the Value of Pancasila Praxis
• 23 Examples of the Implementation of the 1st Precepts of Pancasila

Examples of Threats in the Political Sector – Threats in the Political Sector are examples of threats to national integration that will continue to be faced by the Indonesian nation. Therefore, the proclamation of Indonesian independence on August 17, 1945 was not the end point of the nation’s struggle. Because there are always potential threats that endanger the sustainability and development of the Indonesian state.

Since the beginning of independence, conflict has always existed on several occasions. Starting from the intervention of foreign parties, power struggles, abuse of office, and so forth. This is what identifies that the problems faced by Indonesia are not only coming from outside but also from within the country.

Quoted from the Teacher’s Book on Pancasila and Citizenship Education for Class X High School by Thalib and Nuryadi (2017: 224), states that threats to the Unitary State of the Republic of Indonesia are every effort and action from within and outside the country that is considered to endanger safety, security, sovereignty, territorial integrity, and the interests of in various aspects of life.

One of the things that needs to be highlighted is the threat in the political field. What are the examples of threats in the political field. Before that, it’s a good idea to first understand the meaning of threats in the political field to examples of threats in the political field. Let’s get to know the full discussion below.

Definition of Threats in the Field of Politics

When referring to the meaning of threats that have been conveyed in the discussion above, it can be seen that threats in the political field are any efforts and actions that can threaten state sovereignty with regard to politics and other related matters.

These non-military threats in the political field can come from outside or within the country. Not quoted from the book Pancasila and Citizenship Education by Yusnawan Lubis and Muhammad Sodeli, threats from outside are carried out by a country by exerting political pressure on Indonesia. For example, intimidation, provocation, and political blockade.

Examples of Threats in the Field of Politics from Abroad

There are several examples of threats in the political field from abroad, including terrorists and excessive intervention by other countries. Here are some examples in full. So, let’s find out the full explanation below.

1. Terrorism

Quoted from the journal Terrorism in a Political and Legal Perspective by Mulyana W. Kusumah (202), states that international terrorism is the use of threats of violence indiscriminately, both to enemies and allies in achieving goals. Where, radical ideas rooted in a group in a certain country can spread to other countries. In general, apart from spreading terror, terrorist groups also want to spread the views they profess and replace state ideology that is not in accordance with their wishes.

2. Overly Interfering Foreign Countries

Sometimes losing foreign countries exert political pressure such as intimidation, provocation or political blockade. Where it is one of the non-military threats in the political field that is often used by certain parties to pressure other countries.

Examples of Domestic Political Threats

Bung Karno used to say that “my struggle is easier because of expelling invaders but your struggle will be more difficult because it is against your own people.” Threats from outside are always there, but generally they are easier to identify and people can easily be mobilized to fight them. Meanwhile, what is far more difficult is the threat from within the country. Following are a number of examples of threats in the political field from within the country, including:

a. Makar or Coup

Quoted from the journal Understanding the Threats of a Non-Military State and the strategy for dealing with it through character education in PKN subjects in schools by Muhammad Hadi Purnomo HD said that acts of treason or treason are the use of force in the form of mass mobilization to overthrow a ruling government. This can also be understood as raising political power to weaken government power.

b. Separatism or Civil War

According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary, KBBI, separatists are groups that want to separate themselves from a national or group union in order to gain support. Quoted from the book by Tholib and Nurhayati in 2017 stated that separatism can take the form of armed and unarmed struggle.

Where the pattern of unarmed struggle is often used to attract the sympathy of the international community. Therefore this action is difficult to deal with using military force.

c. Corruption, Collusion and Nepotism

Corruption, collusion and nepotism are crimes when someone abuses political authority for personal gain. Why corruption, collusion and nepotism can threaten the nation’s political life. Reporting from the KPK website, if corruption thrives in this government, it will be able to easily strengthen the political system that is controlled by capital owners.

In fact, sovereignty is in the hands of the people, the many cases of corruption committed by political officials have caused a loss of public confidence in the current government.

How to Overcome Threats in the Field of Politics

There are various steps that you can make as a strategy in overcoming threats in the political field. The pursuit of this strategy includes an inward approach and an outward approach. Quoted from the export book Pancasila and Citizenship Education volume 2 for Grade 11 SMA/SMK/MA/MAK by Tijan and FASugimin.

1. Inward Approach

The purpose of this inward approach is the development and arrangement of a healthy and dynamic domestic political system. This can be achieved within the framework of democracy which upholds the unity of the Indonesian nation. With these efforts, it is expected to create dynamic domestic political stability and provide a high deterrent effect.

This internal arrangement is realized through the development and arrangement of the domestic political system which is packaged into the strengthening of 3 (three) pillars, including the following:

a. Strengthening the administration of a state government that is legal, effective, clean, authoritative, free from corruption, collusion and nepotism (KKN). As well as being responsible for realizing the objectives of administering the state government based on the preamble of the 1945 Constitution
. b. Strengthening the legislature as a qualified and professional institution in its field. This legislative institution must be able to cooperate with the government in processing and forming legislative products for the benefit of national development.
c. Strengthening national political power, be it from political parties or community organizations. Where, political parties and community organizations function as a tool to empower society and political subjects as well as national development subjects.

2. The Outward Approach

This outward approach is intended to deploy diplomatic strategies and efforts. This can be done through an increase in the role of foreign policy instruments in building cooperation and mutual trust with other countries, which is one strategy to prevent or reduce the potential for conflict between countries. Approach to outside can be done in a way, including the following:

a. In the Internal Realm

In the internal realm, this can be done through the creation, development and improvement of more stable domestic conditions. Where, this is accompanied by efforts to increase economic growth that is healthier and stronger. In addition, it also needs to be accompanied by strengthening the improvement of people’s lives.

b. In a Regional Environment

Indonesian politics and diplomacy are directed to always be active and play a role in building and increasing cooperation with other countries. These efforts need to be carried out within the framework of the principles of mutual trust, mutual respect and non-interference in domestic affairs.

c. In the Supregiomal Scope

Foreign policy was developed to play a role in strengthening ASEAN through a harmonious relationship. Where, the performance of Indonesia’s foreign policy must be able to build relationships and cooperation that guarantees the sovereignty and territorial integrity of the Republic of Indonesia. This is marked by the absence of foreign interference, in particular the guarantee that there will be no aggression against Indonesia’s sovereign territory.

d. In Global Scope

Foreign policy must play a maximum role in fighting for national interests. This was marked by the presence of Indonesia as a member of the United Nations (UN), the Non-Aligned Movement (NAM), the Organization of the Islamic Conference (OIC), and the ASEAN regional forum (ARF).

Book Recommendations & Related Articles

Examples of Theoretical Basis for Scientific Work – When going to make a scientific work, either in the form of a thesis or a scientific article, Sinaumed’s will need to make a theoretical basis. The basis of the theory itself is a theory that is related to the research conducted by Sinaumed’s. Thus, the theoretical basis can later become the basis for analysis to be able to explain the facts.

The theoretical foundation in research or scientific writing is used to strengthen the research conducted by Sinaumed’s. In addition, the theoretical basis also serves to clarify the problem to be investigated by the author of the scientific work. Here are some examples of theoretical foundations for scientific work.

Examples of Theory Basis in Scientific Work

A. An example of the theoretical basis of a paper

Papers are scientific writings that require the authors to include theories in the development of the author’s thoughts in scientific writing. According to scientific papers, papers, theoretical foundations are in Chapter II. The following is an example of a theoretical foundation for scientific paper writing.

Some of the concepts that form the theoretical basis of this study, namely the notion of education and the notion of character. An explanation of these concepts is as follows.

1. Definition of Education

Education has been defined by several experts as something that has high value. Some experts who argue about education include John Dewy, and Mansur. The following is the definition of education according to the two experts.

John Dewey argues that education is a process of forming fundamental skills intellectually and emotionally to be able to lead to nature and fellow human beings. Furthermore, John Dewey also expressed the purpose of developing skills, namely so that the younger generation can practice moral values ​​for survival and life in society.

Mansur Muslich (2014) argues, that education is a process of internalizing culture into a person and society, so that it can make humans become more civilized figures.

2. Definition of Character

Simon Phillips (2008) argues that character is a collection of values ​​whose direction is towards a system, based on a thought, attitude and behavior displayed.

Meanwhile, Koesoema A (2007) argues that character has the same meaning as one’s personality. Meanwhile, Prof. Suyanto argues that character is a way of thinking and behaving which then becomes a characteristic of each individual to be able to live and work well together.

Based on the explanation of the theory above, it can be concluded that character education is a process that is able to make humans become more civilized and qualified figures.

B. An example of Thesis Theory Basis 

Likewise, a thesis is a scientific work that requires the author to complete the scientific work as a final project to obtain a bachelor’s degree that he will obtain.

So, if there is a student who does not complete his thesis, then that student will not get a degree from the S1 program that he studied while in college. In the thesis, the theoretical basis is included in Chapter II. The following is an example of the theoretical basis of thesis scientific work.

Some of the concepts that form the theoretical basis of this study are as follows, the notion of discipline and the elements of discipline. An explanation of these concepts is as follows.

1. Definition of Discipline 

Several experts expressed their opinion regarding the meaning of discipline, one of which was Rasiyanah and Aritonang and Semiawan. The following is the meaning of discipline according to experts.

Aritonang in Arifin and Barnawi (2012: 110) says that discipline is the ability to be able to control oneself not to take an action that is inappropriate or contrary to something that has been determined.

Meanwhile Rasdiyanah in Amri (2013: 168) argues that discipline is an obedience to be able to respect and be able to implement a system that requires a person to be subject to decisions, orders and regulations that apply.

Semiawan (2002: 89) states that discipline is all kinds of influences that have influence and aim to help deal with demands from the environment. Discipline is also defined as an influence designed to be able to help a person face the demands of his place and environment.

Based on this description, it can be concluded that discipline is an attitude or personality of a person who can show that the person obeys the rules that have been made in an environment, where the person is located. This obedience is also done willingly, without any coercion and is done with full self-awareness.

2. Elements of Discipline

The elements of discipline according to Hurlock in Amri (2013: 165) cover the following matters.

1. Rules as a guide or behavior.
2. Consistency applied in a regulation.
3. The penalty imposed for an offence.
4. Reward for a good behavior.

According to Harlock, discipline can be born and develop in every person starting from one’s attitude in values ​​and culture that is already present in society.

C. Examples of Theory Basis in Research 

Research requires researchers to include the theoretical basis that they make as the basis for developing thoughts in the research. Whatever the type, the research topic that is made as a theoretical basis must be included in chapter IV, namely the theoretical basis. The following is an example of a theoretical basis in a study.

Some of the concepts that form the theoretical basis of this research are the professional code of ethics and the functions and objectives of the professional code of ethics. An explanation of these concepts is as follows.

a. Professional Code of Ethics

The professional code of ethics was explained by several experts, including Kosasih and Soetjipto and Wiyani. The following is an explanation of the professional code of ethics.

Kosasih and Soetjipto (2009: 30) say that a code of ethics is a guideline for attitudes, behavior and actions in carrying out tasks and in everyday life.

Meanwhile, Wiyani (2015: 25) argues that a code of ethics is a principle and value that can be used as a guide by an organization in behaving or acting.

So, it can be concluded that the professional code of ethics is a guideline used to behave when doing something.

b. Functions and Purpose of the Professional Code of Ethics

The professional code of ethics exists so that a profession can run properly and properly. So if a profession can run well, it means that the professional code of ethics has a good function as well. Suherman and Sandi (2021: 97) argue that a professional code of ethics can be a tool that can balance the negative sides of a profession. So that it can be said that the professional code of ethics that is made, can be a guide from the moral direction for a profession as well as a guarantee of a professional moral quality in the eyes of society.

1. An example of the theoretical basis for a street vendor report 

Reports from Field Work Practices or PKL is an obligation that must be made by someone when they have completed the PKL assignment that they are carrying out. Students need to submit street vendor reports as a form of responsibility in carrying out the street vendors’ duties. Keep in mind, that the theoretical basis of the street vendor report is included in Chapter III, namely the theoretical basis. To make it clearer, here is an example of the theoretical foundation of street vendors that Sinaumed’s can use as a reference.

Some of the concepts that form the theoretical basis of this research are the definition of a food bank and the form of a food bank. An explanation of these concepts is as follows.

Food bank is a charity that has several food programs to carry out the activities of the charity organization. In several institutions related to food banks, the food program is one of the main missions in running the organization.

An example of an institution that makes food its main mission is a religious organization. As for other institutions, the food program is only one of the complementary missions of the organization and not the main mission (Walters 2010).

b. Forms of Food Banks

Food banks have a variety of forms according to the needs of each organization. In general, a food bank organization has the following form.

• As a food collection center that has a large size.
• The food bank is in the form of a large food distribution center.
• A food bank can take the form of a food provider in an emergency situation that has a small size

The presence of a food bank is one of the organizations that deserves attention and deserves attention, because of the social mission carried out by the food bank organization.

2. Examples of theoretical foundations from scientific work

Scientific work is a work of writing that is made to be able to find a solution to a problem that occurs. In this scientific work, there is a chapter that explains the theoretical basis as a basis for making a solution to a problem. In scientific work, the theoretical basis is included in Chapter II, namely the theoretical basis. The following is an example of a theoretical foundation for scientific work.

Several concepts that form the theoretical basis of this study, namely the definition of waste and waste management. An explanation of these concepts is as follows.

a. Rubbish

Garbage is described by the US Environmental Protection Agency (2001) into several forms. Solid waste is defined as all waste, waste and air pollution as well as all materials disposed of in the form of solid, liquid, semi-solid or gas-containing waste.

Garbage comes from mining, industrial, household to agricultural activities. Big cities in Indonesia have a high level of activity to produce ten million tons of waste per year with an average increase of two to four percent per year. Data on the increase in waste was submitted by the Indonesian Ministry of Environment in 2008.

b. Waste management

Waste management can be carried out into several models to be able to overcome the waste problems that exist in Indonesia. One model of waste management is managed in a conventional way. There are several things included in conventional methods of waste management, here are some examples: incineration, composting, gasification, pyrolysis, anaerobic digestion and refused derived fuel.

3. Examples of Theoretical Basis from Journals

A journal is a scientific work that must include a theoretical basis in its writing. The theoretical basis in this journal comes from references whose credibility is guaranteed. Examples include books and other journals. The following is an example of a theoretical foundation in a journal.

a. Definition of Profession

De George in Suherman and Saonadi (2012: 94) argues that a profession is a job performed by someone as a main activity to be able to earn a living by relying on an expertise possessed by that person.

Meanwhile, Vollmer and Mills in Danim and Khairil (2010: 8) argue that a profession is a position that requires a special intellectual ability and is obtained through several learning and training activities with the aim of being able to master a skill or expertise in serving or giving advice to people. others and get a wage or salary in certain amounts in accordance with the position or expertise possessed.

Saud (2009:4) argues that a profession is a certain job that is in accordance with special and special conditions. So that it can convince and gain the trust of several parties who need it.

From several definitions of the profession according to these experts, it can be concluded that the profession is a job that requires a special skill to run it.

b. Characteristics of the Profession

Professions have several general characteristics or inherent characteristics, according to Suherman and Saondi (2021: 94) the following are characteristics of professions.

• Profession requires a special knowledge and expertise and skills obtained through education, years of experience and training.
• The profession has rules and high moral standards.
• The profession serves the interests that exist in society.
• The profession requires a special license.

From the description above regarding the characteristics or nature of the profession, it can be said that the special characteristic of the profession is the special expertise to be able to involve intellectual activity in a profession. These mastered skills can be obtained through education and how to acquire them requires a long and not instantaneous process.

Those are some examples of theoretical foundations in a scientific work that must be included.

Functional Basis Theory

1. Explanation or explanation is a function of the theoretical basis that can clarify a problem to be studied.
2. Prediction or prediction, meaning that the theoretical basis can be used to become the basis for the formulation of a hypothesis in a study.
3. Control means that the theoretical basis can be used to provide a suggestion as well as an effort to solve the problem.

That is an explanation of the theoretical basis as well as examples of the theoretical basis. Sinaumed’s can find out more about guidelines for writing scientific papers by reading and buying books available at sinaumedia, because as #FriendsWithoutLimits, sinaumedia always provides quality books. Buy and read the book right now!

• Time Management: Definition, Characteristics, and How
• 19 Tips and Tricks to Get Your Dream Scholarship
• 13 Secrets of How to Memorize Quickly and Easily, Try to Practice!
• How to Become a Pilot, Duties and Career Paths of a Pilot
• Preparations that Must Be Made in Facing the New Normal